CIVILAVIATIONREGULATIONS PARTIX AERODROMES

CARPARTIX

TableofContents Chapter1....................................................................................................................................1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9 General........................................................................................................................1 Applicability.................................................................................................................1 Definitions...................................................................................................................2 CommonReferenceSystems....................................................................................12 StandardsandRecommendedPractices..................................................................12 . RequirementstoHoldanAerodromeCertificate.......................................................1 GrantofanAerodromeCertificate.............................................................................1 ValidityofanAerodromeCertificate..........................................................................2 PersonnelRequirements.............................................................................................3 PurposeandScope......................................................................................................1 PreparationoftheAerodromeManual......................................................................1 LocationoftheAerodromeManual............................................................................2 InformationtobeIncludedintheAerodromeManual..............................................2 RevisionofInformation...............................................................................................3 General........................................................................................................................1 CompliancewithStandardsandPractices..................................................................1 ConformancewithAerodromeManual......................................................................1 ProvisionofAppropriateInfrastructureandServices................................................1 OperatingLimitations..................................................................................................2 InternalQualityAssurance..........................................................................................2 SafetyManagementSystem.......................................................................................4 CompetenceofOperationalandMaintenancePersonnel.........................................5 NotifyingandReportingInformationtotheAeronauticalInformationService ........6 .

Chapter2 AerodromeCertificationProcess............................................................................1

Chapter3 AerodromeManual.................................................................................................1

Chapter4 ObligationsoftheAerodromeOperator.................................................................1

4.10 NotifyingandReportingInformationtoAirTrafficServices.......................................8 4.11 IsolatedAircraftPosition.............................................................................................9 4.12 NotifyingandReportingInformationtoAircraftOperators.......................................9 4.13 ObligationstoRestrictCertainAircraft.....................................................................10

i

CARPARTIX 4.14 ReportingStatisticalInformation..............................................................................10 4.15 AerodromeOperationandMaintenanceProgramme.............................................10 4.16 Operation,MaintenanceandTestingofNavigationAids.........................................18 4.17 ObstacleControl........................................................................................................19 4.18 AerodromeOperatingApprovals..............................................................................19 4.19 ManagingUnsafeConditions....................................................................................22 4.20 SurfaceMovementGuidanceandControlSystems.................................................22 4.21 LowVisibilityProcedures..........................................................................................24 4.22 ApronManagementService.....................................................................................27 . 4.23 Aerodromevehicleoperations.................................................................................28 4.24 GroundServicingofAircraft......................................................................................30 4.25 WildlifeHazardManagementPlan...........................................................................30 4.26 AviationSecurity.......................................................................................................31 4.27 RunwayIncursionAwareness...................................................................................32 4.28 RescueandFireFightingService(RFFS)/AerodromeEmergencyPlanning..............32 Appendix1ApplicationforanAerodromeCertificate............................................................33 Appendix2ThisAppendixisNotUsed....................................................................................34 Appendix3ParticularstobeincludedinanAerodromeManual.............................................1 3.1 3.2 Part1General...........................................................................................................1 Part2ParticularsoftheAerodromeSite.................................................................1

3.3 Part 3 Particulars of the Aerodrome Required to be Reported to Aeronautical InformationService(AIS)........................................................................................................5 3.4 3.5 3.6 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 Part4SynopsisoftheAerodromeOperatingProceduresandSafetyMeasures....7 Part5RFFSAerodromeManualRequirements......................................................15 Part6AerodromeAdministrationandSafetyManagementSystem....................17 Purpose.......................................................................................................................1 . Applicability.................................................................................................................1 TechnicalAnalysis .......................................................................................................1 . ApprovalofDeviations................................................................................................1

Appendix4ConductofAeronauticalStudies............................................................................1

Appendix5AeronauticalDataQualityRequirements...............................................................1 Appendix6IssueofaNOTAM...................................................................................................1 Appendix7AerodromeReferenceCode...................................................................................1

ii

CARPARTIX Appendix8PhysicalCharacteristics..........................................................................................1 . 8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 8.6 8.7 9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4 9.5 9.6 9.7 9.8 9.9 AerodromeDesign......................................................................................................1 AerodromeReferencePoint.......................................................................................1 Runways......................................................................................................................1 Taxiways....................................................................................................................20 HoldingBays,RunwayHoldingPositionsandIntermediateHoldingPositions........26 Aprons.......................................................................................................................28 DeclaredDistances....................................................................................................29 General........................................................................................................................1 EmergencyLighting.....................................................................................................3 AeronauticalBeacons..................................................................................................3 Identificationbeacon..................................................................................................4 ApproachLightingSystems.........................................................................................5 VisualApproachSlopeIndicatorSystems.................................................................15 CirclingGuidanceLights............................................................................................24 RunwayLeadinLightingSystems.............................................................................25 RunwayThresholdIdentificationLights....................................................................26

Appendix9AerodromeLighting................................................................................................1

9.10 RunwayEdgeLights...................................................................................................26 9.11 RunwayThresholdandWingBarLights ...................................................................27 . 9.12 RunwayEndLights....................................................................................................29 9.13 RunwayCentreLineLights........................................................................................33 9.14 RunwayTouchdownZoneLights..............................................................................34 9.15 RapidExitTaxiwayIndicatorLights...........................................................................35 9.16 StopwayLights..........................................................................................................36 9.17 TaxiwayCentreLineLights........................................................................................36 9.18 TaxiwayEdgeLights..................................................................................................41 . 9.19 RunwayTurnPadLights............................................................................................42 9.20 StopBars....................................................................................................................43 9.21 IntermediateHoldingPositionLights........................................................................44 9.22 RunwayGuardLights ................................................................................................45 . 9.23 ApronFloodlighting...................................................................................................47 9.24 VisualDockingGuidanceSystem..............................................................................48
iii

CARPARTIX 9.25 AircraftStandManoeuvringGuidanceLights...........................................................49 9.26 RoadHoldingPositionLight......................................................................................50 9.27 LightsinUnserviceableorClosedAreas...................................................................51 9.28 LightsforTemporaryClosureofRunway..................................................................52 9.29 ColourSpecifications.................................................................................................53 Appendix10SecondaryPowerSupplyMaximumSwitchOverTimes......................................1 Appendix11Signs......................................................................................................................1 11.1 General........................................................................................................................1 11.2 VariableSigns............................................................................................................20 11.3 MandatoryInstructionSigns.....................................................................................21 11.4 InformationSigns......................................................................................................23 11.5 VORAerodromeCheckPointSign............................................................................26 11.6 AerodromeIdentificationSign..................................................................................28 11.7 AircraftStandIdentificationSigns.............................................................................28 11.8 INSSigns....................................................................................................................28 11.9 RoadHoldingPositionSign.......................................................................................29 Appendix12MarkingsandMarkers..........................................................................................1 12.1 General........................................................................................................................1 12.2 RunwayDesignationMarking.....................................................................................2 12.3 RunwayCentreLineMarking......................................................................................4 12.4 ThresholdMarking......................................................................................................5 12.5 AimingPointMarking..................................................................................................7 12.6 TouchdownZoneMarking..........................................................................................8 12.7 RunwaySideStripeMarking.....................................................................................11 12.8 TaxiwayCentreLineMarking....................................................................................11 12.9 RunwayTurnPadMarking........................................................................................13 12.10 RunwayHoldingPositionMarking............................................................................14 12.11 IntermediateHoldingPositionMarking....................................................................16 12.12 VORAerodromeCheckPointMarking......................................................................16 12.13 AircraftStandMarkings ............................................................................................17 . 12.14 ApronSafetyLines.....................................................................................................18 12.15 RoadHoldingPositionMarking................................................................................19 12.16 MandatoryInstructionMarking................................................................................19
iv

CARPARTIX 12.17 InformationMarking.................................................................................................21 12.18 Markers.....................................................................................................................22 12.19 UnpavedRunwayEdgeMarkers...............................................................................22 12.20 StopwayEdgeMarkers..............................................................................................22 12.21 TaxiwayEdgeMarkers...............................................................................................22 12.22 TaxiwayCentreLineMarkers....................................................................................23 12.23 UnpavedTaxiwayEdgeMarkers...............................................................................23 12.24 BoundaryMarkers.....................................................................................................24 12.25 MarkingRestrictedUseAreas...................................................................................25 12.26 DesignofMandatoryInstructionandInformationMarkings...................................28 Appendix13ObstacleControl&Marking.................................................................................1 13.1 ObstacleLimitationSurfaces.......................................................................................1 13.2 ObstacleLimitationRequirements .............................................................................7 . 13.3 MarkingofObjects....................................................................................................17 13.4 LightingofObjects ....................................................................................................21 . Appendix14ICAOStatisticalReportingForm...........................................................................1 14.1 StatisticstobeReported.............................................................................................2 14.2 DefinitionofTermsUsed............................................................................................3 14.3 UnitsofMeasurement................................................................................................4 14.4 Symbols.......................................................................................................................4 Appendix15BirdStrikeReportingForm...................................................................................1 Appendix16Heliports...............................................................................................................1

CARPARTIX AmendmentstoCARPartIX

InitialIssue 1January2002 Amendment1 1January2005

Introduction of Civil Aviation Regulation Part IX Aerodrome Licensing baseduponICAOAnnex14VolumeIAmendment4 Inclusion of SMS aerodrome briefing requirements; ICAO statistical and financial reporting; clarification of contents required in aerodrome emergencyplan. Comprehensive reformatting of CAR Part IX; Annex 14 Vol 1 SARPs, inclusiveofAmendment7,incorporated;qualityassurancerequirements included; requirements for reporting obstacle/terrain data included; reportingtoaerodromecontroltowerincluded;aerodromemaintenance requirements clarified; requirements for navaids operation and maintenance included; requirements for Authority approvals included; mandatoryrequirementsforinstallationanduseofstopbarsAerodrome Manual Part2additionalplansrequired;Aerodrome ManualPart4 requirements clarified; Aerodrome Manual Part 5 SMS requirements clarified; RESA distances defined; clearance distances on aircraft stands defined; requirements for lighted closure marking included; Obstacle controlstandardsclarified Editorial changes to Appendix 9, 11 and 13 correcting incorrect referencestoAppendixFigures. Amendment to Chapter 4, Clause 4.7, including reference to new CAR PartXSafetyManagementSystem CreationofSubparts1and2,relocationandamendment ofRFFSRules intosubpart2andrelocationofAppendix14intoSubpart2. IntroductionofAppendices2,3and4toSubpart2. EditorialchangestoSubpart1asaresultofabovechanges.

Amendment2 1January2006

Amendment3 1January2008 Amendment4 1July2009

Revision

Completerevisionofthefulldocument.Subpart2,RFFSRules,removed December2010 andnowinnewCARPartXI.

CARPARTIX

CHAPTER1 1.1 1.1.1 GENERAL Civil Aviation Regulations Part IX is issued by the Authority in pursuit of its obligations to ensure enforcement of accepted international regulations (including the State Safety Programme) and standards at aerodromes of the Stateandtofollowuptheirexecutionincoordinationwiththelocalaerodrome authority/operators. The specifications contained herein are based upon the Standards and Recommended Practices of Annex 14 Volume 1 and 2 and Annex 15 to the ConventiononInternationalCivilAviationinsofarastheyhavebeenadoptedby theUnitedArabEmirates. Designstandardsareappliedbaseduponthe AerodromeReferenceCode.The intentofthereferencecodeistoprovideasimplemethodforinterrelatingthe numerous specifications concerning the characteristics of aerodromes so as to provide a series of aerodrome facilities that are suitable for aircraft that are intendedtooperateattheaerodrome. These Regulations have been framed in such a way that the specifications for physicalinfrastructure,visualaidsandnavigationalaidscanbeadoptedforuse byinternationalanddomesticaerodromes.Thespecificationscontainedherein areconsideredtobeminimumacceptablestandards. An aerodrome certified in accordance with Civil Aviation RegulationPart IX will be suitable for use by helicopters. Presently there is no section dealing exclusivelywiththecriteriaforhelicopteroperations.Proposalsforthedesignof helicopter heliports and helidecks shall be in accordance with ICAO Annex 14 Volume1and2. APPLICABILITY These Regulations apply to all aerodromes served by aircraft conducting an Air ServicewithintheUAE. Anaerodromeoperator,whoisnotanoperatorofaninternationalaerodrome, mayapplyforanAerodromeCertificateundertheseRegulations. TheAerodromeOperatorwillbesubjecttothesameinitialandongoingannual feesasstatedinFederalCabinetDecreeNumber4/2003dated3February2003. Civil Aviation Regulation Part IX represents the minimum requirements to achieveanacceptablelevelofsafety.

1.1.2

1.1.3

1.1.4

1.1.5

1.2 1.2.1 1.2.2 1.2.3 1.2.4

Chapter11

CARPARTIX 1.2.5 1.3 1.3.1 1.3.2 WhereveracolourisreferredtointheseRegulations,thespecificationsforthat colourgiveninAppendix9oftheseRegulationsshallapply. DEFINITIONS The use of the word shall in these Regulations means the requirement is mandatory. The use of the word should does not mean that compliance is optional but ratherthat,whereinsurmountabledifficultiesexist,theAuthoritymayacceptan alternative means of compliance, provided that an acceptable safety assurance from the Aerodrome Operator shows that the safety requirements will not be reducedbelowthatintendedbytherequirement. The terms described below shall have the following meaning whenever they appearintheseRegulations: Accuracy.Adegreeofconformancebetweentheestimatedormeasuredvalue andthetruevalue. Accepted/AcceptablemeansnotobjectedtobytheAuthorityassuitableforthe purposeintended. Advanced Surface Movement Guidance and Control System (ASMGCS). A system providing routing, guidance and surveillance for the control of aircraft andvehiclesinordertomaintainthedeclaredsurfacemovementrateunderall weather conditions within the aerodrome visibility operational level (AVOL) whilemaintainingtherequiredsafety. Aerodrome. A defined area on land or water (including any buildings, installationsandequipment)intendedtobeusedeitherwhollyorinpartforthe arrival,departureandsurfacemovementofaircraft. Aerodrome Beacon. Aeronautical beacon used to indicate the location of an aerodromefromtheair. AerodromeCertificate.AcertificateissuedbytheAuthorityunderCivilAviation RegulationPartIXfortheoperationofanaerodrome. Aerodrome Certificate Low Capacity. A certificate issued by the Authority underCivilAviationRegulationPartIXfortheoperationofanaerodromethatis servedbyaircraftconductinganairserviceoperation,withamaximumcapacity of10passengerseatsoraMTOWlessthan5700kgs. Aerodrome Certificate Verification Audit. An inspection of the aerodrome facilities and services and audit of the safety manuals and compliance statementsforcertification.

1.3.3

Chapter12

CARPARTIX Aerodrome Control Tower. A unit established to provide air traffic control servicetoaerodrometraffic. AerodromeControlService.Airtrafficcontrolserviceforaerodrometraffic. AerodromeElevation.TheelevationofthehighestpointoftheLandingArea. Aerodrome Facilities and Equipment. Facilities and equipment, inside or outside the boundaries of the aerodrome, that are constructed or installed, operated and maintained for the arrival, departure and surface movement of aircraft. Aerodrome Identification Sign. A sign placed on an aerodrome to aid in identifyingtheaerodromefromtheair. Aerodrome Manual. The manual that forms the exposition and is part of the application for an Aerodrome Certificate pursuant to these Regulations, includinganyamendmentstheretoacceptedbytheAuthority. Aerodrome Operator. In relation to a certified aerodrome, the Aerodrome Certificateholder Aerodrome Reference Point. The designated geographical location of an aerodrome. AerodromeTrafficDensity. Light.Wherethenumberofmovementsinthemeanbusyhouris not greater than 15 per runway or typically less than 20 total aerodromemovements. Medium. Where the number of movements in the mean busy hourisoftheorderof16to25perrunwayortypicallybetween 20to35totalaerodromemovements. Heavy.Wherethenumberofmovementsinthemeanbusyhour is 26 or more per runway or typically more than 35 total aerodromemovements. AeronauticalBeacon.Anaeronauticalgroundlightvisibleatallazimuths,either continuouslyorintermittently,todesignateaparticularpointonthesurfaceof theearth. Aeronautical Ground Light. Any light specially provided as an aid to air navigation,otherthanalightdisplayedonanaircraft. Aeronautical Study. A study of an aeronautical problem to identify possible solutionsandselectasolutionthatisacceptablewithoutdegradingsafety. Chapter13

CARPARTIX AeroplaneReferenceFieldLength.Theminimumfieldlengthrequiredfortake off at maximum certificated takeoff mass, sea level, standard atmospheric conditions,stillairandzerorunwayslope,asshownintheappropriateaircraft flight manual prescribed by the certificating authority or equivalent data from theaircraftmanufacturer.Fieldlengthmeansbalancedfieldlengthforaircraft, ifapplicable,ortakeoffdistanceinothercases. Aircraft. Any machine that can derive support in the atmosphere from the reactions of the air other than the reactions of the air against the earths surface.Thiscomprisesfixedwingandvariablewingaircraftaswellasballoons andthelike,whenusedforcivilpurposes. AircraftClassificationNumber(ACN).Anumberexpressingtherelativeeffectof anaircraftonapavementforaspecifiedstandardsubgradecategory. AirService.Anairserviceopentothepublicandperformedbyanaircraftfor thepublictransportofpassengers,mailorcargoforremunerationorhire. AircraftStand.Adesignatedareaonanapronintendedtobeusedforparking anaircraft. ApprovedbytheAuthority,meansdocumentedbytheAuthorityassuitablefor thepurposeintended. Apron.Adefinedarea,onalandaerodrome,intendedtoaccommodateaircraft forpurposesofloadingorunloadingpassengers,mailorcargo,fuelling,parking ormaintenance. Apron Management Service. A service provided to regulate the activities and themovementofaircraftandvehiclesonanapron. Authority means the General Civil Aviation Authority of the United Arab EmiratesandisthecompetentbodyresponsibleforthesafetyregulationofCivil Aviation. BalkedLanding.Alandingmanoeuvrethatisunexpectedlydiscontinuedatany pointbelowtheobstacleclearancealtitude/height(OCA/H). Barrette. Three or more aeronautical ground lights closely spaced in a transverselinesothatfromadistancetheyappearasashortbaroflight. Calendar. Discrete temporal reference system that provides the basis for definingtemporalpositiontoaresolutionofoneday(ISO19108). Capacitor discharge light. A lamp in which highintensity flashes of extremely short duration are produced by the discharge of electricity at high voltage throughagasenclosedinatube.

Chapter14

CARPARTIX Certified Aerodrome. An aerodrome whose operator has been granted an AerodromeCertificate. Clearway. A defined rectangular area on the ground or water selected or prepared as a suitable area over which an aircraft may make a portion of its initialclimbtoaspecifiedheight. CyclicRedundancyCheck(CRC).Amathematicalalgorithmappliedtothedigital expressionofdatathatprovidesalevelofassuranceagainstlossoralterationof data. DataQuality.Adegreeorlevelofconfidencethatthedataprovidedmeetthe requirementsofthedatauserintermsofaccuracy,resolutionandintegrity. Datum.Anyquantityorsetofquantitiesthatmayserveasareferenceorbasis forthecalculationofotherquantities(ISO19104). Delethalisation. Below ground ramping to buried vertical face of construction designed to reduce risk of damage to aircraft running on cleared and graded areaofstrip. DeclaredDistances. Takeoff Run Available (TORA). The length of runway declared availableandsuitableforthegroundrunofanaircrafttakingoff. Takeoff Distance Available (TODA). The length of the Takeoff RunAvailableplusthelengthoftheclearway,ifprovided. AccelerateStop Distance Available (ASDA). The length of the TakeoffRunAvailableplusthelengthofthestopway,ifprovided. LandingDistanceAvailable(LDA).Thelengthofrunwaywhichis declared available and suitable for the ground run of an aircraft landing. DependentParallelApproaches.Simultaneousapproachestoparallelornear parallel Instrument Runways where radar separation minima between aircraft onadjacentextendedrunwaycentrelinesareprescribed. DisplacedThreshold.Athresholdnotlocatedattheextremityofarunway. Effective Intensity. The effective intensity of a flashing light is equal to the intensityofafixedlightofthesamecolourwhichwillproducethesamevisual rangeunderidenticalconditionsofobservation. EllipsoidHeight(Geodeticheight).Theheightrelatedtothereferenceellipsoid, measuredalongtheellipsoidalouternormalthroughthepointinquestion. Chapter15

CARPARTIX Fixed Light. A light having constant luminous intensity when observed from a fixedpoint. ForeignObjectDebris(FOD).Anydebrisontheairfieldthatcancausedamage toanaircraft. FrangibleObject.Anobjectoflowmassdesignedtobreak,distortoryieldon impactsoastopresenttheminimumhazardtoaircraft. Note:AdditionalinformationmaybefoundwithinICAODoc9157Aerodrome DesignManualPartVIFrangibility. Geodeticdatum.Aminimumsetofparametersrequiredtodefinelocationand orientation of the local reference system with respect to the global reference system/frame. Geoid.TheequipotentialsurfaceinthegravityfieldoftheEarthwhichcoincides withtheundisturbedMeanSeaLevel(MSL)extendedcontinuouslythroughthe continents. Geoid Undulation. The distance of the geoid above (positive) or below (negative)themathematicalreferenceellipsoid. Grading. Means levelling of the ground surface to meet the applicable slope requirements and so prepared or constructed as to minimise hazards arising fromdifferencesinloadbearingcapacitytoaircraftwhicharunwayortaxiwayis intended to serve, in the event of an aircraft excursion off the runway or taxiway. GregorianCalendar.Calendaringeneraluse;firstintroducedin1582todefinea year that more closely approximates the tropical year than the Julian calendar (ISO19108). Hazard Beacon. An aeronautical beacon used to designate a danger to air navigation. Heliport. An aerodrome or a defined area ona structure intended tobe used whollyorinpartforthearrival,departureandsurfacemovementofhelicopters. Holding Bay. A defined area where aircraft can be held, or bypassed, to facilitateefficientsurfacemovementofaircraft. Human Factors Principles. Principles which apply to aeronautical design, certification,training,operationsandmaintenanceandwhichseeksafeinterface betweenthe humanandothersystemcomponentsbyproperconsiderationto humanperformance.

Chapter16

CARPARTIX HumanPerformance.Humancapabilitiesandlimitationswhichhaveanimpact onthesafetyandefficiencyofaeronauticaloperations. Identification Beacon. An aeronautical beacon emitting a coded signal by meansofwhichaparticularpointofreferencecanbeidentified. IndependentParallelApproaches.Simultaneousapproachestoparallelornear parallel Instrument Runways where radar separation minima between aircraft onadjacentextendedrunwaycentrelinesarenotprescribed. Independent Parallel Departures. Simultaneous departures from parallel or nearparallelInstrumentRunways. Instrument Runway. One of the following types of runways intended for the operationofaircraftusinginstrumentapproachprocedures: NonprecisionApproachRunway.AnInstrumentRunwayserved by visual aids and a nonvisual aid providing at least directional guidanceadequateforastraightinapproach. PrecisionApproachRunway,CategoryI.AnInstrumentRunway servedbyILSand/orMLSandvisualaidsintendedforoperations withadecisionheightnotlowerthan60m(200ft)andeithera visibility not less than 800 m or a Runway Visual Range not less than550m. PrecisionApproachRunway,CategoryII.AnInstrumentRunway servedbyILSand/orMLSandvisualaidsintendedforoperations withadecisionheightlowerthan60m(200ft)butnotlowerthan 30m(100ft)andaRunwayVisualRangenotlessthan300m. PrecisionApproachRunway,CategoryIII.AnInstrumentRunway servedbyILSand/orMLStoandalongthesurfaceoftherunway and: A intended for operations with a decision height lower than30m(100ft),ornodecisionheightandaRunway VisualRangenotlessthan175m. B intended for operations with a decision height lower than15m(50ft),ornodecisionheightandaRunway VisualRangelessthan175mbutnotlessthan50m. Cintendedforoperationswithnodecisionheightandno RunwayVisualRangelimitations.

Chapter17

CARPARTIX

Note: Where decision height (DH) and Runway Visual Range (RVR) fall into different categories of operation, the instrument approach and landing operation would be conducted in accordance with the requirements of the mostdemandingcategory(e.g.anoperationwithaDHintherangeofCATIIIA but with an RVR in the range of CAT IIIB would be considered a CAT IIIB operationoranoperationwithaDHintherangeofCATIIbutwithanRVRin therangeofCATIwouldbeconsideredaCATIIoperation). Integrity(aeronauticaldata).Adegreeofassurancethatanaeronauticaldata and its value has not been lost nor altered since the data origination or authorizedamendment. Intermediate Holding Position. A designated position intended for traffic control at which taxiing aircraft and vehicles shall stop and hold until further clearedtoproceed,whensoinstructedbytheaerodromecontroltower. InternationalAerodrome.AnyaerodromedesignatedbytheAuthorityforthe arrival and departure of international air traffic, and where the formalities incident to customs, immigration, public health, animal and plant quarantine andsimilarproceduresarecarriedout. LandingArea.ThatpartofaMovementAreaintendedforthelandingortake offofaircraft. Laserbeam Critical Flight Zone (LCFZ). Airspace in the proximity of an aerodrome but beyond the LFFZ where the irradiance is restricted to a level unlikelytocauseglareeffects. LaserbeamFreeFlightZone(LFFZ).Airspaceintheimmediateproximitytothe aerodrome where the irradiance is restricted to a level unlikely to cause any visualdisruption. LaserbeamSensitiveFlightZone(LSFZ).Airspaceoutside,andnotnecessarily contiguouswith,theLFFZandLCFZwheretheirradianceisrestrictedtoalevel unlikelytocauseflashblindnessorafterimageeffects. Lighting System Reliability. The probability that the complete installation operates within the specified tolerances and that the system is operationally usable. Low Visibility Conditions (LVC). The met conditions requiring CAT II or CAT III instrumentapproaches. Low Visibility Procedures (LVP). The measures required to support safe operationsatanaerodromeinLowVisibilityConditions(LVC).

Chapter18

CARPARTIX Manoeuvring Area. That part of an aerodrome to be used for the takeoff, landingandtaxiingofaircraft,excludingaprons. Marker.Anobjectdisplayedabovegroundlevelinordertoindicateanobstacle ordelineateaboundary. Marking. A symbol or group of symbols displayed on the surface of the MovementAreainordertoconveyaeronauticalinformation. MovementArea.Thatpartofanaerodrometobeusedforthetakeoff,landing andtaxiingofaircraft,consistingoftheManoeuvringAreaandtheapron(s). NearparallelRunways.Nonintersectingrunwayswhoseextendedcentrelines haveanangleofconvergence/divergenceof15degreesorless. NonInstrumentRunway.Arunwayintendedfortheoperationofaircraftusing visualapproachprocedures. NormalFlightZone(NFZ).AirspacenotdefinedasLFFZ,LCFZorLSFZbutwhich mustbeprotectedfromlaserradiationcapableofcausingbiologicaldamageto theeye. Obstacle. All fixed (whether temporary or permanent) and mobile objects, or partsthereof,that: are located on an area intended for the surface movement of aircraft; thatextendaboveadefined surface intendedtoprotectaircraft inflight;or standoutsidethosedefinedsurfacesandthathavebeenassessed asbeingahazardtoairnavigation. Obstacle Free Zone (OFZ). The airspace above the Inner Approach Surface, InnerTransitionalSurfaces,andBalkedLandingSurfaceandthatportionofthe stripboundedbythesesurfaces,whichisnotpenetratedbyanyfixedobstacle other than a lowmass and frangibly mounted one required for air navigation purposes. OrthometricHeight.Heightofapointrelatedtothegeoid,generallypresented asanMSLelevation. Pavement Classification Number (PCN). A number expressing the bearing strengthofapavementforunrestrictedoperations. PrecisionApproachRunway.SeeInstrumentRunway. Primary Runway(s). Runway(s) used in preference to others whenever conditionspermit. Chapter19

CARPARTIX Protected Flight Zones. Airspace specifically designated to mitigate the hazardouseffectsoflaserradiation. Road. An established surface route on the Movement Area meant for the exclusiveuseofvehicles. RoadholdingPosition.Adesignatedpositionatwhichvehiclesmayberequired tohold. Runway. A defined rectangular area on a land aerodrome prepared for the landingandtakeoffofaircraft. Runway End Safety Area (RESA). An area symmetrical about the extended runway centre line and adjacent to the end of the strip primarily intended to reduce the risk of damage to an aircraft undershooting or overrunning the runway. RunwayGuardLights.Alightsystemintendedtocautionpilots,vehicledrivers andotherrunwayusersthattheyareabouttoenteranactiverunway. RunwayHoldingPosition.Adesignatedpositionintendedtoprotectarunway, an obstacle limitation surface or an ILS/MLS critical/sensitive area at which taxiingaircraftandvehiclesshallstopandhold,unlessotherwiseauthorizedby theaerodromecontroltower. Runway Strip. A defined area including the runway and stopway, if provided, intended: toreducetheriskofdamagetoaircraftrunningoffarunway;and to protect aircraft flying over it during takeoff or landing operations. RunwayTurnPad.Adefinedareaonalandaerodromeadjacenttoarunwayfor thepurposeofcompletinga180degreeturnonarunway. RunwayVisualRange(RVR).Therangeoverwhichthepilotofanaircraftonthe centre line of a runway can see the runway surface markings or the lights delineatingtherunwayoridentifyingitscentreline. SafetyManagementSystem(SMS).Asystematicapproachtomanagingsafety including the necessary organisational structure, accountabilities, policies and procedures. Segregated Parallel Operations. Simultaneous operations on parallel or near parallel Instrument Runways in which one runway is used exclusively for approachesandtheotherrunwayisusedexclusivelyfordepartures.

Chapter110

CARPARTIX Shoulder. An area adjacent to the edge of a pavement so prepared as to provideatransitionbetweenthepavementandtheadjacentsurface. Sign. Fixedmessagesign.Asignpresentingonlyonemessage. Variablemessagesign.Asigncapableofpresentingseveralpre determinedmessagesornomessage,asapplicable. State Safety Programme (SSP). An integrated set of regulations and activities forthemanagementofaviationsafetybytheState. StationDeclination.Analignmentvariationbetweenthezerodegreeradialofa VORandtruenorth,determinedatthetimetheVORstationiscalibrated. Stopway.Adefinedrectangularbrakingactionareaonthegroundattheendof take off run available prepared as a suitable area in which an aircraft can be stoppedinthecaseofanabandonedtakeoff. SurfaceMovementGuidanceandControl(SMGC).Asystemforthe provision ofguidancetoandcontrolof,allaircraft,groundvehiclesandpersonnelonthe MovementAreaofanaerodromeforthepreventionofcollisionsandtoensure thattrafficflowssmoothlyandfreely. Switchover Time (light). The time required for the actual intensity of a light measuredinagivendirectiontofallfrom50percentandrecoverto50percent during a power supply changeover, when the light is being operated at intensitiesof25percentorabove. TakeoffRunway.Arunwayintendedfortakeoffonly. Taxiway. A defined path on a land aerodrome established for the taxiing of aircraftandintendedtoprovidealinkbetweenonepartoftheaerodromeand another,including: Aircraft stand taxilane. A portion of an apron designated as a taxiwayandintendedtoprovideaccesstoaircraftstandsonly. Apron taxiway. A portion of a taxiway system located on an apron and intended to provide a through taxi route across the apron. Rapidexittaxiway.Ataxiwayconnectedtoarunwayatanacute angleanddesignedtoallowlandingaircrafttoturnoffathigher speeds than are achieved on other exit taxiways thereby minimizingrunwayoccupancytimes.

Chapter111

CARPARTIX TaxiwayIntersection.Ajunctionoftwoormoretaxiways. Taxiway Strip. An area including a taxiway intended to protect an aircraft operating on the taxiway and to reduce the risk of damage to an aircraft accidentallyrunningoffthetaxiway. Threshold.Thebeginningofthatportionoftherunwayusableforlanding. TouchdownZone. Theportion of arunway, beyond the threshold,whereitis intendedlandingaircraftfirstcontacttherunway. VicinityofanAerodrome.Withrespecttoanaerodromewildlifemanagement planis13kilometresfromtheAerodromeReferencePoint(ARP). UnserviceableArea.ApartoftheMovementAreathatisunfitandunavailable forusebyaircraft. UsabilityFactor.Thepercentageoftime duringwhichtheuseofa runway or systemofrunwaysisnotrestrictedbecauseofthecrosswindcomponent. Work Area. Means a part of an aerodrome in which maintenance or constructionworksareinprogress. 1.4 1.4.1 COMMONREFERENCESYSTEMS HorizontalReferenceSystem World Geodetic System 1984 (WGS84) shall be used as the horizontal (geodetic) reference system. Reported aeronautical geographical coordinates (indicating latitude and longitude) shall be expressed in terms of the WGS84 geodeticreferencedatum. 1.4.2 VerticalReferenceSystem Mean Sea Level (MSL) datum, which gives the relationship of gravityrelated height(elevation)toasurfaceknownasthegeoid,shallbeusedasthevertical referencesystem. 1.4.3 TemporalReferenceSystem The Gregorian calendar and Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) shall be used as thetemporalreferencesystem. 1.5 1.5.1 STANDARDSANDRECOMMENDEDPRACTICES Wherereferenced,themethodologiesandspecificationscontainedintheAirport DesignManualsandAirportServiceManualsshallbeconsideredtorepresentan acceptableformofcomplianceunlessotherwiseindicatedbytheAuthority. Chapter112

CARPARTIX 1.5.2 Guidance material applicable to these Regulations is contained in the following documents: ICAOAnnex4AeronauticalCommunications ICAOAnnex10Vol.1 ICAOAnnex14VolumeIAerodromeDesignandOperation ICAOAnnex14VolumeIIHeliports AerodromeDesignManual(ICAODoc9157) Part1Runways Part2Taxiways,ApronsandHoldingBays Part3Pavements Part4VisualAids Part5ElectricalSystems Part6Frangibility AirportPlanningManual(ICAODoc9184) Part1MasterPlanning Part2LandUseandEnvironmentalControl Part3GuidelinesforConsultant/ConstructionServices AirportServicesManual(ICAODoc9137) Part1RescueandFireFighting Part2PavementSurfaceConditions Part3BirdControlandReduction Part5RemovalofDisabledAircraft Part6ControlofObstacles Part7AirportEmergencyPlanning Part8AirportOperationalServices Part9AirportMaintenancePractices ManualonCertificationofAerodromes(ICAODoc9774) ManualofSurfaceMovementGuidanceandControlSystems(SMGCS)(ICAO Doc9476)

Chapter113

CARPARTIX Advanced Surface Movement Guidance and Control Systems (ASMGCS) Manual(ICAODoc9830) ManualofAllWeatherOperations(ICAODoc9365) HeliportManual(ICAODoc9261) SafetyManagementSystems(ICAODoc9859) ManualontheICAOBirdStrikeInformationSystem(IBIS)(ICAODoc9332) HumanFactorsTrainingManual(ICAODoc9683) ICAOAnnex10AeronauticalTelecommunications Volume1

ManualonTestingofRadioNavigationAids(ICAODoc8071) AircraftOperations(ICAODoc8168) UAECivilAviationLaw,Article27 Civil Aviation Regulation (CAR) Part XI Aerodrome Emergency Service, EquipmentandFacilities Civil Aviation Regulation Part VI Chapter 3 Aircraft Accident and Incident Investigation CivilAviationAdvisoryPublication(CAAP)24AirportBriefingRequirements. Civil Aviation Advisory Publication (CAAP) 30 Issue and Verification of an AerodromeCertificate CivilAviationAdvisoryPublication(CAAP)36RunwayandMovementArea Inspections CivilAviationAdvisoryPublication(CAAP)43ForeignObjectDebris. Notice to Aerodrome Certificate Holders (NOTAC) 012010 On Notice Procedure PANSOPSVolumeII Recommendations for Surface Colours for Visual Signalling (Publication No. 392 (TC106) 1983) by the International Commission on Illumination/ CommissionInternationaledelEclairage(CIE)

Chapter114

CARPARTIX 1.5.3 Procedures for Air Navigation Services (PANS) shall be applied except where specifically deleted or modified in these Regulations with similar mandatory statusasfortheSARPs.

Chapter115

CARPARTIX

CHAPTER2 AERODROMECERTIFICATIONPROCESS 2.1 2.1.1 REQUIREMENTSTOHOLDANAERODROMECERTIFICATE AnoperatorofanaerodromeservedbyaircraftconductinganAirServiceshallbe in possession of an Aerodrome Certificate. Except that the operator of an aerodrome served by aircraft conducting an Air Service, with a maximum capacity of 10 passenger seats or a MTOW of less than 5,700 kgs, may be in possessionofAerodromeCertificateLowCapacity. Any other Aerodrome Operator may apply to the Authority for an Aerodrome Certificate. Note:Offshorehelidecksandemergencyheliportsarenotcoveredwithinthese Regulations. 2.1.3 AnapplicationforanAerodromeCertificateshallbesubmittedtotheAuthority, not later than 26 weeks prior to intended operation, for approval. The applicationshallbeinaformprescribedbytheAuthority. GRANTOFANAERODROMECERTIFICATE Subjecttotheprovisionsin2.2.2theAuthoritymayapprovetheapplicationand accept the Aerodrome Manual submitted under 2.1.3 and grant an Aerodrome Certificatetotheapplicant. BeforegrantinganAerodromeCertificate,theAuthoritymustbesatisfiedthat: a) Theaerodromesfacilities,servicesandequipmentareinaccordancewith the Civil Aviation Regulations, other relevant ICAO standards and recommendedpracticesandallAviationSecurityrequirements; b) TheAerodromeManualpreparedfortheapplicantsaerodromecontains alltherelevantinformation; c) The aerodromes Safety Management System and supporting operating proceduresmakesatisfactoryprovisionforthesafetyofaircraft; d) TheAerodromeemergencyserviceisstaffed,trained,equipped,operated andorganisedtothemeettherequirementsofCivilAviationRegulation (CAR)PartXIAerodromeEmergencyService,EquipmentandFacilities; e) The applicant will be able to operate and maintain the aerodrome properly;and f) Payment of the aerodrome certification fees, as specified by Federal CabinetDecree,hasbeenreceived. Chapter21

2.1.2

2.2 2.2.1

2.2.2

CARPARTIX 2.2.3 2.2.4 TheAuthoritymayrefusetograntanAerodromeCertificatetoanapplicantwith referencetoUAECivilAviationLaw,Article27. Afterasuccessfulcompletionoftheprocessingoftheapplicationandinspection oftheaerodrome,theAuthority,whilegrantingtheAerodromeCertificatemay endorsetheconditionsofthetypeofuseoftheaerodromeandotherdetailsas shownintheAerodromeCertificate. VALIDITYOFANAERODROMECERTIFICATE Thevalidityofthecertificate isbaseduponthephysicalcharacteristics,type of useoftheaerodromeandcontinuedoperationinaccordancewithCivilAviation Regulations (CAR), Civil Aviation Advisory Publications (CAAP), Notice to Aerodrome Certificate Holders (NOTAC) and Information Bulletins (IB) as publishedbytheAuthority,inadditiontoICAOSARPS.Anychangemadetothe physical characteristics or use of the aerodrome, as documented in the Aerodrome Manual, that is not accepted by the Authority, shall invalidate the AerodromeCertificate. TheAerodromeCertificateshallremainvalid a) subject to the payment of a renewal fee, the amount as specified by FederalCabinetDecree;and b) subjecttoperiodicsurveillanceauditsatleastannuallyconductedatthe discretionoftheAuthorityconfirmingongoingcompliancewiththeCivil Aviation Regulations. The Authority shall undertake an Aerodrome Certificate Verification Audit at least once in every three year period followingtheissueofanAerodromeCertificate;or c) until the Aerodrome Certificate is either surrendered, transferred or revoked. 2.3.3 AnAerodromeCertificateholdermustgivetheAuthoritynotlessthan3months writtennoticeofthedateonwhichthecertificateistobesurrenderedinorder that suitable promulgation action can be taken. The Authority will cancel the certificateonthedatespecifiedinthenotice; TheAuthoritymayapprove,andissueaninstrumentoftransferofanAerodrome Certificatetoatransfereewhere a) thecurrentholderoftheAerodromeCertificatenotifiestheAuthorityin writingatleast3monthsbeforeceasingtooperatetheaerodrome,that the current holder will cease to operate the aerodrome as of the date specifiedinthenotice; b) thecurrentholderoftheAerodromeCertificatenotifiestheAuthorityin writing,thenameofthetransferee;

2.3 2.3.1

2.3.2

2.3.4

Chapter22

CARPARTIX c) thetransfereeappliesinwritingtotheAuthoritywithin3monthsbefore the current holder of the Aerodrome Certificate ceases to operate the aerodrome, for the Aerodrome Certificate to be transferred to the transferee;and d) therequirementssetoutin2.2.2aremet. 2.3.5 Further explanation regarding the requirements and timelines for the application, processing and issue of an Aerodrome Certificate may be found withinCAAP30IssueandVerificationofanAerodromeCertificate. PERSONNELREQUIREMENTS EachapplicantforthegrantofanAerodromeCertificateshallengage,employor contract: a) a senior person identified as the Accountable Person who has the authority within the applicant's organisation to ensure that all activities undertaken by the organisation can be financed and carried out in accordancewiththerequirementsprescribedbytheseRegulations; b) a senior person or group of senior persons who are responsible for ensuring that the aerodrome and its operation comply with the requirements of these Regulations. Such nominated person or persons shallbeultimatelyresponsibletotheAccountablePerson;and c) sufficient personnel to operate and maintain the aerodrome and its services and facilities in accordance with the requirements of these Regulations. 2.4.2 The applicant shall establish a procedure for initially assessing and for maintainingthecompetenceofpersonnelrequiredtooperateandmaintainthe aerodromeanditsservices,equipmentandfacilities.

2.4 2.4.1

Chapter23

CARPARTIX CHAPTER3 AERODROMEMANUAL 3.1 3.1.1 PURPOSEANDSCOPE The Aerodrome Manual is a fundamental requirement of the certification process.Itshallcontainallthepertinentinformationconcerningaerodromesite, facilities, services, equipment, operating procedures, organisation, and managementincludingSafetyManagementSystem.Theinformationpresented intheAerodromeManualshalldemonstratethattheaerodromeconformstothe certification standards and practices and that there are no apparent shortcomingsthatwouldadverselyaffectthesafetyofaircraftoperations. TheAerodromeManualispartoftheexpositionandshallbeusedasareference document and provides a checklist of Aerodrome Certificate standards to be maintained and the level of airside services at the aerodrome. Information provided in the Aerodrome Manual will enable the Authority to assess the suitabilityoftheaerodromefortheaircraftoperationsproposed.Itisthebasic referenceguidefortheAuthoritytoutilisewhenconductingsiteinspectionsfor granting an Aerodrome Certificate and for subsequent safety audit and inspections. The Aerodrome Manual shall be produced by the Aerodrome Operator and requires to be accepted by the Authority with respect to the standards, conditions and the levels of services to be maintained at the aerodrome. The Aerodrome Manual is subject to amendment, in order to ensure that it provides current and accurate information at all times. The Aerodrome Certificateholderisresponsibleformaintainingthecurrencyandaccuracyinthis respectandalsoforsubmittingamendmentstotheAuthorityforacceptance. PREPARATIONOFTHEAERODROMEMANUAL Theoperatorofacertifiedaerodromeshallhaveamanual,tobeknownasthe AerodromeManual,fortheaerodrome. TheAerodromeManualshall: a) betypewrittenorprintedandsignedbytheAerodromeOperator.The documentshouldbesubmittedelectronically; b) beinaformatthatiseasytorevise; c) have a system for recording the currency of pages and amendments, thereto,andshouldincludeapageforloggingrevisions; d) beorganisedinamannerthatwillfacilitatethepreparation,reviewand acceptanceprocess;and Chapter31

3.1.2

3.1.3

3.2 3.2.1 3.2.2

CARPARTIX e) provideacompletedAerodromeManualChapter3Checklist. Note: Aerodrome Manual Chapter 3 Checklist is available as an electronicpublicationontheGCAAwebsite(www.gcaa.ae). 3.3 3.3.1 LOCATIONOFTHEAERODROMEMANUAL The Aerodrome Operator shall provide the Authority with one complete and currentelectronicversionoftheAerodromeManualorgivewrittenconfirmation ofhowandwheretoaccessthecontrolledelectronicversionofthedocument. The Aerodrome Operator shall keep at least one complete and current copy of the Aerodrome Manual at the aerodrome and one copy at the operators principalplaceofbusiness,ifdifferentfromtheaerodrome. The Aerodrome Operator shall make the Aerodrome Manual available to all relevant aerodrome personnel and for inspection by the Authority. This can be via hard copy or alternatively by electronic format contingent upon the staff memberhavingimmediateaccesstotheinformation. INFORMATIONTOBEINCLUDEDINTHEAERODROMEMANUAL TheAerodromeOperatorshallincludeinanAerodromeManual,theparticulars as specified in Appendix 3 of these Regulations, to the extent these are applicabletotheaerodrome,underthefollowingparts: Part1: GeneralInformation

3.3.2

3.3.3

3.4 3.4.1

Part2: ParticularsoftheAerodromeSite Part3: ParticularsoftheAerodromeRequiredtobeReportedtothe AeronauticalInformationService Part4: SynopsisoftheAerodromeOperatingProceduresandSafety Measures Part5: RFFSAerodromeManualRequirements Part6: AerodromeAdministrationandSafetyManagementSystem 3.4.2 If a particular is not included in the Aerodrome Manual because it is not applicable to the aerodrome, the Aerodrome Operator must state in the AerodromeManual: a) thattheparticularisnotapplicable;and b) whytheparticularisnonapplicable.

Chapter32

CARPARTIX 3.5 3.5.1 REVISIONOFINFORMATION The Aerodrome Operator shall amend the Aerodrome Manual, whenever necessary,inordertomaintaintheaccuracyofthemanualandthevalidityofthe AerodromeCertificate. To maintain the accuracy of the Aerodrome Manual, the Authority may issue written directionstoanAerodromeOperatorrequiringtheoperator toalteror amendthemanualinaccordancewiththedirections. Toensurethesafetyofaircraft,theAuthoritymaygivewrittendirectionstoan AerodromeOperatortoaltertheproceduressetoutintheAerodromeManual. AnAerodromeOperatormustnotifytheAuthority,nolaterthan30days,ofany changes that the Aerodrome Operator wishes to make to the Aerodrome Manual. TheAuthorityshallaccepttheAerodromeManualandanyamendmentsthereto, provided these meet the requirements Aerodrome Operator of these Regulations.

3.5.2

3.5.3 3.5.4

3.5.5

Chapter33

CARPARTIX

CHAPTER4 OBLIGATIONSOFTHEAERODROMEOPERATOR 4.1 GENERAL ThegrantofanAerodromeCertificateobligestheAerodromeOperatortoensure safety,regularityandefficiencyofaircraftoperationsattheaerodrome;toallow personnel authorised by the Authority access to the aerodrome to carry out safety audits, inspections and testing, and to be responsible for notifying and reportingcertaininformationasprescribedintheseRegulations. 4.2 COMPLIANCEWITHSTANDARDSANDPRACTICES The Aerodrome Operator shall comply with the standards and practices contained in the applicable Civil Aviation Regulations, Civil Aviation Advisory Publications,NOTACsandInformationBulletinspublishedbytheAuthority.The AerodromeOperatorshallalsocomplywithanyconditionsthatmaybeendorsed intheAerodromeCertificatepursuanttoClause2.2.4oftheseRegulations. 4.3 CONFORMANCEWITHAERODROMEMANUAL SubjecttoanydirectionsthattheAuthoritymayissue,theAerodromeOperator shall operate and maintain the aerodrome in accordance with the procedures andmethodologiesoutlinedintheAerodromeManual. 4.4 4.4.1 PROVISIONOFAPPROPRIATEINFRASTRUCTUREANDSERVICES The Aerodrome Operator shall ensure that the physical characteristics of the aerodrome;theobstaclelimitationsurfaces;thevisualaidsfornavigationandfor denotingobstaclesandrestricteduseareas;andtheequipment,installationsand servicesrequiredfortheaerodromearecommensuratewiththefollowing: a) The characteristics of the aircraft that the aerodrome is intended to serve; b) Theoperatingmodalityoftherunway; c) Thelowestmeteorologicalminimaintendedforeachrunway;and d) Theambientlightconditionsintendedfortheoperationofaircraft. 4.4.2 The requirements of (a) to (d) shall comply with the minimum specifications outlined in the Appendices to these Regulations, and/or ICAO Annex 10 (AeronauticalCommunications)asapplicable.

Chapter41

CARPARTIX 4.5 OPERATINGLIMITATIONS The Aerodrome Operator shall when necessary for the safety of aircraft operations at their aerodrome, establish any limitations on the use of the aerodrome that arise from the aerodrome design or the facilities or services provided at the aerodrome. These shall be documented in Part 1 of the AerodromeManual. 4.6 4.6.1 INTERNALQUALITYASSURANCE EachAerodromeOperatorshallestablishaninternalqualityassurancesystemto ensurecompliancewith,andtheadequacyof,theproceduresrequiredbythese Regulations,andforthecontinuanceinimprovementofsafetylevels. Theinternalqualityassurancesystemshallinclude: a) safety policy and procedures that are relevant to the applicants organisationalgoals; b) procedurestoensurethataeronauticaldataatanymomentistraceable toitsoriginsoastoallowanydataanomaliesorerrors,detectedduring production/maintenancephasesorinoperationaluse,tobecorrected; c) a procedure to ensure quality indicators, including defect and incident reports,andpersonnelandcustomerfeedback,aremonitoredtoidentify existingproblemsorpotentialcausesofproblemswithinthesystem; d) aprocedureforcorrectiveactiontoensureanyproblemsthathavebeen identifiedwithinthesystemarecorrectedinatimelymanner; e) a procedure for preventive action to ensure that potential causes of problemsthathavebeenidentifiedwithinthesystemareremedied; f) aninternalqualityauditprogrammetoaudittheapplicantsorganisation for conformity with the procedures in its Aerodrome Manual and associateddocumentationandachievementofthegoalssetinitssafety; and g) management review procedures that shall include the use of statistical analysis, to ensure the continuing suitability and effectiveness of the internalqualityassurancesysteminsatisfyingtherequirementsofthese Regulations. 4.6.3 4.6.4 The safety policy and procedures shall ensure that the safety policy is understood,implemented,andmaintainedatalllevelsoftheorganisation. Theprocedureforcorrectiveactionshallspecifyhow:

4.6.2

Chapter42

CARPARTIX a) tocorrectanyidentifiedproblem;and b) tofollowupacorrectiveactioninatimelymannertoensuretheactionis effective;and c) management will measure the effectiveness of any corrective action taken. 4.6.5 Theprocedureforpreventiveactionshallspecifyhow: a) tocorrectapotentialproblem;and b) tofollowupapreventiveactiontoensuretheactioniseffective;and c) to amend any procedure required by these Regulations as a result of a preventiveaction;and d) management will measure the effectiveness of any preventive action taken. 4.6.6 Theinternalqualityauditprogrammeshall: a) specifythesection,item,frequencyandlocationoftheauditstakinginto accountthenatureoftheactivitytobeaudited; b) ensure audits are carried out by trained auditing personnel who are independent of those having direct responsibility for the activity being audited; c) ensuretheresultsofauditsarereportedtothepersonnelresponsiblefor the activity being audited and the manager responsible for internal audits; d) require preventive or corrective action to be taken by the personnel responsible for the activity being audited if problems are found by the audit;and e) ensurefollowupauditstoreviewtheeffectivenessofanypreventiveor correctiveactionhasbeentakeninatimelymanner. Note: All audit findings and observations shall be evidenced and properly recorded. 4.6.7 MaterialtobeissuedaspartoftheIntegratedAeronauticalInformationPackage shall be thoroughly checked and coordinated with relevant parties before it is submittedtotheAeronauticalInformationService,inordertomakecertainthat allnecessaryinformationhasbeenincludedandthatitiscorrectindetailpriorto submissiontotheAuthority. Chapter43

CARPARTIX 4.6.8 Validation and verification procedures shall be established which ensure that quality requirements (accuracy resolution, integrity) and traceability of aeronauticaldataasspecifiedinAppendix5aremet. Protection of electronic aeronautical data while stored or in transit shall be totallymonitoredbytheCyclicRedundancyCheck(CRC). To achieve protection if the integrity level of critical and essential aeronautical data as specified below and in Appendix 5 of these Regulations, a 32 or 24 bit CRCalgorithmshallapplyrespectively. To achieve protection if the integrity level of routine aeronautical data as specifiedbelowandinAppendix5oftheseRegulations,a16bitCRC algorithm shallapply: a) criticaldata,integritylevel1x108:thereisahighprobabilitywhenusing corrupted critical data that the continued safe flight and landing of an aircraftwouldbeseverelyatriskwiththepotentialforcatastrophe; b) essential data, integrity level 1 x 105: there is a low probability when usingcorruptedessentialdatathatthecontinuedsafeflightandlanding ofanaircraftwouldbeseverelyatriskwiththepotentialforcatastrophe; and c) routinedata,integritylevel1x103:thereisaverylowprobabilitywhen usingcorruptedroutinedatathatthecontinuedsafeflightandlandingof anaircraftwouldbeseverelyatriskwiththepotentialforcatastrophe. 4.7 4.7.1 SAFETYMANAGEMENTSYSTEM TheAerodromeOperatorshallestablishaSafetyManagementSystem(SMS)for theaerodromeasrequiredbyCivilAviationRegulation(CAR)PartX,thatasa minimum: a) identifiessafetyhazards; b) ensures remedial action necessary to maintain an acceptable level of safetyisimplemented; c) providesforcontinuousmonitoringandregularassessmentofthesafety levelachieved;and d) aimstomakecontinuousimprovementtotheoveralllevelofsafety. 4.7.2 TheSMSshallclearlydefinelinesofsafetyaccountabilitythroughtheAerodrome Operatorsorganisation,includingdirectaccountabilityforsafetyonthepartof seniormanagement.

4.6.9 4.6.10

4.6.11

Chapter44

CARPARTIX 4.7.3 The Aerodrome Operator shall as part of their SMS establish target levels of safety/keyperformanceindicatorsforatleastthefollowingsafetyareas: a) Accidentsandincidentsinvolvingaircraftontheground; b) Accidentsandincidentsinvolvingairsidegroundvehicles; c) Runwayfrictionmeasurements; d) AGLreliability(asitaffectsairportoperation); e) FOD materials found on airport pavements and runway/taxiway strip areas; f) BirdandWildlifestrikeswithaircraft; g) Fuelspillsandfuelhandlingaccidentsandincidents;and h) RescueandFireFightingvehiclereliability(asitaffectscategory). 4.7.4 The Aerodrome Operator shall oblige all the users of the aerodrome including fixedbaseoperatorsandorganisationswhichperformactivitiesindependentlyat the aerodromes in relation to flight or aircraft handling, to comply with the requirements laid down by the Aerodrome Operator with regard to safety and orderattheaerodromes,andshallmonitorsuchcompliance. TheAerodromeOperatorshallrequirealltheusersoftheaerodromeincluding fixedbase operators and organisations, to fully support the programme to promote safety at the aerodrome by attending and contributing to the aerodromes various safety committees, immediately informing the Aerodrome Operatoroftheaccidents,incidents,defectsandfaultswhichhavethepotential toeffectsafety.OccurrencesinvolvingaircraftshallbereportedtotheAuthority. COMPETENCEOFOPERATIONALANDMAINTENANCEPERSONNEL The Aerodrome Operator shall employ qualified and skilled personnel for performing all safety related activities in the aerodrome operations and maintenanceprocessescommensuratewiththelevelofaerodromeoperations. WheretheAuthorityhasprescribedacompetencycertificationrequirementfor operations or maintenance personnel, or medical standards, the Aerodrome Operatorshallemployonlythosepersonspossessingsuchcertificatesormeeting suchmedicalandfitnessrequirements. The Aerodrome Operator shall implement a programme to maintain the competencyofthesafetycriticalpersonnel.

4.7.5

4.8 4.8.1

4.8.2

4.8.3

Chapter45

CARPARTIX 4.9 4.9.1 NOTIFYINGANDREPORTINGINFORMATIONTOTHEAERONAUTICALINFORMATIONSERVICE An Aerodrome Operator shall notify and report aeronautical data to the Aeronautical Information Service within the specified time limits required by theseRegulations. DatatobesuppliedtotheAeronauticalInformationService AnAerodromeOperatorshallsubmittotheAeronauticalInformationServiceall thedatarequirementsspecifiedinAppendix3Part3oftheseRegulations 4.9.1.2 NotificationofInaccuraciesinAeronauticalInformationServicePublications An Aerodrome Operator shall review all CAR Part IX, X and XI Regulations, all relevant Civil Aviation Advisory Publications (CAAPs), issues of Aeronautical Information Publication (AIP), AIP Supplements, AIP Amendments, Notices to Airmen(NOTAMS),NoticetoAerodromeCertificateHolders(NOTACs),Preflight Information Bulletins and Aeronautical Information Circulars issued by the Aeronautical Information Service on initial receipt, thereof, and at regular intervals thereafter. Immediately after such reviews, an Aerodrome Operator shall notify the Aeronautical Information Service of any inaccurate information containedthereinthatpertainstotheaerodrome. 4.9.1.3 NotificationofChangesinAerodromeFacilities,EquipmentandLevelofService PlannedinAdvance AnAerodromeOperatorshallsubmitarequestforapprovalfromtheAuthority in writing at least 3 months before any change to the aerodrome facility or equipment or the level of service at the aerodrome that has been planned in advanceandthatislikelytoaffecttheaccuracyoftheinformationcontainedin any of the elements comprising the Integrated Aeronautical Information Package. Note 1: Acceptance for publication of information in any of the elements comprising the Integrated Aeronautical Information Package shall not be construedasRegulatoryApproval. Note2:Regulatoryapprovalisrequiredofproposedchangestoairsidephysical infrastructureandairnavigationequipment. 4.9.1.4 Issues Requiring Immediate Notification to the Aeronautical Information Service AnAerodromeOperatorshall,givetotheAeronauticalInformationServiceand cause to be received at air traffic control and the flight operations unit, immediate notice (NOTAM request) giving details of any of the circumstances listedinAppendix6oftheseRegulations. Chapter46

4.9.1.1

CARPARTIX 4.9.1.5 ObstacleData An Aerodrome Operator shall notify the Aeronautical Information Service (AIS), the geographical coordinates and the top elevation of all obstacles that penetrate the obstacle limitation surfaces as defined in Appendix 13 of these Regulations.Theinformationshallbekeptuptodatebyperiodicsurvey. Note:Thiswillrequiretheconductofanobstaclesurveybyacompetentsurveyor to establish the initial coordinates and details of obstacles and periodic survey thereafter.Thissurveyshouldnotexceed5years.Surveyinformationshouldbe supportedbyanannualreviewbytheAerodromeOperatorandconfirmationof no change that would affect the Obstacle Limitation Surfaces should be submittedtotheAuthority. 4.9.1.6 TerrainandObstacleDataCollection To satisfy requirements necessary to accommodate air navigation systems or functions, sets of electronic terrain and obstacle data shall be collected and recorded in databases by the Aerodrome Operator, and reported to the Aeronautical Information Service. The geographical coordinates of terrain and obstaclesinArea2,andArea3shallbemeasured,aswellasterraindatainArea 4, and reported to the Aeronautical Information Service in degrees, minutes, seconds and the applicable number of seconds. In addition the top elevation, type, marking and lighting (if any) of obstacles shall be reported to the AeronauticalInformationService Note: Area2istheTerminalControlAreaaspublishedintheAIPoftheUnitedArab Emirates for the aerodrome, or where a Terminal Control Area has not been established,isanareawithina45kmradiusoftheaerodromereferencepoint. Area3isanareathatextendsfromtheedge(s)oftherunway(s)to90mfrom therunwaycentreline(s)and,forallotherpartsoftheaerodromeMovement Area,50mfromtheedgeofthedefinedarea(s). Area4isrestrictedtothoserunwayswhereprecisionapproachCategoryIIand III operations have been approved. The width of the area shall be 60 m on eithersideoftheextendedrunwaycentrelinewhilethelengthshallbe900m fromtherunwaythresholdmeasuredalongtheextendedrunwaycentreline. 4.9.2 Theresponsibilityfortheprovisionofthedatashallbeasfollows: a) CivilianAerodromeControlUnitsshallberesponsiblefordatacollection withintheirControlZone b) Approach Control Units shall be responsible for data collection within theirTerminalControlArea Chapter47

CARPARTIX c) Determination and reporting of information/raw data concerning aerodrome related aeronautical information shall be in accordance with the accuracy and integrity requirements set forth in Tables 1 to 5 contained in Appendix 5 of these Regulations while taking into account theestablishedqualitysystemprocedures. 4.9.3 Geographical coordinates indicating latitude and longitude shall be determined and reported to the Aeronautical Information Services in terms of the World Geodetic System 1984 (WGS84) geodetic reference datum, identifying those geographicalcoordinateswhichhavebeentransformedintoWGS84coordinates bymathematicalmeansandwhoseaccuracyoforiginalfieldworkdoesnotmeet therequirementsinAppendix5,oftheseRegulations In addition to the elevation (referenced to Mean Sea Level) of the specific surveyed ground positions at aerodromes, geoid undulation (referenced to the WGS84 ellipsoid) for those positions as indicated in Appendix 5, shall be determinedandreportedtotheAeronauticalInformationServices. NOTIFYINGANDREPORTINGINFORMATIONTOAIRTRAFFICSERVICES AnAerodromeOperatorshallreportsignificantaeronauticalinformationtothe applicable Air Traffic Service Unit within the specified time limits required by theseRegulations. Issues requiring immediate notification to the Air Traffic Control at the aerodromeorAISofficeifappropriate: The condition of the Movement Area and the operational status of related facilities shall be monitored and information provided to the air traffic control tower to enable this unit to provide the necessary information to arriving and departingaircraft,andtootherairtrafficserviceunitsasnecessary. Reports on matters of operational significance or affecting aircraft safety or performanceshallbegiven,particularlyinrespectofthefollowing: a) Constructionormaintenancework; b) Roughorbrokensurfacesonarunway,ataxiwayoranapron; c) Wateronarunway,ataxiwayoranapron d) Othertemporaryhazards,includingparkedaircraft e) Failureorirregularoperationofpartoralloftheaerodromevisualaids; and f) Failureorirregularoperationoftheprimaryorsecondarypowersupply

4.9.4

4.10 4.10.1

4.10.2 4.10.2.1

4.10.2.2

Chapter48

CARPARTIX g) ReductionincategoryofRescueFireService h) Evacuationofapassengerterminal i) Significantchangesinaerodromelightingandothervisualaids j) Erection or removal of obstructions to air navigation, and erection or removalofsignificantobstaclesintakeoff,climborapproachareas k) Anyotherinformationofoperationalsignificance. The information shall be kept up to date and changes in conditions reported withoutdelay. 4.10.2.3 Whenever water is present on a runway, a description of the runway surface conditionsonthecentrehalfofthewidthoftherunway,includingthepossible assessment of water depth, where applicable, shall be notified using the followingterms: a) DAMPthesurfaceshowsachangeofcolourduetomoisture b) WETthesurfaceissoakedbutthereisnostandingwater c) WATERPATCHESsignificantpatchesofstandingwaterarevisible d) FLOODEDextensivestandingwaterisvisible 4.10.2.4 RunwayFrictionCharacteristictobeReported When the last friction measurement test (utilising continuous friction measurementequipment),showsthattherunwaysurfacefrictioncharacteristics are below the minimum friction level as specified Clause 4.15.10 of these Regulations, the Aerodrome Operator shall issue a NOTAM to advise that a runwayorportionthereofmaybeslipperywhenwet. 4.11 ISOLATEDAIRCRAFTPOSITION The Aerodrome Operator shall ensure that the aerodrome air traffic control towerisadvisedofanareaorareassuitablefortheparkingofanaircraftwhichis knownorbelievedtobethesubjectofunlawfulinterference,orwhichforother reasonsneedsisolationfromnormalaerodromeactivities. 4.12 4.12.1 NOTIFYINGANDREPORTINGINFORMATIONTOAIRCRAFTOPERATORS AnAerodromeOperatorshalldevelopandimplementproceduresforbriefingAir Transport Operators and Air Carriers by the Aerodrome Operator, of the necessarysafetyandregulatoryrequirementsforaircraftbeforeoperatinginthe Emirates Flight Information Region (FIR) or from UAE Territory. The Airport Briefingshallincludebutnotbelimitedtoatleastthefollowingrequirements. Chapter49

CARPARTIX a) ProvisionofuptodateaerodromeinformationascontainedintheAIPto beavailabletotheflightcrew; b) Requirement for the aircraft operator to follow correct ICAO flight planning principles including the provision of aircraft registration and correctICAOdesignators; c) Requirement for the aircraft operator to report either flight or ground basedincidentstotheAuthority,includingwildlifestrikesornearmisses; d) Requirement for the aircraft to be adequately equipped in accordance with the rules and regulationsgoverning theairspace in which it willbe flying. Note: Guidance to Aerodrome Operators concerning Airport Briefings is containedwithinCivilAviationAdvisoryPublication(CAAP)24AirportBriefing Requirements. 4.13 4.13.1 OBLIGATIONSTORESTRICTCERTAINAIRCRAFT In respect to Clause 4.12, the Aerodrome Operator or their agent shall ensure that procedures are developed to negate aircraft operators from operating at their aerodrome when such aircraft operators cannot meet the UAE regulatory requirements,oraresubjectto: a) AbanbasedupontheoriginofregistryasnotifiedbytheAuthority; b) AceaseanddesistorderasnotifiedbytheAuthority;or c) When the aircraft is subject to a grounding order as notified by the Authority. 4.13.2 4.13.3 4.13.4 4.14 The Aerodrome Operator shall monitor and ensure that third parties at the aerodromecomplywithsuchprocedures. Theprovisionofweighscalesappropriatetothetasktorandomcheckofaircraft payloadshallbeimmediatelyavailableattheaerodrome. TheproceduresrequiredbythisClause4.13shallincludeimmediatenotification totheAuthorityofactionstakenagainstsuchaircraftoraircraftoperators. REPORTINGSTATISTICALINFORMATION AnAerodromeOperatorshallprovidestatisticalinformationtotheAuthorityto permit an overview of civil aviation activity in the UAE, ICAO Form I (Appendix 14)shallbecompletedandforwardedtotheAuthorityonamonthlybasis. 4.15 AERODROMEOPERATIONANDMAINTENANCEPROGRAMME Chapter410

CARPARTIX 4.15.1 General The Aerodrome Operator shall employ a maintenance programme, including preventative maintenance, to maintain the aerodrome facilities in a condition that does not impair the safety, security, regularity or efficiency of aircraft operations. Note: Facilities are intended to include, but are not limited to, such items as pavements,visualaids,fencing,drainagesystemsandbuildings. 4.15.2 4.15.3 The design and application of the maintenance programme should observe HumanFactorsPrinciples. The Aerodrome Operator shall ensure that all maintenance records are documented, including information on the design and construction of aircraft pavements and aerodrome lighting. A system for easy retrieval of such documentationshallbeimplemented. Inspections of the Movement Area to assess its operational status shall be carriedouteachdayatleasttwiceataCertifiedAerodrome. TheminimumnumberofinspectionsshallbeincreasedbyonewhereAerodrome TrafficDensityisconsideredtobeMediumorHeavy.Wherethereisapotential foranincreaseinFOD,theinspectionrateshouldbeincreased. An Aerodrome Operator shall inspect an aerodrome, as the circumstances require,toensureaviationsafety: a) As soon as practicable, after any aircraft accident or incident within the meaning of these terms defined in CAR Part VI Chapter 3 Aircraft AccidentandIncidentInvestigation; b) Duringanyperiodofconstructionorrepairoftheaerodromefacilitiesor equipmentthatiscriticaltothesafetyofaircraftoperation; c) Afteranyperiodofadverseweather;or d) Atanyothertimewhenthereareconditionsattheaerodromethatcould affectaviationsafety. 4.15.7 4.15.7.1 ForeignObjectDebris(FOD) Aerodrome Operators shall develop and implement specific procedures for the eliminationoftheriskofFOD.Theyshallalsoensurethatanythirdpartyonthe aerodromecandemonstrateasatisfactorylevelofFODawarenessandthattheir workingproceduresdonotincreasethelikelihoodofFOD.

4.15.4 4.15.5

4.15.6

Chapter411

CARPARTIX 4.15.7.2 Aerodrome and aircraft operators, maintenance and ground handling organisations shall include FOD prevention in their induction and continuation trainingprogrammes,forallairside,maintenanceandhangarstaff. Aerodrome Operators shall ensure that FOD is a standing agenda item for all safetyrelatedcommittees. Note: Guidance to Aerodrome Operators concerning FOD is contained within CivilAviationAdvisoryPublication(CAAP)43ForeignObjectDebris. 4.15.8 4.15.8.1 PavementMaintenanceProgramme Thesurfaceofpavements(runways,taxiways,aprons,etc.)shallbekeptclearof anyloosestonesorotherobjectsthatmightcausedamagetoaircraftstructures orengines,orimpairtheoperationofaircraftsystems. Thesurfaceofarunwayshouldbemaintainedinaconditionsuchastopreclude formationofharmfulirregularities. Whenataxiwayisusedbyjetturbineenginedaircraft,thesurfaceofthetaxiway shoulders should be maintained so as to be free of any loose stones or other objectsthatcouldbeingestedbytheaircraftengines. Chemicals which may have harmful effects on aircraft or pavements, or chemicalswhichmayhavetoxiceffectsontheaerodromeenvironment,shallnot beused. PavementSurfaceInspections In addition to Clause 4.15.4 all pavements within the Movement Area shall be subject to inspection and evaluation by appropriate and competent pavement engineers for the preparation/upkeep of a pavement management system and maintenanceschedule.Thesedetailedpavementinspectionsshallbeundertaken atleastonceayear. Note: Guidance to Aerodrome Operators concerning Pavement Surface Inspections is contained within Civil Aviation Advisory Publication (CAAP) 36 RunwayandMovementAreaInspections. 4.15.10 FrictionTesting

4.15.7.3

4.15.8.2 4.15.8.3

4.15.8.4

4.15.9

4.15.10.1 Runways shall be evaluated when first constructed or after resurfacing to determinethewetrunwaysurfacefrictioncharacteristics. 4.15.10.2 Thesurfaceofapavedrunwayshallbemaintainedinaconditionsoastoprovide good friction characteristics and low rolling resistance. Standing water, mud, dust, sand, oil, rubber deposits and other contaminants shall be removed as rapidlyandcompletelyaspossibletominimiseaccumulation. Chapter412

CARPARTIX Note: Guidance to Aerodrome Operators concerning Friction Testing is containedwithinCivilAviationAdvisoryPublication(CAAP)32TheAssessment ofRunwaySurfaceFrictionCharacteristics 4.15.10.3 Correctivemaintenanceactionshallbetakenwhenthefrictioncharacteristicsfor anyportionoftherunwayisbelowtheminimumfrictionlevelcorrespondingto theparticulartestequipmentusedasspecifiedinCAAP32.ANOTAMshallbe issued in accordance with Clause 4.10.2.4 of these Regulations when the readingsarebelowminimumfrictionlevel. 4.15.11 RunwayPavementOverlays

4.15.11.1 The longitudinal slope of the temporary ramp, measured with reference to the existingrunwaysurfaceorpreviousoverlaycourse,shallbe: a) to1.0percentforoverlaysuptoandincluding5cminthickness;and b) notmorethan0.5percentforoverlaysmorethan5cminthickness. 4.15.11.2 Overlayingshall proceed from one end of the runway toward the other endso thatbasedonrunwayutilizationmostaircraftoperationswillexperienceadown ramp. 4.15.11.3 Theentirewidthoftherunwayshallbeoverlaidduringeachworksession. 4.15.11.4 Beforearunwaybeingoverlaidisreturnedtoatemporaryoperationalstatus,a runwaycentrelinemarkingconformingtothespecificationsinAppendix12shall be provided. Additionally, the location of any temporary threshold shall be identifiedbya3.6mwidetransversestripe. 4.15.12 ElectricalSystems

4.15.12.1 Adequate primary power supply shall be available at aerodromes for the safe functioningofairnavigationfacilities. 4.15.12.2 The design and provision of electrical power systems for aerodrome visual and radio navigation aids shall be such that an equipment failure will not leave the pilotwithinadequatevisualandnonvisualguidanceormisleadinginformation. 4.15.12.3 Electricpowersupplyconnectionstothosefacilitiesforwhichsecondarypower isrequiredshallbesoarrangedthatthefacilitiesareautomaticallyconnectedto thesecondarypowersupplyonfailureofthenormalsourceofpower. 4.15.12.4 Requirements for a secondary power supply shall be met by either of the following: a) independent public power, which is a source of power supplying the aerodrome service from a substation other than the normal substation Chapter413

CARPARTIX through a transmission line following a route different from the normal powersupplyrouteandsuchthatthepossibilityofasimultaneousfailure of the normal and independent public power supplies is extremely remote;or b) standbypowerunit(s),whichareenginegenerators,batteries,etc.,from whichelectricpowercanbeobtained. 4.15.12.5 Where the secondary power supply of an aerodrome is provided by the use of duplicatefeeders,suchsuppliesshallbephysicallyandelectricallyseparatesoas toensuretherequiredlevelofavailabilityandindependence. 4.15.12.6 The following aerodrome facilities shall be provided with a secondary power supplycapableofsupplyingpowerwhenthereisafailureoftheprimarypower supply: a) the signalling lamp, voice communication management system and minimum lighting necessary to enable air traffic services personnel to carryouttheirduties; b) radionavigationaidsandgroundelementsofcommunicationsystems; c) meteorologicalequipment; d) approach,runwayandtaxiwaylightingasspecifiedinAppendix9; e) allobstaclelightswhich,intheopinionoftheAuthority,areessentialto ensurethesafeoperationofaircraft; f) essential equipment and facilities for the aerodrome responding emergencyagencies; g) illumination of apron areas over which passenger aircraft are being handled;and h) essential security equipment including but not necessarily limited to accesscontrolfacilities,securityscreeningequipment,lighting. 4.15.12.7 ForaerodromefacilitiesnominatedwithinClause4.15.12.6oftheseRegulations, the time interval between the failure of the normal source of power and the completerestorationoftheservicesshallbeasshortaspracticable,exceptthat for navigation aids and visual aids associated with nonprecision, precision approach or takeoff runways the requirements of Appendix 10 for maximum switchovertimesshallapply.

Chapter414

CARPARTIX 4.15.13 MaintenanceofVisualAids

4.15.13.1 A light shall be deemed to be unserviceable when the main beam average intensityislessthan50percentofthevaluespecifiedintheappropriatefigurein Appendix9oftheseRegulations.Forlightunitswherethedesignedmainbeam averageintensityisabovethevalueshowninAppendix9oftheseRegulations, the50percentvalueshallberelatedtothatdesignvalue. 4.15.13.2 Asystemofpreventivemaintenanceofvisualaidsshallbeemployedtoensure lightingandmarkingsystemreliability. 4.15.13.3 MaintenanceCheckstobeIncluded a) The system of preventive maintenance employed for a Precision ApproachRunwayCategoryIshallincludeatleastthefollowingchecks: i) control and measurement of the electrical characteristics of each circuitryincludedintheapproachandrunwaylightingsystems;and ii) controlofthecorrectfunctioningoflightintensitysettingsusedbyair trafficcontrol. b) The system of preventive maintenance employed for a Precision Approach Runway Category II or III shall include at least the following checks: i) visual inspection and infield measurement of the intensity, beam spreadandorientationoflightsincludedintheapproachandrunway lightingsystems; ii) control and measurement of the electrical characteristics of each circuitryincludedintheapproachandrunwaylightingsystems;and iii) controlofthecorrectfunctioningoflightintensitysettingsusedbyair trafficcontrol. c) Infieldmeasurementofintensity,beamspreadandorientationoflights included in approach and runway lighting systems for a Precision ApproachRunwayCategoryIIorIIIshouldbeundertakenbymeasuringall lights, as far as practicable, to ensure conformance with the applicable specificationofAppendix9oftheseRegulations. d) Measurementofintensity,beamspreadandorientationoflightsincluded in approach and runway lighting systems for a Precision Approach Runway Category II or III shall be undertaken using a mobile measuring unitofsufficientaccuracytoanalyzethecharacteristicsoftheindividual lights. Chapter415

CARPARTIX e) ThefrequencyofmeasurementoflightsforaPrecisionApproachRunway CategoryIIorIIIshallbebasedontrafficdensity,thelocalpollutionlevel, the reliability of the installed lighting equipment and the continuous assessmentoftheresultsoftheinfieldmeasurementsbutinanyevent shallnotbelessthantwiceayearforinpavementlightsandnotlessthan onceayearforotherlights. 4.15.13.4 MaintenanceObjectivesforLighting a) The system of preventive maintenance employed for a Precision Approach Runway Category I shall have as its objective that, during any period of Category I operations, all approach and runway lights are serviceable, and that in any event at least 85 percent of the lights are serviceableineachofthefollowing: i) PrecisionApproachCategoryIlightingsystem; ii) runwaythresholdlights; iii) runwayedgelights;and iv) runwayendlights. Inordertoprovidecontinuityofguidanceanunserviceablelightshallnot be permitted adjacent to another unserviceable light unless the light spacingissignificantlylessthanthatspecified. b) Thesystemofpreventivemaintenanceemployedforarunwaymeantfor takeoffinRunwayVisualRangeconditionsofavalueof550morgreater, shall have as its objective that, during any period of operations, all runwaylightsareserviceableandthat,inanyevent,atleast85percentof thelightsareserviceableintherunwayedgelightsandrunwayendlights. Inordertoprovidecontinuityofguidance,anunserviceablelightshallnot bepermittedadjacenttoanotherunserviceablelight. c) The system of preventive maintenance employed for a Precision ApproachRunwayCategoryIIorIIIshallhaveasitsobjectivethat,during anyperiodofCategoryIIorIIIoperations,allapproachandrunwaylights areserviceable,andthatinanyeventatleast: i) 95 percent of the lights are serviceable in each of the following particularsignificantelements: ii) Precision Approach Category II and III lighting system, the inner 450 m; iii) runwaycentrelinelights; Chapter416

CARPARTIX iv) runwaythresholdlights;and v) runwayedgelights; A) 90 percent of the lights are serviceable in the touchdown zone lights; B) 85 percent of the lights are serviceable in the approach lighting systembeyond450m;and C) 75percentofthelightsareserviceableintherunwayendlights. Inordertoprovidecontinuityofguidance,theallowablepercentage ofunserviceablelightsshallnotbepermittedinsuchawayastoalter thebasicpatternofthelightingsystem.Additionally,anunserviceable light shall not be permitted adjacent to another unserviceable light, except inabarrette oracrossbarwheretwo adjacentunserviceable lightsmaybepermitted. d) Thesystemofpreventivemaintenanceemployedforastopbarprovided atarunwayholdingpositionusedinconjunctionwitharunwayintended foroperationsinRunwayVisualRangeconditionslessthanavalueof550 m,(i.e.CatIIorIIIconditions),shallhavethefollowingobjectives: i) nomorethantwolightswillremainunserviceable;and ii) two adjacent lights will not remain unserviceable unless the light spacingissignificantlylessthanthatspecified. e) Thesystemofpreventivemaintenanceemployedforataxiwayintended foruseinRunwayVisualRangeconditionslessthanavalueof550m(i.e. Cat II or III conditions) shall have as its objective that no two adjacent taxiwaycentrelinelightsbeunserviceable. f) Thesystemofpreventivemaintenanceemployedforarunwaymeantfor takeoff in Runway Visual Range conditions less than a value of 550 m, (i.e. Cat II or III condition), shall have as its objective that, during any period of operations, all runway lights are serviceable and that in any event: i) atleast95percentofthelightsareserviceableintherunwaycentre linelights(whereprovided)andintherunwayedgelights;and ii) at least 75 percent of the lights are serviceable in the runway end lights. Inordertoprovidecontinuityofguidance,anunserviceablelightshallnot bepermittedadjacenttoanotherunserviceablelight. Chapter417

CARPARTIX 4.15.13.5 MonitoringofLightingSystems a) A system of monitoring shall be employed to indicate the operational statusofthelightingsystems. b) Where lighting systems are used for aircraft control purposes, such systemsshallbemonitoredautomaticallysoastoprovideanindicationof any fault which may affect the control functions. This information shall beautomaticallyrelayedtotheaerodromecontroltower. c) Where a change in the operational status of lights has occurred, an indication shall be provided within two seconds for a stop bar at a runwayholding position and within five seconds for all other types of visualaids. d) ForarunwaymeantforuseinRunwayVisualRangeconditionslessthana value of 550 m, the lighting systems detailed in Appendix 10 shall be monitored automatically so as to provide an indication when the serviceabilitylevelofanyelementfallsbelowtheminimumserviceability level specified. This information shall be automatically relayed to the maintenancedepartment. e) ForarunwaymeantforuseinRunwayVisualRangeconditionslessthana value of 550 m, the lighting systems detailed in Appendix 10 shall be monitoredautomaticallytoprovideanindicationwhentheserviceability level of any element falls below the minimum level as specified below which operations shall not continue. This information shall be automatically relayed to the aerodrome maintenance department and controltoweranddisplayedinaprominentposition. 4.16 4.16.1 OPERATION,MAINTENANCEANDTESTINGOFNAVIGATIONAIDS AnAerodromeOperator,whooperatesandmaintainsradionavigationaids,shall do so in accordance with the requirements of ICAO Annex 10 (Aeronautical Communications) and Manual on Testing of Radio Navigation Aids (ICAO Doc 8071). TheAerodromeOperatorshall: a) Prevent the construction of facilities on the aerodrome that would adverselyaffecttheoperationofanyelectronicorvisualnavigationaidor airtrafficservicefacilityontheaerodrome;and b) Prevent, as far as it is within the Aerodrome Operators authority, any interruptionofvisualorelectronicsignalsofnavigationaids.

4.16.2

Chapter418

CARPARTIX 4.17 4.17.1 OBSTACLECONTROL AnAerodromeOperatorshallprovideobstaclelimitationandobstacleprotection surfacesinaccordancewiththeseCivilAviationRegulationsaswellasICAODoc 8168 Aircraft Operations and PANSOPS Volume II, taking into account the plannedorintendedmodeofoperationfortherunway. An Aerodrome Operator shall remove and/or control obstacles within the specifiedsurfaces.Responsibilityforcontrolofobstaclesmaybedelegatedtoan Aerodrome Operator and/or municipality subject to an agreed and clearly definedsetofcriteria. AnAerodromeOperatorshallensurethattherunwayandtaxiwaystripareasare free from obstacles or objects which are considered hazardous to aircraft operationsunlessrequiredtobethereforairnavigationpurposes. AERODROMEOPERATINGAPPROVALS PavementAreasandAirfieldLighting AnAerodromeOperatorshallpriortoundertaking: a) Extensionstopavementareasforusebyaircraft;or b) Installation of new aerodrome lighting including approach lighting system; obtain a Letter of No Objection from the Authority prior to undertaking construction. Thefollowingdocumentationwillnormallyberequiredforsuchapurpose: c) Statementofoperationalobjective; d) Timescaleformakingtheproposedchanges; e) Diagram/drawingshowingallrelevantdimensions; f) Compliance statement against CAR Part IX specifications: This should be specificto(asapplicable): i) Physicaldimensions,strengthandslopes ii) Clearancedistances iii) Pavementmarkings,applicability,locationandcharacteristics iv) Signs,applicability,locationandcharacteristics

4.17.2

4.17.3

4.18 4.18.1 4.18.1.1

Chapter419

CARPARTIX v) AirfieldLighting,applicability,locationandcharacteristics vi) Obstaclecontrolprotectionofobstaclelimitationsurfaces e) Safety Plan for implementation of the works, including details of transitionifapplicable f) Associatedinformation,(listofproposedchangestothe,AIP,Aerodrome Manual and other Regulatory documents e.g. Airport Aviation Security Programme,AirportEmergencyPlan,etc.) Note:Changestothesecurityperimeter(ifany)willalsorequiretobeapproved bytheAuthoritypriortoimplementation,whetherthechangesaretemporary orpermanent. 4.18.2 AnAerodromeOperatorshallobtainanOperationalApprovalfromtheAuthority for changes to the aerodrome infrastructure as noted in the preceding clause, priortousebyaircraft. Note: Operational Approval will normally be subject to inspection by the Authority. 4.18.3 4.18.3.1 ChangestoEquipment AnAerodromeOperatorshallpriortoundertaking: a) Installationofneworreplacementnavigationaids; b) Installationofneworreplacementradarequipment; c) Installationofneworreplacementdisplaymonitorsusedforpurposesof controllingand/orassistingwiththemovementofaircraft; obtainaLetterofNoObjectionfromtheAuthoritypriortoissuingaRequestfor Proposal or Tender document for the said equipment. The following documentationwillnormallyberequiredforsuchapurpose: d) Astatementofoperationalobjective; e) Astatementoffunctionalrequirements; f) Technicalspecificationsoftheequipment;and g) Proposedtimescaleforimplementation. 4.18.3.2 AnAerodromeOperatorshallobtainanOperationalApprovalfromtheAuthority for changes to the aerodrome infrastructure as noted in the immediately precedingclause,priortoitsuse. Chapter420

CARPARTIX 4.18.3.3 The following additional documentation will normally be required for the purposesofgaininganOperationalApproval: a) compliance statement against relevant ICAO and Standards and RecommendedPracticesaswellasguidancematerial,andwithUAECivil AviationRegulations; b) evidenceofsuccessfulfactoryacceptancetests; c) evidence that the installation is in accordance with the manufacturers requirements and in compliance with applicable ICAO Standards and RecommendedPracticesaswellasguidancematerial; d) evidenceofsuccessfulsiteacceptancetests.Thisshouldrecordthatthe equipment has passed established criteria for the testing of the equipment;i.e.itmeetsthefunctionalrequirements; e) evidence of availability of manufacturer recommended tools and test equipment; f) evidenceofstoresheldonsiteofmanufacturerrecommendedspares; g) availabilityofmaintenancedocumentation(O&MManuals); h) availabilityofasbuiltdocumentation relatingtohardwareand software installation; i) evidenceofmaintenanceproceduresandschedules. j) evidence of sufficient trained and competent personnel to maintain the equipment. k) evidencethatoperationalprocedureshavebeendeveloped; l) aplanfortransition; m) atrainingandvalidationprogrammetoensureoperationalproficiencyof ATCstafftooperatetheequipment; n) listofrequiredchangestooperationalprocedure/regulatorymanuals; o) resultsofcalibrationflights;and p) anyadditionaldocumentationspecifiedbytheAuthorityatthetime.

Chapter421

CARPARTIX 4.18.4 4.18.4.1 Construction/RefurbishmentofAirTrafficControlTowers AnAerodromeOperatorshallobtainaLetterofNoObjectionfromtheAuthority prior to the construction or refurbishment of an aerodrome Air Traffic Control Tower. AnOperationalApprovalshallbeobtainedfromtheAuthoritypriortouseofany neworrefurbishedfacility. MANAGINGUNSAFECONDITIONS The Aerodrome Operator shall establish procedures for restricting aircraft operations where an unsafe condition exists on an aerodrome. The procedures shall ensure that operations are not conducted on portions of the aerodrome whereanunsafeconditionexists. The Aerodrome Operator shall develop a safety plan for all development /maintenanceworksontheaerodrome. Unserviceability markers shall be displayed wherever any portion of a taxiway, apronorholdingbayisunfitforthemovementofaircraftbutitisstillpossible for aircraft to bypass the area safely. On a Movement Area used at night, unserviceabilitylightsshallbeused. Closure markings and unserviceability lights shall be displayed on a runway or taxiway,orportionthereof,whichisclosedtotheuseofaircraft. When the area is temporarily closed, frangible barriers or markings utilising materials other than paint, or other suitable means may be used to identify a closedarea. 4.19.5 Lightingonaclosedrunwayortaxiwayorportionthereofshallnotbeoperated, exceptasrequiredformaintenancepurposes,butundernocircumstancesshall suchlightingbeoperatedduringlowvisibilityoperations. SURFACEMOVEMENTGUIDANCEANDCONTROLSYSTEMS A surface movement guidance and control system shall be provided at an aerodrome to assist in the prevention of inadvertent incursions of aircraft and vehicles onto an active runway and to assist in the prevention of collisions betweenaircraft,andbetweenaircraftandvehiclesorobjects,onanypartofthe MovementArea. The design of a surface movement guidance and control system shall take into account: a) thedensityofairtraffic;

4.18.4.2 4.19 4.19.1

4.19.2 4.19.3

4.19.4

4.20 4.20.1

4.20.2

Chapter422

CARPARTIX b) thevisibilityconditionsunderwhichoperationsareintended; c) theneedforpilotorientation; d) thecomplexityoftheaerodromelayout;and e) movementsofvehicles. 4.20.3 Thevisualaidcomponentsofasurfacemovementguidanceandcontrolsystem, i.e. markings, lights and signs shall be designed to conform with the relevant specificationsinAppendices9,11and12respectively. Whereasurfacemovementguidanceandcontrolsystemisprovidedbyselective switchingofstopbarsandtaxiwaycentrelinelights,thefollowingrequirements shallbemet: a) taxiway routes which are indicated by illuminated taxiway centre line lightsshallbecapableofbeingterminatedbyanilluminatedstopbar; b) the control circuits shall be so arranged that when a stop bar located ahead of an aircraft is illuminated, the appropriate section of taxiway centrelinelightsbeyonditissuppressed;and c) thetaxiwaycentrelinelightsareactivatedaheadofanaircraftwhenthe stopbarissuppressed. 4.20.5 Wherestopbarsareinstalledatrunwayholdingpositions,thesestopbarsshall be operated when the taxiway lighting system is switched on, except when taxiwaycentrelinelightingisnotprovided,thestopbarsshallbeoperatedwhen therunwaylightingisswitchedon. Therunwayandtaxiwaylightingsystemshallbeoperatedinlowambientlightor lowvisibilityconditions,toassistthepilotwithnavigatingontheaerodrome. The Aerodrome Operator shall ensure that human factor and human machine interface issues are taken into account with design and implementation of the airfield lighting console in the aerodrome control tower. The number of key strokes/actionstakenbythecontrollertooperatetheairfieldlightingsystemand stopbarsinparticularshallbereducedtoaminimum. Surface movement radar for the Manoeuvring Area should be provided at an aerodrome: a) intendedforuseinRunwayVisualRangeconditionslessthanavalueof 300m;or b) in the absence of visual observation of all or part of the Manoeuvring Areafromanaerodromecontroltower. Chapter423

4.20.4

4.20.6 4.20.7

4.20.8

CARPARTIX 4.20.9 Surfacemovementradar,whenprovidedshallbeutilizedto: a) monitor the movements of aircraft and vehicles on the Manoeuvring Area; b) providedirectionalinformationtopilotsandvehicledriversasnecessary; and c) provide advice and assistance for the safe and efficient movement of aircraftandvehiclesontheManoeuvringArea. 4.20.10 Surface movement radar for the Manoeuvring Area shall be provided at an aerodromewhentrafficdensityandoperatingconditionsaresuchthatregularity oftrafficflowcannotbemaintainedbyalternativeproceduresandfacilities. LOWVISIBILITYPROCEDURES LowVisibilityOperations(LVO)atUAEairportsaresubjecttoapprovalinregard to facilities and equipment by the Authority with reference to the Aerodrome Certificate,Part1(standardconditions),conditionIII. AnAerodromeOperatorshallnotpermit: a) approaches and landings in Category II and Category III meteorological conditions; b) takeoffsinRVRlessthan550metres; c) control of surface movements in meteorological conditions not permittingATStobecarriedoutwithvisualreference unlessLowVisibilityProcedures(LVP)havebeenacceptedbytheAuthority. 4.21.3 4.21.4 4.21.5 4.21.6 4.21.7 4.21.8 4.21.9 ThemeasuresrequiredtosupportsafeoperationsatanairportinLowVisibility Conditions(LVC)shallbespecifiedinlocalproceduresknownasLVP. TheAerodromeOperatorshallmaintainanyLVPusedattheiraerodromes. LVPtabletopexercisesshallbeconductedannuallyforanyLVP. LVPshallbeinitiatedbytheAerodromeControlTower. IntersectiontakeoffsshallnotbepermittedunderLVC. OperationalrunwaysshallnotbeusedastaxiroutesunderLVC. Except as required for essential operational reasons vehicles shall not be permittedontheManoeuvringAreaunderLVC.

4.21 4.21.1

4.21.2

Chapter424

CARPARTIX 4.21.10 4.21.11 Standard taxi routes shall be established and enforced under LVC to facilitate navigation,reducetrafficcomplexityandminimiseriskofrunwayincursions. LVOCommunications

4.21.11.1 LVO shall be supported by adequate and reliable communications to enable immediate dissemination of essential information such as RVR, and prompt interventiontoaddresscontingencysituations. 4.21.11.2 Communicationfacilitiesshallencompassallbranchesoftheaerodromeservices andagenciesconcernedwithLVO. 4.21.11.3 ThegeneralrequirementslistedinICAOAnnex11,Chapter6,AirTrafficServices Requirements for Communications apply to communications under LVC, except asamplifiedherein. 4.21.11.4 Communicationfacilitiesshallbeprovidedwithstandbypowersupply. 4.21.12 LVORequirementsforDirectSpeechCircuitswithinATC

4.21.12.1 DirectspeechcircuitsshallbeprovidedbetweentheAerodromeControlTower and: a) Theunitprovidingapproachcontrolservices; b) ApronControl; c) TheMeteorologicalOffice; d) Maintenancepersonnelresponsiblefornavigationaids; e) Maintenancepersonnelresponsibleforvisualaids; f) RescueandFireservices;and g) AIS/Briefing. 4.21.12.2 Directspeechcircuitsshallbesupplementedbyfallbackspeeddialfacilities. 4.21.13 RequirementsforRadiotelephony(RTF)

4.21.13.1 Separate RTF channels shall be provided for control of aircraft and vehicular trafficontheaerodromemovementareas. 4.21.13.2 AllRTFfrequenciesusedforcontrolofaircraftorvehiclesshallbesupportedby dual transmitters and dual receivers for operation through main headphone/speakerandmicrophonefacilities.

Chapter425

CARPARTIX 4.21.13.3 A battery powered emergency transceiver shall be available and selectable to anyfrequencyusedbyAerodromeControlService. 4.21.14 LVOVisualAids

4.21.14.1 Thenotificationofthestatusofvisualaidsisessentialforthesafeoperationof LVP.Changestocriticalfacilitiesandassociatedlimitationsshallbedisseminated touserswithoutdelay. 4.21.14.2 Continuousguidanceshallbeprovidedfromthetaxiwayuntiladequateguidance bythedocking/parkingsystemisassured. 4.21.14.3 Aircraft stand markings, signage and AGL including approach lights shall be in compliancewiththerelevantsectionswithinthisdocument. 4.21.14.4 Each taxiway holding position utilised in LVP on the same taxiway shall be providedwithalocationsignconsistingofthetaxiwaydesignationandanumber. 4.21.14.5 OntheselectedtaxiroutesforgroundoperationsduringLVP,thesignsessential tothegroundoperationsshallbelightedinternally. 4.21.14.6 For LVO with RVR less than 300 metres, taxiway intersection and Intermediate HoldingPositionlightsshallbeimplementedalongdefinedtaxiroutestoensure adequatedistancesbetweentaxiingaircraft 4.21.14.7 Lightingonaclosedrunwayortaxiwayorportionthereofshallnotbeoperated duringLVO. 4.21.14.8 ASurfaceMovementGuidanceandControlSystem(SMGCS)shallbeinstalledat aerodromesintendedfor useunderLVC to assistin preventionofincursions of aircraftandvehiclesonactiverunwaysandassociatedcriticalandsensitiveareas forILScomponents. 4.21.14.9 SMGCSandsignsshallsupportstandardtaxiroutes. 4.21.14.10 DedicatedLVPtaxiroutesshallbeindicatedonLVPcharts. 4.21.14.11 Detailedfallbackproceduresshallbeestablishedtoaddressfailuresofessential lightingcomponentsoftheSMGCS. 4.21.14.12 DuringLVPremotecontrolledstopbars,madeupofredlightsacrossthewidth ofthetaxiway,shouldbeprovidedatalltaxiwaysgivingaccesstoactiverunways whether at the holding position or at its entrance unless protection against runwayincursionisprovidedbyothermeanssuchasoperationalproceduresto limit ground movements and/or suitable radar equipment for continuous monitoringofgroundmovements.

Chapter426

CARPARTIX 4.21.14.13 Wheretaxiholdingpositionmarkingsignsandstopbarsmaynotbythemselves beadequateduringLVPtheyshallbereinforcedbyrunwayguardlights. 4.21.15 Meteorology

4.21.15.1 Runway Visual Range (RVR) shall be measured by instrumental means for CategoryIIandIIIapproachesaswellasLowVisibilityTakeoffs. 4.21.15.2 Wherecloud/ceilingheighthassignificanteffectonlandings,ceilometersshallbe providedfortheapplicablerunway. 4.21.15.3 The aerodrome LVP shall include the specific visibility/RVR and cloud ceiling valuesfortheimplementationofLVPsandtheseshallbepublishedintheAIP. 4.21.15.4 MET facilities shall be provided in compliance with CAR Part VIII, Sub Part 7, facilityrequirements. 4.21.16 SurfaceMovementRadar

4.21.16.1 SurfaceMovementRadar(SMR)shallbeprovidedforthemanoeuvringarea: a) At airports intended for use in runway visual range conditions less than 300metres; b) Where airport layout is complex and/or visual guidance makes surveillance required to protect the runway(s) and sensitive areas from incursion; c) Wheretrafficdensityandoperatingconditionsaresuchthatregularityof trafficflowcannotbemaintainedbyalternativeproceduresandfacilities. 4.21.17
4.21.17.1

SecurityinLVP Coordination procedures with airport security services shall be established to ensurethatonlyauthorisedpersonnelorvehiclesgainaccesstothemovement areaduringLVP. APRONMANAGEMENTSERVICE AnappropriateApronManagementServiceshallbeprovidedonanapronbythe AerodromeOperator,inorderto: a) regulate movement with the objective of preventing collisions between aircraft,andbetweenaircraftandobstacles; b) regulate entry of aircraft into, and coordinate exit of aircraft from, the apronwiththeaerodromecontroltower;and

4.22 4.22.1

Chapter427

CARPARTIX c) ensure safe and expeditious movement of vehicles and appropriate regulationofotheractivities. 4.22.2 When the aerodrome control tower does not participate in the Apron Management Service, procedures shall be established to facilitate the orderly transition of aircraft between the apron management unit and the aerodrome controltower. An Apron Management Service shall be provided with radiotelephony communications facilities. All vehicles/personnel involved with the facilitating themovementofaircraftshallbeequippedwithaserviceablereceive/transmit airbandradio. Wherelowvisibilityproceduresareineffect,personsandvehiclesoperatingon anapronshallberestrictedtotheessentialminimum. Anemergencyvehiclerespondingtoanemergencyshallbegivenpriorityoverall othersurfacemovementtraffic. Avehicleoperatingonanapronshallgivewayto: a) anaircrafttaxiing,abouttotaxi,orbeingpushedortowed; b) anemergencyvehicle;or c) toothervehiclesinaccordancewithlocalairportregulations. 4.22.7 An aircraft stand shall be visually monitored to ensure that the recommended clearancedistancesareprovidedtoanaircraftusingthestandandtoensurethe standisclearofFOD. AERODROMEVEHICLEOPERATIONS RoadslocatedontheMovementAreashallberestrictedtotheexclusiveuseof aerodromepersonnelandotherauthorisedpersons. Avehicleshallbeoperated: a) on a Manoeuvring Area only as authorised by ATS or an authority as definedbytheaerodromeoperator;and b) onanaprononlyasauthorisedbytheappropriateaerodromeoperator. 4.23.3 Thedriverofa vehicleontheMovementArea shallcomplywithallmandatory instructionsconveyedbyaerodromemarkings,signsandtheaerodromecontrol tower when on the Manoeuvring Area. In addition to any nominated local operatingproceduresfromtheAerodromeOperator.

4.22.3

4.22.4 4.22.5 4.22.6

4.23 4.23.1 4.23.2

Chapter428

CARPARTIX 4.23.4 4.23.5 Thedriverofa vehicleontheMovementArea shallcomplywithallmandatory instructionsconveyedbylights. The driver of a vehicle on the Movement Area shall be appropriately qualified and competent for the tasks to be performed and unless unsafe to do so shall complywiththeinstructionsissuedby: a) theaerodromecontroltower,whenontheManoeuvringArea;and b) theappropriatedesignatedserviceprovider,whenontheapron. 4.23.6 Trainingwillinclude,asappropriatetothedriversfunction,knowledgeof: a) thegeographyoftheaerodrome; b) aerodromesigns,markingsandlights; c) radiotelephoneoperatingprocedures; d) terms and phrases used in aerodrome control including the ICAO phoneticalphabet; e) rulesofairtrafficservicesastheyrelatetogroundoperations; f) airportrulesandproceduresincludinglowvisibilityprocedures;and g) specialistfunctionsintheoperationofthevehiclee.g.rescuefirefighting. 4.23.7 Thedriverofaradioequippedvehicleshallestablishsatisfactorytwowayradio communication with the aerodrome control tower before entering the Manoeuvring Area and with the appropriate authorisation before entering the apron. The driver shall maintain a continuous listening watch on the assigned frequencywhenontheMovementArea. Thevehicleoperatorshallbeabletodemonstratecompetency,asappropriate, in: a) theoperationoruseofvehicletransmit/receiveequipment; b) understanding and complying with air traffic control and local procedures; c) vehiclenavigationontheaerodrome Note:AllManoeuvringAreavehicledriversoperatingRTshouldhaveobtained level 4 English in accordance with ICAO Annex 1, Attachment A, ICAO LanguageProficiencyRatingScale.

4.23.8

Chapter429

CARPARTIX 4.23.9 The driver of a vehicle on the Manoeuvring Area shall hold a valid UAE driving licence,beappropriatelytrainedforthetaskstobeperformedandshallholdan appropriate Airport Driving Permit. The driver of a vehicle on the apron area shouldbeappropriatelytrainedforthetaskstobeperformedandshallholdan appropriateAirportDrivingPermit. Aerodrome Operator shall verify a drivers knowledge of low visibility procedures. GROUNDSERVICINGOFAIRCRAFT Whilepassengersareembarkingordisembarkinganaircraft,groundequipment shallbepositionedsoastoallow: a) unrestrictedaccess/egressofexitroutesfortheexpeditiousevacuationof passengersandfuellingvehicles;and b) areadyescaperoutefromeachoftheexitstobeusedinanemergency. 4.25 4.25.1 4.25.2 WILDLIFEHAZARDMANAGEMENTPLAN An Aerodrome Operator shall, establish a wildlife hazard management plan to minimiseoreliminateanysuchwildlifehazards. Bird/WildlifeHazardReduction Birds,especiallyinflocks,orotherformsofwildlife,havethepotentialtocause damage to airframes and engines (especially turbine engines), and therefore their presence on an aerodrome and its immediate flight paths should be deterred.Allreasonablemeasuresshouldbetakentoaddressthosefeatureson theaerodromethatmayattractbirdsorwildlife,controltheexistenceofwildlife ontheaerodrome,and,whereverpracticable,inthevicinityoftheaerodrometo preventbirdflightpathsacrosstheaerodromeanditsapproachanddeparture routes. 4.25.3 AWildlifeHazardManagementPlanshouldbedevelopedto: a) assessthepotentialbirdstrikerisk; b) reducewildlifeinfestationontheaerodromeasmuchaspracticable; c) implement a safeguarding system to identify, and, where possible, address existing and planned developments within 13 km of the aerodromethatmayhavethepotentialtoincreasethebirdstrikerisk; d) monitorandaddresswildlifeactivity,strikeeventsand: e) strive to improve the effectiveness of the plan through ongoing evaluationbycompetentpersonnel.

4.23.10 4.24

Chapter430

CARPARTIX 4.25.4 4.25.5 Details of or reference to, the Wildlife Hazard Management Plan should be includedwithintheAerodromeManual. BirdstrikeReporting Intheeventofabirdstrike,theBirdStrikeReportingForm(Appendix15)shallbe completed and submitted immediately to the General Civil Aviation Authority, POBox6558,AbuDhabi,UAE.Thereportmaybesubmittedelectronically. 4.26 4.26.1 AVIATIONSECURITY An Aerodrome Operator shall in addition to meeting the obligations required theseRegulations,satisfytherequirementsofCivilAviationRegulationPartVII, TheNationalCivilAviationSecurityProgramme,andoperateinaccordancewith theproceduresstipulatedintheAirportSecurityProgramme. Fencing Afenceorothersuitablebarriershallbeprovidedonanaerodrometoprevent theentrancetotheMovementAreaofanimalslargeenoughtobeahazardto aircraft,ortodetertheinadvertentorpremeditatedaccessofanunauthorized personontoanonpublicareaoftheaerodrome. ThefenceorbarriershallbelocatedsoastoseparatetheMovementAreaand otherfacilitiesorzonesontheaerodromevitaltothesafeoperationofaircraft fromareasopentopublicaccess. Suitable means of protection shall be provided to deter the inadvertent or premeditated access of unauthorized persons into ground installations and facilitiesessentialforthesafetyofcivilaviationlocatedofftheaerodrome. AccesstotheAerodrome Personnel authorised by the Authority may inspect and carry out tests on the aerodrome facilities, services and equipment, inspect Aerodrome Operators documents and records and verify the Aerodrome Operators safety management system before the Aerodrome Certificate is granted or renewed, and subsequently, at any other time, for the purpose of ensuring safety and orderattheaerodrome. An Aerodrome Operator shall issue permanent security passes to personnel authorisedbytheAuthoritytoenableaccesstoanypartoftheaerodromeorany aerodrome facility including, but not limited to, aircraft, tenant company premises, equipment, records, documents and operators personnel for the purposereferredtoinClause4.26.3.1oftheseRegulations. TheAerodromeOperatorshallcooperateinconductingtheactivitiesreferredto inClause4.26.3.1oftheseRegulations. Chapter431

4.26.2 4.26.2.1

4.26.2.2

4.26.2.3

4.26.3 4.26.3.1

4.26.3.2

4.26.3.3

CARPARTIX 4.26.4 4.26.4.1 4.26.4.2 4.26.5 4.26.5.1 PhotographyontheAerodrome PersonnelauthorisedbytheAuthoritymaytakephotographsoftheaerodrome facilitiesandequipment,forcertification,auditandapprovalpurposes. An Aerodrome Operator shall issue photography permits/authorisation to personnelauthorisedbytheAuthority. WarningNotices Wherelowflyingaircraft,atornearanaerodrome,ortaxiingaircraftarelikelyto behazardoustopeopleorvehiculartraffic,theAerodromeOperatorshall: a) Postnoticeswarningofthehazardonanypublicwaythatisadjacentto theManoeuvringArea;or b) IfsuchapublicwayisnotcontrolledbytheAerodromeOperator,inform the authority responsible for posting the notices on the public way that thereisahazard. 4.26.5.2 4.27 4.27.1 Where navigation aids are installed, signs warning of hazardous microwave radiationshallbeerectedbytheAerodromeOperatorwhereappropriate. RUNWAYINCURSIONAWARENESS Proactive measures shall be taken by Aerodrome Operators to reduce the likelihood of a runway incursion occurring at their aerodrome and to raise awareness of the hazards associated with runway incursions to all aerodrome users. Aerodrome Operators shall regularly review those areas of their aerodrome SafetyManagementSystem(SMS)relevanttotheeffectivenessandadequacyof thepreventionmeasuresinplaceattheiraerodrome. RESCUEANDFIREFIGHTINGSERVICE(RFFS)/AERODROMEEMERGENCYPLANNING Aerodrome Operators shall adhere to the requirements for Rescue and Fire FightingServicesandAerodromeEmergencyPlanningasdetailedinCivilAviation Regulation (CAR) Part XI Aerodrome Emergency Service, Equipment and Facilities.

4.27.2

4.28

Chapter432

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX1

APPENDIX1 APPLICATIONFORANAERODROMECERTIFICATE Regulatory guidance regarding the application and issue of an Aerodrome Certificate is provided within CAAP 30 Issue and Verification of an Aerodrome Certificate available on theGCAAwebsiteatwww.gcaa.ae.

App11

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX2

APPENDIX2 THISAPPENDIXISNOTUSED

App21

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX3

APPENDIX3 PARTICULARSTOBEINCLUDEDINANAERODROMEMANUAL 3.1 3.1.1 3.1.2 3.1.3 PART1GENERAL PurposeandscopeoftheAerodromeManual; Statement of legal requirements for an aerodrome licence and the Aerodrome ManualasprescribedintheseRegulations; Conditionsforuseoftheaerodromeincluding a) a statement of the Aerodrome Reference Code, as identified from Appendix 7 of these Regulations, indicating the largest aircraft type the aerodromeintendstoserve;andtypeoftraffic b) theoperatingorplannedmodalityoftherunway(s) c) the lowest meteorological conditions permitted for aircraft arrivals and departuresattheaerodrome 3.1.4 3.1.5 Any limitations on the operation of the aerodrome, including areas excluded fromusebycommercialaircraft; The name, position and telephone numbers of the person who has overall/assigned responsibility at the aerodrome for aerodrome licensing and safetyissues;and StatementoftheobligationsoftheAerodromeOperator. PART2PARTICULARSOFTHEAERODROMESITE Note 1: Aerodrome Operators are encouraged to provide the following diagrams in a format that will permit the Authority to produce charts in accordancewiththespecificationsofICAOAnnex4.TheuseofAutoCadfilesin DWGorDXFformatandgeographicallyalignedandgeoreferencedtoWGS84is preferable. Note 2: The size of the plans should be commensurate with the size and complexityoftheaerodrome,howeverideallyanA3orA4sizedrawingshould be included in the Aerodrome Manual. The scale of the plans shall be sufficientlylargetoshowclearlyalltheelementslistedinthefollowingclauses.

3.1.6 3.2

App31

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX3 3.2.1 LocationPlan Planoftheaerodromelocationshowingtheaerodromeasexpresslysetasidefor aerodromepurposes,includinganyaerodromefacilitiesandequipmentoutside theboundariesoftheaerodromeproper. Note: The aerodrome location plan should be presented on a background showingthegeneraltopographicalfeaturesoftheareai.e.wadi,hills,etc. The aerodrome location shall be presented against a background of other features such as roads, nearest town/city or other populous areas, and the location of any aerodrome facilities and equipment outside the boundaries of theaerodromeandothersignificantgeographicalfeatures. 3.2.2 BoundaryPlan Aplanshowingtheboundariesoftheaerodromeandpermanentsurveypoints. ThiswouldnormallybeshownonaCertificateofTitle.Iftheboundariesofthe aerodrome are not defined in the documents of the Title provide details of claimtolandorinterestin,thepropertyonwhichtheaerodromeislocatedand aplanshowingtheboundariesandpositionoftheaerodrome. Note:Alinearscaleshallbeshown. 3.2.3 AerodromePlan Planoftheaerodromeshowingtheaerodromefacilitiesfortheoperationofthe aerodromeincluding(whereapplicable): a) Aerodrome Reference Point with elevation and geographical coordinate (WGS84)labelled; b) runwayswithdimensionslabelled; c) runwaysurfacetypes(concrete,asphalt,gravel,etc.)labelled; Note: Bearing strengths or aircraft type restrictions may be shown in tabularform. d) runwayendelevations; e) runwaystripwithdimensionslabelled; f) stopwaywithstopwayendelevation; g) clearwaywithdimensionslabelled,andclearwayendelevations; h) RunwayEndSafetyArea; i) approachlighting;

App32

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX3 j) taxiwayswithnames; k) taxiwaysurfacetypes(concrete,asphalt,gravel,etc.)labelled; Note: Bearing strengths or aircraft type restrictions may be shown in tabularform. l) apronwithnames(T1,T2,Cargoetc); m) navigationalaidslabelledwithtype(VOR,DME,etc.)showingcriticaland sensitiveareasidentifiedwherepossible; n) localiserarrayaerials(withcriticalandsensitiveareasshown); o) glidepathaerials(withcriticalandsensitiveareasshown); p) airsideroads; q) terminalbuildings; r) airportfirestations; s) aerodromecontroltower; t) powersupplybuildings; u) othermainbuildingsrelevanttotheoperationoftheaerodrome; v) airside/landsideperimeterfence; w) airside/landsideperimetergates(withgatenumberslabelled); x) meteorologicalfacilitiesincludingwindindicators; y) boundaryoftheairtrafficcontrolservice;and z) anypartof theMovementAreapermanentlyunsuitableforaircraftand clearlymarkedassuch. Note:Alinearscaleshallbeshown 3.2.4 ApronPlan Planoftheapronareasincluding(whereapplicable): a) apronwithidentifyingnames; b) bearingstrengthsoraircrafttyperestrictions; c) bearing strengths or aircraft type restrictions may be shown in tabular form; App33

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX3 d) apronmarkingsassociatedwiththemovementandparkingofaircraft; e) aircraftparkingbaydesignationsclearlylabelled; f) apronmarkingsassociatedwiththeparkingofvehiclesandequipment; g) apronmarkingsassociatedwiththeoperationofvehicles; h) locationofanynoseinguidancesystem; i) anyrunupbaysorenginestartpoints; j) thelimitsoftheapronarea; k) theboundaryoftheairtrafficcontrolservice; l) anybuildingsthatfrontontotheapron; m) accessgatestotheairsidearea; n) a table showing the maximum aircraft code, type, or size permitted to parkoneachaircraftstand; o) helicopterlandingsitesandhelicopteraimingpoints;and p) anypartoftheapronareapermanentlyunsuitableforaircraftandclearly markedassuch. Note:Alinearscaleshallbeshown 3.2.5 GroundMovementPlan Planofgroundmarkingsusedforaircraftguidanceshowing a) allrunwaymarkings; b) markingsinprethresholdareas;and c) taxiwayandtaxilanemarkings. 3.2.6 LightingPlan Planoftheairfieldlightingshowing,whereapplicable a) approachlights; b) runwaythresholdlights; c) runwaythresholdidentificationlights; d) runwayedgelighting;

App34

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX3 e) runwayendlighting; f) stopwaylights; g) visuallandingaids(e.g.PAPI,VASIS); h) turningbaylights; i) runwayguardlights; j) stopbarandintermediatetaxiwayholdingpositionlighting; k) taxiwaylighting; l) apronfloodlighting; m) obstaclelightsontheaerodrome;and n) illuminatedwindsocks. 3.3 PART 3 PARTICULARS OF THE AERODROME REQUIRED TO BE REPORTED TO AERONAUTICAL INFORMATIONSERVICE(AIS) Note 1: Accuracy of the information is critical to aircraft safety. Information requiringengineeringsurveyandassessmentshouldbegatheredorverifiedby qualifiedtechnicalpersons. Note 2: Data quality standards are contained in Appendix 5 of these Regulations 3.3.1 Adescriptionoftheproceduresusedforobtainingaeronauticaldata,ensuringit meets quality standards, promulgation to the AIS and review of the published information. GeneralInformation a) nameoftheaerodrome; b) locationoftheaerodrome; c) geographicalcoordinatesoftheAerodromeReferencePointdetermined in terms ofWorld Geodetic System 1984 (WGS84 ITRF93) reference datum; d) aerodromeelevationandgeoidundulation; e) theelevationofeachthresholdandgeoidundulation,theelevationofthe runway end and any significant high and low points along the runway, andthehighestelevationofthetouchdownzoneofaprecisionapproach runway;

3.3.2

App35

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX3 f) aerodromereferencetemperature; g) detailsoftheaerodromebeacon;and h) name of the Aerodrome Operator and the address and telephone numbers at which the Aerodrome Operator may be contacted at all times. 3.3.3 3.3.3.1 AerodromeDimensionsandRelatedInformation Runway true bearing, designation number, length, width, displaced threshold location, slope, surface type, type of runway, and for a precision approach runway,theexistenceofanObstacleFreeZone; Length,widthandsurfacetypeofstrip,RunwayEndSafetyAreas,stopways; Length,widthandsurfacetypeoftaxiways; Apronsurfacetypeandaircraftstands; Lengthandgroundprofileofclearway; Visual aids for approach procedures i.e. approach lighting type and precision approach path indicator system (PAPI); marking and lighting of runways, taxiways, and aprons; other visual guidance and control aids on taxiways (including runway holding positions, Intermediate Holding Positions and stop bars) and aprons, location and type of visual docking guidance system; availabilityofstandbypowerforlighting; LocationandradiofrequencyofVORaerodromecheckpoint; Locationanddesignationofstandardtaxiroutes; Thegeographicalcoordinatesofeachthreshold; Thegeographicalcoordinatesofapproachtaxiwaycentrelinepoints; Thegeographicalcoordinatesofeachaircraftstand; The geographical coordinates and the top elevation of significant obstacles in the approach and takeoff areas, in the circling area and in the vicinity of the aerodrome. (The information may best be shown in the form of charts such as those required for the preparation of aeronautical information publications as specifiedinAnnexes4and15totheConventionofInternationalCivilAviation); PavementsurfacetypeandbearingstrengthusingAircraftClassificationNumber PavementClassificationNumber(ACNPCN)method; One or more preflight altimeter check locations established on and apron and theirelevation; App36

3.3.3.2 3.3.3.3 3.3.3.4 3.3.3.5 3.3.3.6

3.3.3.7 3.3.3.8 3.3.3.9 3.3.3.10 3.3.3.11 3.3.3.12

3.3.3.13 3.3.3.14

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX3 3.3.3.15 DeclaredDistances: a) TakeoffRunAvailable(TORA); b) TakeoffDistanceAvailable(TODA); c) AccelerateStopDistanceAvailable(ASDA);and d) LandingDistanceAvailable(LDA). 3.3.3.16 DisabledAircraftRemovalPlan a) thetelephone/telex/facsimilenumbers; b) emailaddressoftheaerodromecoordinatorfortheremovalof;and c) disabledaircraftexpressedintermsofthelargesttypeofaircraftthatthe aerodromeisequippedtoremove. 3.3.3.17 RescueandFireFightingServices Level of protection, expressed in terms of the category of the rescue and fire fightingserviceswhichshouldbeinaccordancewiththelongestaircraftnormally usingtheaerodromeandthetypeandamountsofextinguishingagentsnormally availableattheaerodrome.NominatetheFireCommandcallfrequencyas121.6 MHZ. 3.4 3.4.1 3.4.1.1 PART4SYNOPSISOFTHEAERODROMEOPERATINGPROCEDURESANDSAFETYMEASURES ReportingAerodromeInformation Synopsisoftheproceduresforreportingaerodromeinformation,oranychanges to the aerodrome information as set out in the AIP and procedures for requestingtheissueofNOTAMS,includingthefollowing: a) Procedures for checking the accuracy of information, both prior to and followingpromulgation; b) Procedures for issuing NOTAM during and outside normal hours of aerodromeoperation; c) ProceduresforchanginginformationintheAIP;and d) Procedures for providing aerodrome briefing to aircraft operators as requiredbytheseRegulations; Note:GuidancetoAerodromeOperatorsconcerningAirportBriefingsis containedwithinCivilAviationAdvisoryPublication(CAAP)24Airport BriefingRequirements.

App37

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX3 3.4.1.2 Names and roles of persons responsible for notifying the changes and their telephone number during and outside the normal hours of aerodrome operations;and Thelocationandtelephonenumbers,asprovidedbytheAuthority,oftheplace atwhichchangesaretobereportedtotheAuthority. AccesstoAerodromeMovementArea Synopsis of the procedures developed and to be followed in coordination with the agency responsible to prevent unlawful interference in civil aviation at the aerodrome, for preventing unauthorised entry of persons,vehicles, equipment, animalsorotherthings,intotheMovementAreaincludingthefollowing: a) Theroleofeachagencywithakeyresponsibilityforaerodromesecurity; b) Controlofaccessbypersonnelandcontractors; c) Control of access by vehicles and equipment, including issuing of approvalforvehiclestooperateairside. 3.4.2.2 The names and roles of the aerodrome personnel responsible for controlling access to the aerodrome and the telephone number for contacting those personnelduringandafterworkinghours. AerodromeMovementAreaInspections SynopsisoftheproceduresforthedailyinspectionoftheaerodromeMovement Areaandobstaclelimitationsurfaces,includingthefollowing: Descriptionoftheinspections(minimumtwicedaily)undertaken,andfrequency (including timing), to ensure that the Movement Area is clear of FOD, harmful irregularities, temporary obstructions or hazardous conditions. A copy of the inspectionchecklistsusedmustalsobeprovided; Details of record keeping arrangements and location of the records, including correctiveactionstaken; DescriptionofmeansofcommunicatingwiththeAerodromeControlTowerand ApronManagementServiceduringtheinspection; Procedures for reporting the results of the inspection to unit(s) responsible for control of aircraft on the Movement Area, and parties responsible for rectificationofanydeficienciesfound; Procedures for restricting aircraft operations on portions of the aerodrome whereanunsafeconditionexists. The names and roles of persons responsible for carrying out Movement Area inspectionsandtheirtelephonenumbersduringandafterworkinghours. App38

3.4.1.3 3.4.2 3.4.2.1

3.4.3 3.4.3.1 3.4.3.2

3.4.3.3 3.4.3.4 3.4.3.5

3.4.3.6 3.4.3.7

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX3 Note: Guidance to Aerodrome Operators concerning aerodrome Movement AreainspectionsiscontainedwithinCivilAviationAdvisoryPublication(CAAP) 36RunwayandMovementAreaInspections. 3.4.4 3.4.4.1 AerodromeElectricalSystemandVisualAids Synopsisoffacilitiesandproceduresfortheinspectionandmaintenanceofthe aerodrome electrical system, aeronautical lights (including obstacle lighting), signs,andmarking,includingthefollowing: a) Electrical i) Descriptionoftheaerodromeelectricaldistributionsystem,including secondarypowersupply; ii) Asinglelinediagramshowingasbuiltsystem; iii) Description of method of testing, including frequency, of secondary powersupply; b) AirfieldLighting i) ii) iii) iv) v) vi) Description of airfield ground lighting at the aerodrome, including VDGS; Descriptionoflightingcircuitry; Details of inspection schedule, type of inspection/calibration conducted; Acopyofthechecklistsused; Detailsofrecordkeepingarrangements,includingcorrectiveactions taken; Procedures for reporting the results of the inspection to unit(s) responsible for control of aircraft on the Movement Area, and partiesresponsibleforrectificationofanydeficienciesfound; Descriptionofpreventativemaintenancemeasuresundertaken;

vii)

viii) Detailsofthenumberofpersonnelinvolvedincludingshiftstructure tomaintainairfieldlighting; c) SignsandMarkings i) ii) Detailsofinspectionscheduleandtypeofinspectionconducted; Acopyofthechecklistsused;

App39

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX3 iii) iv) Detailsofrecordkeepingarrangements,includingcorrectiveactions taken; Procedures for reporting the results of the inspection to unit(s) responsible for control of aircraft on the Movement Area, and partiesresponsibleforrectificationofanydeficienciesfound; Descriptionofpreventativemaintenancemeasuresundertaken;

v)

d) The names and roles of persons responsible for the operation and maintenanceofthe i) ii) iii) iv) Electricalsystem; Airfieldlighting; Airfieldsigns; Pavementmarkings;

including their telephone numbers for contacting these persons during andafterworkinghours. 3.4.5 3.4.5.1 AerodromeMovementAreaMaintenance Synopsis of pavement maintenance programme (preventative and reactive measures)andpavementmanagementsystemusedforthemaintenanceofthe MovementArea,including: a) Pavement inventory: Details of paved areas including year of construction,pavementtypeandstrengthandyearofmostrecentmajor rehabilitationforeachapplicablearea; b) Inspection schedule and type of inspections/surveys/assessments conducted for paved and unpaved areas including runway and taxiway strips; c) Details of record keeping arrangements, including corrective actions taken; d) ArrangementsformaintainingthepavedareasclearofFOD; e) Detailsconcerningfrictiontesting,assessmentandcorrectiveprogramme forremovalofrubberbuilduporsurfacerehabilitationontherunway; f) Details for maintaining aerodrome drainage system and ensuring it is adequateandserviceable.

App310

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX3 3.4.5.2 The names and roles of persons responsible for the maintenance of the aerodrome Movement Area and their telephone numbers during and after workinghours. AerodromeWorksSafety Synopsisoftheprocedures forplanningandcarryingoutworkssafely,onorin the vicinity of the Movement Area or those areas that may extend above the obstaclelimitationsurfaces,includingthefollowing: a) Description of methodology used for the development of a safety plan, including the development of checklists and control of contractors workingairside; b) Description of methodology used for implementing works safety plan includinguseofworksnotificationsystemsandworkauthoritypermits; c) Description of procedures used for closing off, reopening areas for aircraft use and the formal acceptance of work areas prior to returning themtoserviceabilityonadailybasis; d) Description of the supervision arrangements for early detection of deviations from intended practices or procedures or systems, if applicable; e) Arrangement for communicating with the aerodrome control tower and/or Apron Management Service unit during the progress of such works; 3.4.6.2 Names, telephone numbers and roles of the persons responsible for planning and implementing aerodrome works safety plans including telephone numbers tocontactthosepersonsduringandafterworkhours ApronManagement Synopsisoftheproceduresusedforapronmanagement,includingthefollowing interaction between the aerodrome control tower and the Apron Management Serviceincludingthefollowing; a) Descriptionofgeographicalareaofresponsibility,i.e.pointoftransferof control of aircraft between aerodrome control tower and Apron ManagementService/unit; b) Details of procedures for transfer of control for arriving and departing aircraftbetweenserviceunits(ifapplicable); c) Arrangementsforallocatingaircraftparkingpositions; d) Arrangementsforensuringthattheaircraftstandisavailable,equipment serviceable and the stand clear of FOD, obstructions/vehicles prior to App311

3.4.6 3.4.6.1

3.4.7 3.4.7.1

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX3 entry by aircraft, and relaying that information to the service unit responsibleforthecontroloftheaircraftontotheaircraftstand; e) Details of procedures/systems used for guidance of aircraft onto the aircraftstandandto/fromtheManoeuvringArea; f) Arrangementsforinitiatingenginestartandensuringclearanceofaircraft frommobileorfixedobjectsduringpushback; g) Detailsofwhoprovidesfollowme(vehicle)serviceifrequired,andhow instructionsarerelayedbetweenthecontrolservice/vehicle/aircraft. 3.4.7.2 The names and roles of person(s) responsible for the Apron Management Service/Aircraft Stand Allocation including their telephone numbers during and afterworkinghours. ApronSafetyManagement Synopsisofproceduresandfacilitiesusedtoensureapronsafety,including a) Protectionfromjetblast; b) Protectionfromforeignobjectdebris; c) Descriptionofcontingencymeasuresinplaceforresponsetospillagesof hydrocarbonsubstancesincludingcleaningofapronsurfaces; d) Enforcementofapronsafetyprecautionsduringrefuellingoperations; e) Details for reporting incidents/accidents on the apron and investigation andanalysisofsuchoccurrences; f) Detailsforauditingthesafetycompliancebyallpersonnelworkingonthe apron;and g) Detailsofanyapron/groundsafetycommitteeestablishedforpromoting apronsafetyattheaerodrome. 3.4.8.2 3.4.9 3.4.9.1 Thenamesandrolesofperson(s)responsibleforapronsafetyoversightincluding theirtelephonenumbersduringandafterworkinghours. AirsideVehicleControl Synopsisoftheproceduresforthecontrolofsurfacevehiclesoperatingon,orin thevicinityof,theMovementArea,includingthefollowing: a) Details of the applicable traffic rules (including speed limits and the meansofenforcementoftherules); b) Detailsofrequirementsforvehicleserviceabilityrequirements;

3.4.8 3.4.8.1

App312

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX3 c) A description of the method for issuing driving permits for operating vehiclesintheMovementArea;and d) Adescriptionofthemethodforissuingvehiclepermits/authorisationfor vehicles and ground service equipment. Special attention needs to be givenforthetypesofvehicles/equipmentthatwillremainairside. 3.4.9.2 3.4.10 3.4.10.1 The names and roles of person(s) responsible for airside driving including their telephonenumbersduringworkinghours. WildlifeHazardManagement Synopsisofthemethodologiestodealwithdangertoaircraftoperationscaused bythepresenceofbirdormammalsontheaerodromeorintheflightpattern, following should be detailed within the Aerodrome Operators Wildlife Hazard ManagementPlan. Namesandrolesofthepersonsresponsiblefordealingwithwildlifehazards,and theirtelephonenumbersduringandafterworkinghours. ObstacleControl Synopsisofthesystemusedtocontrolandremoveobstaclesattheaerodrome anditsenvironsincluding: a) Description of the methodology used to determine the existence of obstaclesontheaerodrome andinitsenvirons, includingthefrequency ofassessmentorconfirmation; b) Description of the methodology used to control new obstacles at the aerodromeorinitsenvirons;includingnewbuildingdevelopments; c) Descriptionofthesysteminplacetoremoveexistingobstaclesfromthe aerodromeanditsenvirons; d) Details of the procedures used for notifying the Authority of the nature and location of obstacles and any subsequent addition or removal of obstacle for action as necessary including amendment of the AIS publications;and e) Description of the system in place to obtain and report obstacles and terraindatatotheAuthorityintheapplicabledatacollectionareas. 3.4.11.2 3.4.12 3.4.12.1 Names and roles of the persons responsible for control of obstacles at the aerodrome,andtheirtelephonenumbersduringandafterworkinghours. HandlingofHazardousMaterial Synopsisoftheproceduresusedforthesafehandlingandstorageofhazardous materialontheaerodrome,includingthefollowing: App313

3.4.10.2 3.4.11 3.4.11.1

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX3 a) Details of special areas on the aerodrome setup for the storage of inflammable liquids (including aviation fuels) and any other hazardous material; b) The method to be followed for the delivery, storage, dispensing and handlingofhazardousmaterials; c) Descriptionofthesysteminplacetotestthequalityofaviationfuelprior todispensingintoaircraft;and d) Description of the procedures in place on the apron to ensure safety duringaircraftrefuelling/defuellingoperations. Note: Further regulation is provided in CAR Part 6, Chapter 2, Transport of DangerousGoods. 3.4.13 3.4.13.1 LowVisibilityProcedure Synopsisofprocedurestobeintroducedforlowvisibilityoperations,including: a) A statement of operation providing detail as to what the lowest limit (meteorological condition) aircraft approaches and/or departures has beenacceptedbytheAuthorityfortheaerodrome, b) Details of how measurement and reporting of Runway Visual Range is made; c) A description of the safeguarding measures undertaken and at what stage(s)theyareimplemented; d) Descriptionofsystem(s)usedtocontrolaircraftandvehiclesduringlow visibilityoperations. 3.4.13.2 Names and roles of the persons responsible for control of low visibility operations at the aerodrome, and their telephone numbers during and after workinghours. ProtectionofRadarandNavigationalSites Synopsisoftheproceduresfor theprotectionandoperations andmaintenance of radar and radio navigational aids located on the aerodrome to ensure that theirperformancewillnotbedegraded,includingthefollowing: a) Descriptionofaerodromenavigationaids; b) Detailsofinspectionschedule,typeofinspection/calibrationconducted; c) Acopyofthechecklistsused;

3.4.14 3.4.14.1

App314

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX3 d) Details of record keeping arrangements, including corrective actions taken; e) Procedures for reporting the results of the inspection to unit(s) responsible for control of aircraft on the Movement Area, and parties responsibleforrectificationofanydeficienciesfound,andfollowup; f) Descriptionofpreventativemaintenancemeasuresundertaken; g) Details of the number of personnel involved including shift structure to maintainthenavigationaidsfortheaerodrome; h) Adescriptionofthemaintenancescheduleprogramme;and i) The arrangementforthecontrolofactivitiesinthevicinityof radarand navaidsinstallationstoensurethatthereisnointerferenceofsignal. 3.4.14.2 Namesandrolesofpersonsresponsibleforoperationsandmaintenanceofradio navigation aids on the aerodrome including telephone numbers for contact duringandafterworkhours. PART5RFFSAERODROMEMANUALREQUIREMENTS ThenameandroleofthepersonresponsiblefortheprovisionoftheAerodrome Rescue Fire Service including the telephone number for contacting that person duringandafterworkinghours. HighlevelPolicystatementoftheRFFcategory(s)tobeprovided. At aerodromes where a higher category is available by prior arrangement the Manualshouldclearlystatetheactionsnecessarytoupgradethefacility. The Aerodrome Operator objectives for each RFF category provided should be defined. Thisshouldincludeachartof: a) Amountsofmediaprovided; b) Dischargerates; c) Numberoffoamproducingappliances; d) Manninglevels;and e) Levelsofsupervision. Note:WhentheobjectivesarehigherthanthosesetoutintheseRegulations, Aerodrome Operators may also wish to indicate the operational levels acceptableundertheirsafetypolicies.

3.5 3.5.1

3.5.2 3.5.3 3.5.4 3.5.5

App315

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX3 3.5.6 3.5.7 3.5.8 Indicating how the adequacy of the response time capability throughout their functionsandlocationsismonitoredandmaintained. Indicating how RFF personnel engaged in extraneous duties are managed to ensurethatresponsecapabilityisnotaffected. Where the aerodrome provides specialist equipment such as water tankers, rescue craft, emergency tenders, hose layers, appliances with aerial capability, etc., details should be included in the Aerodrome Manual. Procedures to be followedifthesefacilitiesaretemporarilyunavailableshouldalsobeincluded. Wheretheaerodromeisreliantuponotherorganisationstoprovideequipment whichisessentialforensuringsafeoperationoftheaerodrome(perhapswater rescue), policies or letters of agreement should be included in the Aerodrome Manual. Where necessary, contingency plans in the event of nonavailability should be described. AhighlevelstatementdescribingtheprocessbywhichAerodromeOperatorsto selectandretainRFFSpersonnel. A highlevel statement describing the process by which Aerodrome Operators ensuretheinitialandcontinuedcompetenceoftheirRFFpersonnel. Procedures indicating how accidents within 1000 m of the threshold of each runway are to be accessed. Where other difficult environs exist the Manual shouldindicatehowthesearetobeaccessed. WhereAerodromeOperatorsexpecttheRFFfacilitytorespondtodomesticfires orspecialservices,proceduresformanagingtheimpactofthisuponthenormal aircraftRFFresponseshouldbeincluded. Where Aerodrome Operators expect the RFF facility to respond to aircraft accidents landside/off aerodrome, the policy should be clearly described. This should include procedures to manage the effects on continued aircraft operations. Theavailabilityofadditionalwatersuppliesfollowinganaircraftaccidentshould be described. Details of the policy to be followed in the event of contractual workwhichrequiresisolationordepletionofsuppliesshouldbeincluded. An indication of the scale of the medical equipment available. Where medical equipment is held other than on the RFF vehicles a statement indicating its locationandhowitistobetransportedtoanincidentshouldbeincluded.

3.5.9

3.5.10 3.5.11 3.5.12 3.5.13

3.5.14

3.5.15

3.5.16

3.5.17

App316

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX3 3.5.18 3.5.18.1 IntegratedEmergencyPlanning The Aerodrome Operators arrangements for determining and implementing plans that ensure the integrated management of response to an aircraft incident/accident. These arrangements should take account of the complexity andsizeoftheaircraftoperations. Policy statement of distance airport would respond to an aircraft accident off aerodrome. Additionalinformation/instructionswithintheEmergencyPlanshallbedescribed baseduponthehazard/riskregistryundertakenbytheAerodromeOperator. AircraftRecoveryPlan The Aerodrome Operators arrangements and implementing plans that ensure the integrated management of aircraft recovery and business continuity followinganaircraftincident/accident.Thesearrangementsshouldtakeaccount of the complexity and size of the aircraft operations and based on the largest aircraftusingtheaerodrome. The GCAA Regulations for the full provision of Rescue, FireFighting and EmergencyPlanningforallcategoriesofaerodromeshallbeinaccordancewith Civil Aviation Regulation (CAR) Part XI Aerodrome Emergency Service, EquipmentandFacilities. PART6AERODROMEADMINISTRATIONANDSAFETYMANAGEMENTSYSTEM AerodromeAdministrationandSMSOrganisation An organisational chart showing the names and positions of key personnel, involvedwithaerodromelicensingandsafetymanagementissuesincluding: a) A description of their responsibilities including safety accountabilities, and b) A description of the safety management group/committee including publishedsafetyaccountabilities. 3.6.2 3.6.2.1 SafetyManagementSystem(SMS) A description of the aerodrome safety management system established for ensuring compliance with all safety requirements and achieving continuous improvementinsafetyperformance,includingthefollowingessentialfeatures: a) A statement of safety policies, insofar as applicable, on the process of safetymanagementanditsrelationtotheoperationalandmaintenance process;

3.5.18.2 3.5.18.3 3.5.19 3.5.19.1

3.5.19.2

3.6 3.6.1

App317

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX3 b) A description of how planning and strategy is undertaken including, allocating priority for implementing safety initiatives, and the setting of safetyperformancetargetsandassessmentofachievementagainstthese targets; c) A description of the aerodrome quality assurance system including internalsafetyauditandreviewschedule,andmethodologyforensuring compliancywiththeseRegulationsandqualitycontrolonsafety; d) Adescriptionofthesystememployedforthedocumentationofallsafety related airport facilities as well as airport operational and maintenance records including information on the design and construction of aircraft pavementsandaerodromelighting,andtheireasyretrieval; e) A description of the methodology used to identify risks; and mitigating and controlling those risks to a level as low as reasonably practicable keeping alwaysinview therequirementsoftheseRegulationsandICAO Annexesandotherdocumentation; f) Adescriptionofthesystemusedinidentifyingcriticalsafetyareaswhich requireahigherlevelofsafetymanagementintegrity,andtheadoption of a Safety Measures Programme (e.g. works safety plan, airside driver licensing;lowvisibilityoperations); g) A description of the system for reporting occurrences, complaints, defects, faults, discrepancies and failures including the handling and investigation of reports as well as continuing safety monitoring and analysisoftrends; h) A description of the methods and procedures used for effective communications of safety messages and enforcement of safety requirements;and i) A description of the system implemented for recruitment, staff training andcompetencytestingincludingreviewandevaluationoftheadequacy of training provided to staff on safety related duties and of the certificationsystemfortestingtheircompetency. 3.6.3 TheSafetypolicyshouldinclude: a) A statement of intent about maintaining or improving current safety performance. b) A statement of intent to minimise the risks of an accident occurring probablywithaasfarasreasonablepracticalcaveat; c) Astatementofintenttoimplementaneffectiveformalsafetysystem

App318

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX3 d) A statement about individual and management accountability and responsibilityforsafetyperformance e) A statement about the priority ascribed to flight safety relative to commercial,operational,environmentalandworkingpracticepressures f) A statement about compliance with safety standards and regulatory requirements g) A statement about ensuring subcontractors meet company safety standardsandrequirements. 3.6.4 AdescriptionofthesystemimplementedtobriefAirTransportOperatorsandAir Carriers,ofthenecessarysafetyandregulatoryrequirementsforaircraftbefore operating in the Emirates FIR or from UAE Territory as required by these Regulations. Detailsoftheproceduresadoptedtonegateaircraftoperatorsfromoperatingat their aerodrome when such aircraft operators cannot meet the UAE regulatory requirements,oraresubjectto: a) abanbasedupontheoriginofregistryasnotifiedbytheAuthority; b) aceaseanddesistorderasnotifiedbytheAuthority;or c) when the aircraft is subject to a grounding order as notified by the Authority.

3.6.5

App319

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX4

APPENDIX4 CONDUCTOFAERONAUTICALSTUDIES 4.1 PURPOSE AnAeronauticalStudyisconductedtoassesstheimpactofdeviationsfromthe aerodrome standards specified in Civil Aviation Regulations and Annex 14, Volume I and II to the convention on International Civil Aviation; present alternative means of ensuring safety of aircraft operations; estimate the effectivenessofeachalternativeandrecommendprocedurestocompensatefor thedeviation. 4.2 APPLICABILITY AnAeronauticalStudymaybecarriedoutwhereaerodromestandardscannotbe met as a result of development. Such a study is most frequently undertaken during the planning of a new airport or during the certification of an existing aerodrome. Note:Aeronauticalstudiesmaynotberequiredincasesofdeviationsfromthe standards,ifnotspecificallyrecommendedintheseRegulations. 4.3 4.3.1 TECHNICALANALYSIS Technicalanalysiswillprovidejustificationforadeviationonthegroundsthatan equivalent level of safety can be attained by other means. It is generally applicable in situations where the cost of correcting a problem that violates a standard is excessive but where the unsafe effects of the problem can be overcomebysomeproceduralmeans,whichofferbothpracticalandreasonable solutions. Inconductingatechnicalanalysis,aninspectorwilldrawuponhis/herpractical experienceandspecialisedknowledge.He/shemayalsoconsultotherspecialists in relevant areas. When considering alternative procedures in the deviation approval process, it is essential to bear in mind the safety objective of Aerodrome Certification Regulations and the applicable standards so that the intentoftheregulationsisnotcircumvented. APPROVALOFDEVIATIONS Insomeinstancestheonlyreasonablemeansofprovidinganequivalentlevelof safety is adoption of suitable procedures and to require, as a condition of certification, that cautionary advice shall be published in the appropriate AIS publicationsandthedetailincludedwithintheAerodromeManual.

4.3.2

4.4 4.4.1

App41

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX4 4.4.2 The determination to require caution will be primarily dependent on two considerations: (a) apilotsneedtobemadeawareofpotentiallyhazardousconditions;and (b) the responsibility of the Authority to publish deviations from standards thatwouldotherwisebeassumedundercertificatestatus.

App42

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX5 APPENDIX5 AERONAUTICALDATAQUALITYREQUIREMENTS TableApp51 LatitudeandLongitude

APP51

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX5 TableApp52 Elevation/Altitude/Height

APP52

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX5 TableApp53 DeclinationandMagneticVariation

TableApp54 Bearing

APP53

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX5 TableApp55 Length/Distance/Dimension

APP54

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX6

APPENDIX6 ISSUEOFANOTAM 6.1 ANOTAMshallbeoriginatedandissuedconcerningthefollowinginformation: a) establishment, closure or significant changes in operation of aerodrome(s)/heliport(s)orrunways(includingtaxiways); b) establishment, withdrawal and significant changes in operation of aeronauticalservices(AGA,AIS,ATS,COM,MET,SAR,etc.); c) establishmentorwithdrawalofelectronicandotheraidstoairnavigation and aerodromes/heliports. This includes: interruption or return to operation, change of frequencies, change in notified hours of service, change of identification, change of orientation (directional aids), change of location, power increase or decrease amounting to 50 percent or more, change in broadcast schedules or contents, or irregularity or unreliabilityof operationofany electronicaidto airnavigation,andair groundcommunicationservices; d) establishment,withdrawalorsignificantchangesmadetovisualaids; e) interruptionoforreturntooperationofmajorcomponentsofaerodrome lightingsystems; f) establishment,withdrawalorsignificantchangesmadetoproceduresfor airnavigationservices; g) occurrence or correction of major defects or impediments in the ManoeuvringArea; h) ManoeuvringAreaclosuresincludingaerodromeworks; i) changestoandlimitationsonavailabilityoffuel,oilandoxygen; j) majorchangestosearchandrescuefacilitiesandservicesavailable; k) establishment, withdrawal or return to operation of hazard beacons markingsignificantobstaclestoairnavigation; l) changesinairspacestructure,egrestrictedareasdeclaredforSARaction; m) presence of hazards which affect air navigation (including obstacles, military exercises, displays, races and major parachuting events outside promulgatedsites);

APP61

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX6 n) erecting or removal of, or changes to, obstacles to air navigation in the takeoff/climb,missedapproach,approachareasandrunwaystrip; o) establishmentordiscontinuance(includingactivationordeactivation)as applicable, or changes in the status of prohibited, restricted or danger areas; p) establishment or discontinuance of areas or routes or portions thereof wherethepossibilityofinterceptionexistsandwherethemaintenanceof guardontheVHFemergencyfrequency121.5MHzisrequired; q) allocation,cancellationorchangeoflocationindicators; r) significant changes in the level of protection normally available at an aerodrome for rescue and fire fighting purposes. NOTAM shall be originatedonlywhenachangeofcategoryisinvolvedandsuchchangeof categoryshallbeclearlystated(seeAnnex14,VolumeI,Chapter9,and AttachmentA,Section17); s) presence or removal of, or significant changes in, hazardous conditions duetowaterontheMovementArea; t) outbreaksofepidemicsnecessitatingchangesinnotifiedrequirementsfor inoculationsandquarantinemeasures; u) forecastsofsolarcosmicradiation,whereprovided; v) anoperationallysignificantchangeinvolcanicactivity,thelocation,date and time of volcanic eruptions and/or horizontal and vertical extent of volcanic ash cloud, including direction of movement, flight levels and routesorportionsofrouteswhichcouldbeaffected; w) release into the atmosphere of radioactive materials or toxic chemicals following a nuclear or chemical incident, the location, date and time of theincident,theflightlevelsandroutesorportionsthereofwhichcould beaffectedandthedirectionofmovement; x) establishment of operations of humanitarian relief missions, such as those undertaken under the auspices of United Nations, together with proceduresand/orlimitationswhichaffectairnavigation; y) implementation of shortterm contingency measures in cases of disruption, or partial disruption, of air traffic services and related supportingservices;and Note:SeeICAOAnnex11,Clause2.28andAttachmentDtothatAnnex z) runway may be slippery when wet when friction is below minimum frictionlevels.

APP62

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX6 6.2 6.3 The need for origination of a NOTAM shall be considered in any other circumstancewhichmayaffecttheoperationsofaircraft. ThefollowinginformationshallnotbenotifiedbyNOTAM: a) routinemaintenanceworkonapronsandtaxiwayswhichdoesnotaffect thesafemovementofaircraft; b) runwaymarkingwork,whenaircraftoperationscansafelybeconducted onotheravailablerunways,ortheequipmentusedcanberemovedwhen necessary; c) temporary obstructions in the vicinity of aerodromes/ heliports that do notaffectthesafeoperationofaircraft; d) partialfailureofaerodrome/heliportlightingfacilitieswheresuchfailure doesnotdirectlyaffectaircraftoperations; e) partial temporary failure of airground communications when suitable alternativefrequenciesareknowntobeavailableandareoperative; f) thelackofapronmarshallingservicesandroadtrafficcontrol; g) theunserviceabilityoflocation,destinationorotherinstructionsignson theaerodromeMovementArea; h) parachuting when in uncontrolled airspace under VFR, when controlled, atpromulgatedsitesorwithindangerorprohibitedareas;or i) otherinformationofasimilartemporarynature.

APP63

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX7 APPENDIX7 AERODROMEREFERENCECODE Introductory Note The intent of the reference code is to provide a simple method for interrelatingthenumerousspecificationsconcerningthecharacteristicsofaerodromessoas toprovideaseriesofaerodromefacilitiesthataresuitablefortheaircraftthatareintended tooperateattheaerodrome.Thecodeisnotintendedtobeusedfordeterminingrunway length or pavement strength requirements. The code is composed of two elements which are related to the aircraft performance characteristics and dimensions. Element 1 is a numberbasedontheAeroplaneReferenceFieldLengthandelement2isaletterbasedon theaircraftwingspanandoutermaingearwheelspan.Aparticularspecificationisrelated tothemoreappropriateofthetwoelementsofthecodeortoanappropriatecombination ofthetwocodeelements.TheCodeLetterornumberwithinanelementselectedfordesign purposes is related to the critical aircraft characteristics for which the facility is provided. When applying ICAO Annex 14, Volume I, the aircraft which the aerodrome is intended to servearefirstidentifiedandthenthetwoelementsofthecode. 7.1 AnAerodromeReferenceCodeCodeNumberandletterwhichisselected for aerodrome planning purposes shall be determined in accordance with the characteristicsoftheaircraftforwhichanaerodromefacilityisintended. The Aerodrome Reference Code Numbers and letters shall have the meanings assignedtotheminTableApp71 TheCodeNumberforelement1shallbedeterminedfromTableApp71,column 1, selecting the Code Number corresponding to the highest value of the Aeroplane Reference Field Lengths of the aircraft for which the runway is intended. Note:ThedeterminationoftheAeroplaneReferenceFieldLengthissolelyfor the selection of a Code Number and is not intended to influence the actual runwaylengthprovided. 7.4 TheCodeLetterforelement2shallbedeterminedfromTableApp71,column3, byselectingtheCodeLetterwhichcorrespondstothegreatestwingspan,orthe greatestoutermaingearwheelspan,whichevergivesthemoredemandingCode Letteroftheaircraftforwhichthefacilityisintended. Note: Guidance to Aerodrome Operator concerning determination of the AerodromeReferenceCodeisgivenintheAerodromeDesignManual(ICAODoc 9157),Parts1and2.

7.2 7.3

APP71

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX7 TableApp71 AerodromeReferenceCode

APP72

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX8 APPENDIX8 PHYSICALCHARACTERISTICS 8.1 AERODROMEDESIGN The design of aerodromes shall take into account, where appropriate landuse andenvironmentalcontrolmeasures. 8.2 AERODROMEREFERENCEPOINT The Aerodrome Reference Point shall be located near the initial or planned geometric centre of the aerodrome and shall normally remain where first established. 8.3 RUNWAYS Note: The general requirements for runways are contained in ICAO Annex 14 Volume 1 Chapter 3; ICAO Annex 14 Volume 1 Attachment A, and the AerodromeDesignManual(ICAODoc9157)Part1 8.3.1 8.3.1.1 NumberandOrientationofRunways Thenumberandorientationofrunwaysatanaerodromeshouldbesuchthatthe usabilityfactoroftheaerodromeisnotlessthan95percentfortheaircraftthat theaerodromeisintendedtoserve. Thesitingandorientationofrunwaysatanaerodromeshouldwherepossible,be such that the arrival and departure tracks minimise interference with areas approved for residential use and other noise sensitive areas close to the aerodromeinordertoavoidfuturenoiseproblems. Note:GuidancetotheAerodromeOperatoronhowtoaddressnoiseproblemsis provided in the Airport Planning Manual (ICAO Doc 9184), Part 2, and in GuidanceontheBalancedApproachtoAircraftNoticeManagement(ICAODoc 9829). 8.3.2 ChoiceofMaximumPermissibleCrossWindComponents Intheapplicationof8.3.1itshouldbeassumedthatlandingortakeoffofaircraft is,innormalcircumstances,precludedwhenthecrosswindcomponentexceeds: a) 37km/h(20kt)inthecaseofaircraftwhosereferencefieldlengthis1500 m or over, except that when poor runway braking action owing to an insufficient longitudinal coefficient of friction is experienced with some frequency,acrosswindcomponentnotexceeding24km/h(13kt)should beassumed;

8.3.1.2

APP81

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX8 b) 24km/h(13kt)inthecaseofaircraftwhosereferencefieldlengthis1200 moruptobutnotincluding1500m;and c) 19km/h(10kt)inthecaseofaircraftwhosereferencefieldlengthisless than1200m. 8.3.3 DatatobeUsed Theselectionofdatatobeusedforthecalculationoftheusabilityfactorshould bebasedonreliablewinddistributionstatisticsthatextendoveraslongaperiod aspossible,preferablyofnotlessthanfiveyears.Theobservationsusedshould bemadeatleasteighttimesdailyandspacedatequalintervalsoftime. 8.3.4 8.3.4.1 8.3.4.2 FrictionLevelDesignObjective When designing new paved runways, or resurfacing existing paved runway surfaces,goodfrictioncharacteristicsshallbetakenintoaccount. The design objective shall be as specified in Civil Aviation Advisory Publication (CAAP) 32 The Assessment of Runway Surface Friction Characteristics, correspondingtotheparticulartestequipmenttype. LocationofThreshold A threshold should normally be located at the extremity of a runway unless operationalconsiderationsjustifythechoiceofanotherlocation. Whenitisnecessarytodisplaceathreshold,eitherpermanentlyortemporarily, from its normal location, account should be taken of the various factors which mayhaveabearingonthelocationofthethreshold.Wherethisdisplacementis duetoanunserviceablerunwaycondition,aclearedandgradedareaofatleast 60 m in length should be available between the unserviceable area and the displaced threshold. Additional distance should also be provided to meet the requirementsoftheRunwayEndSafetyAreaasappropriate(seeClause8.3.9.11 ofthisAppendix). ActualLengthofRunways PrimaryRunway ExceptasprovidedinClause8.3.6.3ofthisAppendix,theactualrunwaylengthto be provided for a primary runway should be adequate to meet the operational requirementsoftheaircraftforwhichtherunwayisintendedandshouldbenot less than the longest length determined by applying the corrections for local conditions to the operations and performance characteristics of the relevant aircraft.

8.3.5 8.3.5.1 8.3.5.2

8.3.6 8.3.6.1

APP82

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX8 8.3.6.2 SecondaryRunway The length of a secondary runway should be determined similarly to primary runwaysexceptthatitneedsonlytobeadequateforthoseaircraftwhichrequire tousethatsecondaryrunwayinadditiontotheotherrunwayorrunwaysinorder toobtainausabilityfactorofatleast95percent. 8.3.6.3 RunwayswithStopwaysorClearways Where a runway is associated with a stopway or clearway, an actual runway lengthlessthanthatresultingfromapplicationofClause8.3.6.1or8.3.6.2ofthis Appendix,asappropriate,maybeconsideredsatisfactory,butinsuchacaseany combination of runway, stopway and clearway provided should permit compliance with the operational requirements for takeoff and landing of the aircrafttherunwayisintendedtoserve. 8.3.7 WidthofRunways Thewidthofarunwayshallbenotlessthantheappropriatedimensionspecified inthefollowingtabulation: CodeNumber 1a 2a 3 4 The width of a precision approach runway should be not less than 30 metres wheretheCodeNumberis1or2. 8.3.8 8.3.8.1 MinimumDistancebetweenParallelRunways WhereparallelNonInstrumentRunwaysareintendedforsimultaneoususe,the minimumdistancebetweentheircentrelinesshallbe: a) 210mwherethehigherCodeNumberis3or4; b) 150mwherethehigherCodeNumberis2;and c) 120mwherethehigherCodeNumberis1. A 18m 23m 30m B 18m 23m 30m CodeLetter C 23m 30m 30m 45m D 45m 45m E 45m F 60m

APP83

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX8 8.3.8.2 WhereparallelInstrumentRunwaysareintendedforsimultaneoususesubjectto conditionsspecifiedinthePANSATM(ICAODoc4444)andthePANSOPS(ICAO Doc 8168), Volume I, the minimum distancebetween their centre lines shall be notlessthan: a) 1035mforindependentparallelapproaches; b) 915mfordependentparallelapproaches; c) 760mforindependentparalleldepartures; d) 760mforsegregatedparalleloperations; exceptthat: e) forsegregatedparalleloperationsthespecifiedminimumdistance: i) maybedecreasedby30mforeach150mthatthearrivalrunwayis staggeredtowardthearrivingaircraft,toaminimumof300m;and ii) shallbeincreased by30mforeach150mthatthearrivalrunwayis staggeredawayfromthearrivingaircraft; f) forindependentparallelapproaches,combinationsofminimumdistances and associated conditions other than those specified in the PANSATM (Doc4444)maybeappliedwhenitisdeterminedthatsuchcombinations wouldnotadverselyaffectthesafetyofaircraftoperations. 8.3.9 8.3.9.1 SlopesonRunways LongitudinalSlopes The slope computed by dividing the difference between the maximum and minimumelevationalongtherunwaycentrelinebytherunwaylengthshouldnot exceed: a) 1percentwheretheCodeNumberis3or4;and b) 2percentwheretheCodeNumberis1or2. Alongnoportionofarunwayshouldthelongitudinalslopeexceed: c) 1.25 percent where the Code Number is 4, except that for the first and lastquarterofthelengthoftherunwaythelongitudinalslopeshouldnot exceed0.8percent; d) percent where the Code Number is 3, except that for the first and last quarterofthelengthofaPrecisionApproachRunwayCategoryIIorIIIthe longitudinalslopeshouldnotexceed0.8percent;and e) 2percentwheretheCodeNumberis1or2. APP84

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX8 8.3.9.2 LongitudinalSlopeChanges Where slope changes cannot be avoided, a slope change between two consecutiveslopesshouldnotexceed: a) 1.5percentwheretheCodeNumberis3or4;and b) 2percentwheretheCodeNumberis1or2. The transition from one slope to another should be accomplished by a curved surfacewitharateofchangenotexceeding: c) percentper30m(minimumradiusofcurvatureof30000m)wherethe CodeNumberis4; d) percentper30m(minimumradiusofcurvatureof15000m)wherethe CodeNumberis3;and e) percent per 30 m (minimum radius of curvature of 7 500 m) where the CodeNumberis1or2. 8.3.9.3 SightDistance Whereslopechangescannotbeavoided,theyshouldbesuchthattherewillbe anunobstructedlineofsightfrom: a) anypoint3mabovearunwaytoallotherpoints3mabovetherunway withinadistanceofatleasthalfthelengthoftherunwaywheretheCode LetterisC,D,EorF. b) anypoint2mabovearunwaytoallotherpoints2mabovetherunway withinadistanceofatleasthalfthelengthoftherunwaywheretheCode LetterisB;and c) any point 1.5 m above a runway to all other points 1.5 m above the runwaywithinadistanceofatleasthalfthelengthoftherunwaywhere theCodeLetterisA. 8.3.9.4 DistancebetweenSlopeChanges Undulations or appreciable changes in slopes located close together along a runwayshallbeavoided.Thedistancebetweenthepointsofintersectionoftwo successivecurvesshallnotbelessthan: the sum of the absolute numerical values of the corresponding slope changes multipliedbytheappropriatevalueasfollows: a) 30000mwheretheCodeNumberis4; b) 15000mwheretheCodeNumberis3;and

APP85

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX8 c) 5000mwheretheCodeNumberis1or2;or d) 45m whicheverisgreater. Note:GuidancetotheAerodromeOperatoronapplicationisgivenwithinICAO Annex14AttachmentAsection4. 8.3.9.5 TransverseSlopes a) Topromotethemostrapiddrainageofwater,therunwaysurfaceshould, if practicable, be cambered except where a single crossfall from high to low in the direction of the wind most frequently associated with rain wouldensurerapiddrainage.Thetransverseslopeshouldideallybe: i) 1.5percentwheretheCodeLetterisC,D,EorF;and ii) percentwheretheCodeLetterisAorB; butinanyeventshouldnotexceed1.5percentor2percent,asapplicable, nor be less than 1 percent except at runway or taxiway intersections whereflatterslopesmaybenecessary. b) For a cambered surface the transverse slope on each side of the centre lineshouldbesymmetrical. c) The transverse slope should be substantially the same throughout the length of a runway except at an intersection with another runway or a taxiway where an even transition should be provided taking account of theneedforadequatedrainage. 8.3.9.6 StrengthofRunways Arunwayshouldbecapableofwithstandingthetrafficofaircrafttherunwayis intended to serve. The Authority does not specify a standard for a runway bearing strength, however, the bearing strength must be such that it will not cause any safety problems to aircraft. The published PCN value should be suitablefortheaircraftthatregularlyusetherunway. Note:FurtherguidanceisgivenintheDesignManual,Part3Pavements(ICAO DOC9157) 8.3.9.7 SurfaceofRunways a) The surface of a runway shall be constructed without irregularities that wouldresultinlossinfrictioncharacteristicsorotherwiseadverselyaffect thetakeofforlandingofanaircraft.

APP86

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX8 b) Thesurfaceofapavedrunwayshallbesoconstructedastoprovidegood frictioncharacteristicswhentherunwayiswet. c) Where the runway code is 3 or 4 , measurements of the friction characteristics of a new or resurfaced runway shall be made with a continuousfrictionmeasuringdeviceusingselfwettingfeaturesinorder to assure that the design objectives with respect to its friction characteristicshavebeenachieved. d) Where the runway is code 1 or 2, measurements of the friction characteristics of a new or resurfaced runway should be made with a continuousfrictionmeasuringdeviceusingselfwettingfeaturesinorder to assure that the design objectives with respect to its friction characteristicshavebeenachieved. e) The average surface texture depth of a new surface should be not less than1.0mm. f) When the surface is grooved or scored, the grooves or scorings shall be either perpendicular to the runway centre line or parallel to non perpendiculartransversejoints,whereapplicable. 8.3.9.8 RunwayShoulders a) General i) Runway shoulders shall be provided for a runway where the Code LetterisDorE,andtherunwaywidthislessthan60m. ii) Runway shoulders shall be provided for a runway where the Code LetterisF. b) Widthofrunwayshoulders i) Therunwayshouldersshallextendsymmetricallyoneachsideofthe runwaysothattheoverallwidthoftherunwayanditsshouldersisnot lessthan: A) 60mwheretheCodeLetterisDorE;and B) 75mwheretheCodeLetterisF. ii) CodeErunwaysusedforcodeFaircraftoperationsshallbeprovided withshouldersthatextendsymmetricallyoneachsideoftherunway andconsistof: A) Innershoulders7.5metresinwidthoneithersidethatareableto supportunintendedaircraftrunoff;and

APP87

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX8 B) Outer shoulders 7.5 metres in width on either side that are resistanttoengineblasterosion,preventengineingestionandare abletosupportemergencyandservicevehicles. c) SurfaceofRunwayShoulders The shoulders of a runway intended to serve turbine jet aircraft with engineswhichmayoverhangtheedgeofarunwayshallbesurfacedwith abituminousseal,asphaltorconcrete. d) SlopesonRunwayShoulders Thesurfaceoftheshoulderthatabutstherunwayshallbeflushwiththe surface of the runway and its transverse slope should not exceed 2.5 percent. e) StrengthofRunwayShoulders Arunwayshouldershallbepreparedorconstructedsoastobecapable, in the event of an aircraft running off the runway, of supporting the aircraft without inducing structural damage to the aircraft and of supportinggroundvehicleswhichmayoperateontheshoulder. 8.3.9.9 RunwayTurnPads a) General i) Where the end of a runway is not served by a taxiway or a taxiway turnaroundandwheretheCodeLetterisD,EorF,arunwayturnpad shallbeprovidedtofacilitatea180degreeturnofaircraft.(SeeFigure App81.)

APP88

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX8 FigureApp81 TypicalTurnPadLayout

ii) Where the end of a runway is not served by a taxiway or a taxiway turnaroundandwheretheCodeLetterisA,BorC,arunwayturnpad shouldbeprovidedtofacilitatea180degreeturnofaircraft. iii) Therunwayturnpadmaybelocatedoneithertheleftorrightsideof the runway and adjoining the runway pavement at both ends of the runwayandatsomeintermediatelocationswheredeemednecessary. iv) The intersection angle of the runway turn pad with the runway shall notexceed30degrees. v) Thenosewheelsteeringangletobeusedinthedesignoftherunway turnpadshouldnotexceed45degrees. vi) Thedesignofarunwayturnpadshallbesuchthat,whenthecockpit oftheaircraftforwhichtheturnpadisintendedremainsovertheturn padmarking,theclearancedistancebetweenanywheeloftheaircraft landinggearandtheedgeoftheturnpadshallbenotlessthanthat givenbythefollowingtabulation: CodeLetter A B C Clearance 1.5m 2.25m 3miftheturnpadisintendedtobeusedby aircraftwithawheelbaselessthan18m;or 4.5miftheturnpadisintendedtobeusedby aircraftwithawheelbaseequaltoorgreater than18m. D APP89 4.5m

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX8 E F 4.5m 4.5m

vii) Where severe weather conditions and resultant lowering of surface frictioncharacteristicsprevail,alargerwheeltoedgeclearanceof6m shallbeprovidedwheretheCodeLetterisEorF. b) SlopesonRunwayTurnPads The longitudinal and transverse slopes on a runway turn pad should be sufficient to prevent the accumulation of water on the surface and facilitaterapiddrainageofsurfacewater.Theslopesshouldbethesame asthoseontheadjacentrunwaypavementsurface. c) StrengthofRunwayTurnPads The strength of a runway turn pad shall be at least equal to that of the adjoining runway which it serves, due consideration being given to the factthattheturnpadwillbesubjectedtoslowmovingtrafficmakinghard turnsandconsequenthigherstressesonthepavement. d) SurfaceofRunwayTurnPads i) Thesurfaceofarunwayturnpadshallnothavesurfaceirregularities thatmaycausedamagetoanaircraftusingtheturnpad. ii) The surface of a runway turn pad should be so constructed as to providegoodfrictioncharacteristicsforaircraftusingthefacilitywhen thesurfaceiswet. e) ShouldersforRunwayTurnPads i) The runway turn pads should be provided with shoulders of such widthasisnecessarytopreventsurfaceerosionbythejetblastofthe mostdemandingaircraftforwhichtheturnpadisintended,andany possibleforeignobjectdamagetotheaircraftengines. ii) The strength of runway turn pad shoulders should be capable of withstanding the occasional passage of the aircraft it is designed to serve without inducing structural damage to the aircraft and to the supportinggroundvehiclesthatmayoperateontheshoulder. 8.3.9.10 RunwayStrips a) General Arunwayandanyassociatedstopwaysshallbeincludedinastrip.

APP810

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX8 b) LengthofRunwayStrips A strip shall extend before the threshold and beyond the end of the runwayorstopwayforadistanceofatleast: i) 60mwheretheCodeNumberis2,3or4; ii) 60 m where the Code Number is 1 and the runway is an instrument one;or iii) 30mwheretheCodeNumberis1andtherunwayisanoninstrument one. c) WidthofRunwayStrips i) Astripincludingaprecisionapproachrunwayshall,extendlaterallyto adistanceofatleast: A) 150mwheretheCodeNumberis3or4;and B) 75mwheretheCodeNumberis1or2; oneachsideofthecentrelineoftherunwayanditsextendedcentre linethroughoutthelengthofthestrip. ii) A strip including a nonprecision approach runway shall extend laterallytoadistanceofatleast: A) 150mwheretheCodeNumberis3or4;and B) 75mwheretheCodeNumberis1or2; oneachsideofthecentrelineoftherunwayanditsextendedcentre linethroughoutthelengthofthestrip. iii) A strip including a nonInstrumentRunway shall extend on each side of the centre line of the runway and its extended centre line throughoutthelengthofthestrip,toadistanceofatleast: A) 75mwheretheCodeNumberis3or4; B) 40mwheretheCodeNumberis2;and C) 30mwheretheCodeNumberis1. d) ObjectsonRunwayStrips i) Anobjectsituatedonarunwaystripwhichmayendangeraircraftshall beregardedasanobstacleandshouldberemoved.

APP811

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX8 ii) No fixed object, other than visual aids required for air navigation purposes, or equipment used for the reporting of Runway Visual Rangeconditions,andsatisfyingtherelevantfrangibilityrequirements oftheseRegulations,shallbepermittedonarunwaystrip: A) within 77.5 m of the runway centre line of a Precision Approach Runway Category I, II or III where the Code Number is 4 and the CodeLetterisF; B) within 60 m of the runway centre line of a Precision Approach RunwayCategoryI,IIorIIIwheretheCodeNumberis3or4;or C) within 45 m of the runway centre line of a Precision Approach RunwayCategoryIwheretheCodeNumberis1or2. iii) No mobile object shall be permitted on this part of the runway strip duringtheuseoftherunwayforlandingortakeoff. e) GradingofRunwayStrips i) ThatportionofastripofanInstrumentRunwaywithinadistanceofat least: 105mwheretheCodeNumberis3or4 from the centre line of the runway and its extended centre line as showninFigureApp82shallprovideagradedareaforaircraftwhich therunwayisintendedtoserveintheeventofanaircraftrunningoff therunway. FigureApp82 GradedPortionofaStripIncludingaPrecisionApproachRunway wheretheCodeNumberis3or4

ii) Within the graded area of the runway strip, constructions such as plinths, runway ends, paved taxiway edges, etc. should be delethalised, that is, so constructed as to avoid presenting a buried vertical face to aircraft wheels in soft ground conditions in any directionfrom whichanaircraftislikelytoapproach.Toeliminatea

APP812

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX8 buriedverticalsurface,aslopeshouldbeprovidedwhichextendsfrom thetopoftheconstructiontonotlessthan0.3mbelowgroundlevel. Theslopeshouldbenogreaterthan1:10. iii) ThatportionofastripofanInstrumentRunwaywithinadistanceofat least: 40mwheretheCodeNumberis1or2; fromthecentrelineoftherunwayanditsextendedcentrelineshall provide a graded area for aircraft which the runway is intended to serveintheeventofanaircraftrunningofftherunway iv) ThatportionofastripofanonInstrumentRunwaywithinadistance ofatleast: A) 75mwheretheCodeNumberis3or4; B) 40mwheretheCodeNumberis2;and C) 30mwheretheCodeNumberis1; fromthecentrelineoftherunwayanditsextendedcentrelineshall provide a graded area for aircraft which the runway is intended to serveintheeventofanaircraftrunningofftherunway. v) Thesurfaceofthatportionofastripthatabutsarunway,shoulderor stopway shall be flush with the surface of the runway, shoulder or stopway. vi) That portion of a strip to at least 30 m before a threshold shall be prepared against blast erosion in order to protect a landing aircraft fromthedangerofanexposededge. f) SlopesonRunwayStrips i) LongitudinalSlopes Alongitudinalslopealongthatportionofastriptobegradedshallnot exceed: A) 1.5percentwheretheCodeNumberis4; B) 1.75percentwheretheCodeNumberis3;and C) percentwheretheCodeNumberis1or2. ii) LongitudinalSlopeChanges

APP813

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX8 Slope changes on that portion of a strip to be graded should be as gradual as practicable and abrupt changes or sudden reversals of slopesavoided. iii) TransverseSlopes A) Transverseslopesonthatportionofastriptobegradedshallbe adequatetopreventtheaccumulationofwateronthesurfacebut shouldnotexceed: a. 2.5percentwheretheCodeNumberis3or4;and b. percentwheretheCodeNumberis1or2; except that to facilitate drainage the slope for the first 3 m outward from the runway, shoulder or stopway edge should be negativeasmeasuredinthedirectionawayfromtherunwayand maybeasgreatas5percent. B) Thetransverseslopes ofanyportionof astrip beyond thattobe graded should not exceed an upward slope of 5 percent as measuredinthedirectionawayfromtherunway. iv) StrengthofRunwayStrips A) ThatportionofastripofanInstrumentRunwaywithinadistance ofatleast: a. 75mwheretheCodeNumberis3or4;and b. 40mwheretheCodeNumberis1or2; from the centre line of the runway and its extended centre line shallbesopreparedorconstructedastominimisehazardsarising from differences in load bearing capacity to aircraft which the runwayisintendedtoserveintheeventofanaircraftrunningoff therunway. B) ThatportionofastripcontaininganonInstrumentRunwaywithin adistanceofatleast: a. 75mwheretheCodeNumberis3or4; b. 40mwheretheCodeNumberis2;and c. 30mwheretheCodeNumberis1; from the centre line of the runway and its extended centre line should be so prepared or constructed as to minimise hazards arisingfromdifferencesinloadbearing capacitytoaircraftwhich APP814

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX8 therunwayisintendedtoserveintheeventofanaircraftrunning offtherunway. 8.3.9.11 RunwayEndSafetyAreas a) General A Runway End Safety Area shall be provided at each end of a runway where: i) theCodeNumberis3or4;and ii) theCodeNumberis1or2andtherunwayisaninstrumentone. b) DimensionsofRunwayEndSafetyAreas ARunwayEndSafetyAreashall,extendfromthedeclaredrunwayendto adistanceofatleast: i) 300mwheretheCodeNumberis3or4;and ii) 150mwheretheCodeNumberis1or2. the width of a Runway End Safety Area shall be equal to that of the gradedportionoftheassociatedrunwaystrip. c) ClearingandGradingofRunwayEndSafetyAreas i) ARunwayEndSafetyAreashallprovideaclearedandgradedareafor aircraft which the runway is intended to serve in the event of an aircraftundershootingoroverrunningtherunway. ii) AnobjectsituatedonaRunwayEndSafetyAreawhichmayendanger aircraftshallberegardedasanobstacleandshallberemovedunless otherwiseapprovedbytheAuthority. iii) A Runway End Safety Area shall be so prepared or constructed as to reducetheriskofdamagetoanaircraftundershootingoroverrunning the runway, enhance aircraft deceleration and facilitate the movementofrescueandfirefightingvehicles. d) SlopesonRunwayEndSafetyAreas i) General TheslopesofaRunwayEndSafetyAreashallbesuchthatnopartof the Runway End Safety Area penetrates the approach or Takeoff ClimbSurface. ii) LongitudinalSlopes

APP815

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX8 ThelongitudinalslopesofaRunwayEndSafetyAreashallnotexceeda downward slope of 5 percent. Longitudinal slope changesshall be as gradual as practicable and abrupt changes or sudden reversals of slopesavoided. iii) TransverseSlopes ThetransverseslopesofaRunwayEndSafetyAreashallnotexceedan upward or downward slope of 5 percent. Transitions between differingslopesshallbeasgradualaspracticable. 8.3.9.12 Clearways Note(1):Theinclusionofdetailedspecificationsforclearwaysisnotintendedto implythataclearwayhastobeprovided. Note(2):Whereclearwaysareprovidedinconjunctionwithprecisionapproach runways, Aerodrome Operators should also take cognisance of the physical requirementsofaradioaltimeteroperatingarea a) LocationofClearways TheoriginofaclearwayshallbeattheendoftheTakeoffRunAvailable. b) LengthofClearways ThelengthofaclearwayshallnotexceedhalfthelengthoftheTakeoff RunAvailable. c) WidthofClearways Aclearwayshallextendlaterallytoadistanceofatleast75moneachside oftheextendedcentrelineoftherunway. d) SlopesonClearways i) The ground in a clearway shall not project above a plane having an upward slope of 1.25 percent, the lower limit of this plane being a horizontallinewhich: A) isperpendiculartotheverticalplanecontainingtherunwaycentre line;and B) passes through a point located on the runway centre line at the endoftheTakeoffRunAvailable. ii) Abrupt upward changes in slope shall be avoided when the slope on thegroundinaclearwayisrelativelysmallorwhenthemeanslopeis upward. In such situations, in that portion of the clearway within a distance of 22.5 m or half the runway width whichever is greater on APP816

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX8 each side of the extended centre line, the slopes, slope changes and the transition from runway to clearway shall generally conform with thoseoftherunwaywithwhichtheclearwayisassociated. FigureApp83 NormalClearway

Note:ReferenceinthisdiagramtoClause9.4.1.4isincorrect.CorrectreferenceisClause 8.3.9.12.d)ofthisAppendix.

FigureApp84 HorizontalPlaneClearway NotMorethan9m

APP817

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX8 FigureApp85 HorizontalPlaneClearway Morethan9m

FigureApp86 RunwayContinuedPlaneClearway

e) ObjectsonClearways An object situated on a clearway which may endanger aircraft in the air shallberegardedasanobstacleandshallberemoved. 8.3.9.13 Stopways Note(1):Theinclusionofdetailedspecificationsforstopwaysisnotintendedto implythatastopwayhastobeprovided. Note(2):Wherestopwaysareprovidedinconjunctionwithprecisionapproach runways, Aerodrome Operators should also take cognisance of the physical requirementsofaradioaltimeteroperatingarea

APP818

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX8 a) WidthofStopways A stopway shall have the same width as the runway with which it is associated. b) SlopesonStopways Slopes and changes in slope on a stopway, and the transition from a runway to a stopway, should comply with the specifications of Clause 8.3.9 of this Appendix for the runway with which the stopway is associatedexceptthat: i) thelimitationinClause8.3.9.1ofthisAppendixofa0.8percentslope for the first and last quarter of the length of a runway need not be appliedtothestopway;and ii) atthejunctionofthestopwayandrunwayandalongthestopwaythe maximum rate of slope change may be 0.3 percent per 30 m (minimum radius of curvature of 10000 m) for a runway where the CodeNumberis3or4. c) StrengthofStopways A stopway shall be prepared or constructed so as to be capable, in the event of an abandoned takeoff, of supporting the aircraft which the stopway is intended to serve without inducing structural damage to the aircraft. d) SurfaceofStopways i) Thesurfaceofapavedstopwayshallbesoconstructedastoprovidea good coefficient of friction to be compatible with that of the associatedrunwaywhenthestopwayiswet. ii) The friction characteristics of an unpaved stopway shall not be substantially less than that of the runway with which the stopway is associated. 8.3.9.14 RadioAltimeterOperatingArea a) General Aradioaltimeteroperatingareashallbeestablishedintheprethreshold areaofaprecisionapproachrunway. b) Lengthofthearea A radio altimeter operating area shall extend before the threshold for a distanceofatleast300m.

APP819

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX8 c) Widthofthearea A radioaltimeter operatingareashouldextend laterally,on eachside of theextendedcentrelineoftherunway,toadistanceof60m. d) Longitudinalslopechanges Onaradioaltimeteroperatingarea,slopechangesshouldbeavoidedor kepttoa minimum. Whereslopechangescannotbeavoided,theslope changesshouldbeasgradualaspracticableandabruptchangesorsudden reversalsofslopesavoided.Therateofchangebetweentwoconsecutive slopesshallnotexceed2percentper30m. 8.4 8.4.1 8.4.1.1 8.4.1.2 TAXIWAYS General Taxiwaysshallbeprovidedtopermitthesafeandexpeditioussurfacemovement ofaircraft. Sufficiententranceandexittaxiwaysforarunwayshallbeprovidedtoexpedite the movement of aircraft to and from the runway and provision of rapid exit taxiwaysconsideredwhentrafficvolumesarehigh. The design of a taxiway shall be such that, when the cockpit of the aircraft for whichthetaxiwayisintendedremainsoverthetaxiwaycentrelinemarkings,the clearancedistancebetweentheoutermainwheeloftheaircraftandtheedgeof thetaxiwayshallbenotlessthanthatgivenbythefollowingtabulation: CodeLetter A B Clearance 1.5m 2.25m 3mifthetaxiwayisintendedtobeusedby aircraftwithawheelbaselessthan18m;or mifthetaxiwayisintendedtobeusedbyaircraft withawheelbaseequaltoorgreaterthan18m. 4.5m 4.5m 4.5m

8.4.1.3

D E F

APP820

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX8

8.4.2 8.4.2.1

WidthofTaxiways Astraightportionofataxiwayshouldhaveawidthofnotlessthanthatgivenby thefollowingtabulation: CodeLetter A B TaxiwayWidth 7.5m 10.5m 15mifthetaxiwayisintendedtobeusedby aircraftwithawheelbaselessthan18m;or C 18mifthetaxiwayisintendedtobeusedby aircraftwithawheelbaseequaltoorgreater than18m. 18mifthetaxiwayisintendedtobeusedby aircraftwithanoutermaingearwheelspanof lessthan9m;or 23mifthetaxiwayisintendedtobeusedby aircraftwithanoutermaingearwheelspan equaltoorgreaterthan9m. 23m 25m

E F 8.4.3 TaxiwayCurves

Changesindirectionoftaxiwaysshouldbeasfewandsmallaspossible.Theradii of the curves shall be compatible with the manoeuvring capability and normal taxiingspeedsoftheaircraftforwhichthetaxiwayisintended.Thedesignofthe curve shall be such that, when the cockpit of the aircraft remains over the taxiway centre line markings, the clearance distance between the outer main wheels of the aircraft and the edge of the taxiway shall not be less than those specifiedinClause8.4.1.3ofthisAppendix. 8.4.4 JunctionsandIntersections To facilitate the movement of aircraft, fillets shall be provided at junctions and intersectionsoftaxiwayswithrunways,apronsandothertaxiways.Thedesignof the fillets shall ensure that the minimum wheel clearances specified in Clause APP821

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX8 8.4.1.3ofthisAppendixaremaintained whenaircraftaremanoeuvringthrough thejunctionsorintersections. 8.4.5 TaxiwayMinimumSeparationDistances Theseparationdistancebetweenthecentrelineofataxiwayandthecentreline ofarunway,thecentrelineofaparalleltaxiwayoranobjectshouldnotbeless thantheappropriatedimensionspecifiedinTableApp81,exceptthatitmaybe permissibletooperatewithlowerseparationdistancesatanexistingaerodrome ifanAeronauticalStudyindicatesthatsuchlowerseparationdistanceswouldnot adversely affect the safety or significantly affect the regularity of operations of aircraft. TableApp81 TaxiwayMinimumSeparationDistances

Note3:GuidancetoAerodromeOperatorsisincludedinAerodromeDesignManual(ICAODoc9157)

8.4.6 8.4.6.1

SlopesonTaxiways LongitudinalSlopes Thelongitudinalslopeofataxiwayshouldnotexceed: (a) 1.5percentwheretheCodeLetterisC,D,EorF;and (b) 3percentwheretheCodeLetterisAorB.

APP822

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX8 8.4.6.2 LongitudinalSlopeChanges Where slope changes on a taxiway cannot be avoided, the transition from one slopetoanotherslopeshouldbeaccomplishedbyacurvedsurfacewitharateof changenotexceeding: a) 1percentper30m(minimumradiusofcurvatureof3000m)wherethe CodeLetterisC,D,EorF;and b) 1percentper25m(minimumradiusofcurvatureof2500m)wherethe CodeLetterisAorB. 8.4.6.3 SightDistance Where a change in slope on a taxiway cannot be avoided, the change shall be suchthat,fromanypoint: a) 3mabovethetaxiway,itwillbepossibletoseethewholesurfaceofthe taxiwayforadistanceofatleast300mfromthatpoint,wheretheCode LetterisC,D,EorF; b) 2mabovethetaxiway,itwillbepossibletoseethewholesurfaceofthe taxiwayforadistanceofatleast200mfromthatpoint,wheretheCode LetterisB;and c) 1.5mabovethetaxiway,itwillbepossibletoseethewholesurfaceofthe taxiwayforadistanceofatleast150mfromthatpoint,wheretheCode LetterisA. 8.4.6.4 TransverseSlopes Thetransverseslopesofataxiwayshallbesufficienttopreventtheaccumulation ofwateronthesurfaceofthetaxiwaybutshallnotexceed: a) 1.5percentwheretheCodeLetterisC,D,EorF;and b) 2percentwheretheCodeLetterisAorB. 8.4.7 StrengthofTaxiways Thestrengthofataxiwayshallbeatleastequaltothatoftherunwayitserves, due consideration being given to the fact that a taxiway will be subjected to a greaterdensityoftrafficand,asaresultofslowmovingandstationaryaircraft,to higherstressesthantherunwayitserves. 8.4.8 8.4.8.1 SurfaceofTaxiways Thesurfaceofataxiwayshallnothaveirregularitiesthatcausedamagetoaircraft structures.

APP823

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX8 8.4.8.2 8.4.9 8.4.9.1 Thesurfaceofapavedtaxiwayshallbesoconstructedastoprovidegoodfriction characteristicswhenthetaxiwayiswet. RapidExitTaxiways Arapidexittaxiwayshallbedesignedwitharadiusofturnoffcurveofatleast: a) 550mwheretheCodeNumberis3or4;and b) 275mwheretheCodeNumberis1or2; toenableexitspeedsunderwetconditionsof: c) 93km/hwheretheCodeNumberis3or4;and d) 65km/hwheretheCodeNumberis1or2. 8.4.9.2 Theradiusofthefilletontheinsideofthecurveatarapidexittaxiwayshallbe sufficient to provide a widened taxiway throat in order to facilitate early recognitionoftheentranceandturnoffontothetaxiway. A rapid exit taxiway shall include a straight distance after the turnoff curve sufficient for an exiting aircraft to come to a full stop clear of any intersecting taxiway. Theintersectionangleofarapidexittaxiwaywiththerunwayshallnotbegreater than45norlessthan25andpreferablyshouldbe30. TaxiwaysonBridges The width of that portion of a taxiway bridge capable of supporting aircraft, as measured perpendicularly to the taxiway centre line, shall not be less than the widthofthegradedareaofthestripprovidedforthattaxiway,unlessaproven method oflateral restraint isprovidedwhichshallnotbehazardousfor aircraft forwhichthetaxiwayisintended. Accessshallbeprovidedtoallowrescueandfirefightingvehiclestointervenein bothdirectionswithinthespecifiedresponsetimetothelargestaircraftforwhich thetaxiwaybridgeisintended. Abridgeshallbeconstructedonastraightsectionofthetaxiwaywithastraight section on both ends of the bridge to facilitate the alignment of aircraft approachingthebridge. TAXIWAYSHOULDERS Straight portions of a taxiway where the Code Letter is C, D, E or F shall be providedwithshoulderswhichextendsymmetricallyoneachsideofthetaxiway sothattheoverallwidthofthetaxiwayanditsshouldersonstraightportionsis notlessthan: APP824

8.4.9.3

8.4.9.4 8.4.10 8.4.10.1

8.4.10.2

8.4.10.3

8.4.11 8.4.11.1

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX8 a) 60mwheretheCodeLetterisF b) 44mwheretheCodeLetterisE c) 38mwheretheCodeLetterisD d) 25mwheretheCodeLetterisC 8.4.11.2 Ontaxiwaycurvesandonjunctionsorintersectionswhereincreasedpavementis provided,theshoulderwidthshallbenotlessthanthatontheadjacentstraight portionsofthetaxiway. Whenataxiwayisintendedtobeusedbyturbineenginedaircraft,thesurfaceof thetaxiwayshouldershallbesopreparedastoresisterosionandtheingestionof thesurfacematerialbyaircraftengines. IfthetaxiwayisintendedtoservecodeFaircraftoranaircraftwithenginesthat overhangtheshoulders,theinnermost3metresshallbesealed. TAXIWAYSTRIPS General Ataxiway,otherthananaircraftstandtaxilane,shallbeincludedinastrip. 8.4.13 8.4.13.1 WIDTHOFTAXIWAYSTRIPS Ataxiwaystripshallextendsymmetricallyoneachsideofthecentrelineofthe taxiwaythroughoutthelengthofthetaxiwaytoatleast: a) 57.5mwheretheCodeLetterisF b) 47.5mwheretheCodeLetterisE c) 40.5mwheretheCodeLetterisD d) 26mwheretheCodeLetterisC e) 21.5mwheretheCodeLetterisB f) 16.25mwheretheCodeLetterisA 8.4.14 OBJECTSONTAXIWAYSTRIPS The taxiway strip shall provide an area clear of objects which may endanger taxiingaircraft. 8.4.15 GRADINGOFTAXIWAYSTRIPS The centre portion of a taxiway strip shall provide a graded area to a distance fromthecentrelineofthetaxiwayofatleast: APP825

8.4.11.3

8.4.11.4 8.4.12 8.4.12.1

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX8 a) 30mwheretheCodeLetterisF b) 22mwheretheCodeLetterisE; c) 19mwheretheCodeLetterisD d) 12.5mwheretheCodeLetterisBorC e) 11mwheretheCodeLetterisA 8.4.16 8.4.16.1 SLOPESONTAXIWAYSTRIPS Thesurface of thestrip shall be flush at the edge of the taxiway or shoulder, if provided, and the graded portion shall not have an upward transverse slope exceeding: a) 2.5percentforstripswheretheCodeLetterisC,D,EorF b) 3percentforstripsoftaxiwayswheretheCodeLetterisAorB theupwardslopebeingmeasuredwithreferencetothetransverseslopeofthe adjacenttaxiwaysurfaceandnotthehorizontal.Thedownwardtransverseslope shallnotexceed5percentmeasuredwithreferencetothehorizontal. 8.4.16.2 Thetransverseslopesonanyportionofataxiwaystripbeyondthattobegraded shouldnotexceedanupwardordownwardslopeof5percentasmeasuredinthe directionawayfromthetaxiway. HOLDINGBAYS,RUNWAYHOLDINGPOSITIONSANDINTERMEDIATEHOLDINGPOSITIONS General Holdingbay(s)shouldbeprovidedwhenthetrafficdensityismediumorheavy. Arunwayholdingpositionorpositionsshallbeestablished: a) onthetaxiway,attheintersectionofataxiwayandarunway;and b) at an intersection of a runway with another runway when the former runwayispartofastandardtaxiroute. 8.5.1.3 A runwayholding position shall be established on a taxiway if the location or alignmentofthetaxiwayissuchthatataxiingaircraftorvehiclecaninfringean obstacle limitation surface or interfere with the operation of radio navigation aids. AnIntermediateHoldingPositionshouldbeestablishedonataxiwayatanypoint other than a runwayholding position where it is desirable to define a specific holdinglimit.

8.5 8.5.1 8.5.1.1 8.5.1.2

8.5.1.4

APP826

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX8 8.5.1.5 8.5.2 8.5.2.1 A roadholding position shall be established at an intersection of a road with a runway. Location The distance between a holding bay, runwayholding position established at a taxiway/runway intersection or roadholding position and the centre line of a runwayshallbeinaccordancewithTableApp82and,inthecaseofaprecision approach runway, such that a holding aircraft or vehicle will not interfere with theoperationofradionavigationaids. Minimumdistancefromtherunwaycentrelinetoaholdingbay,runwayholding positionorroadholdingposition

8.5.2.2

TableApp82

8.5.2.3

If a holding bay, runwayholding position or roadholding position is at a lower elevation compared to the threshold, the distance may be decreased 5 m for everymetrethebayorholdingpositionislowerthanthethreshold,contingent uponnotinfringingtheInnerTransitionalSurface. This distance may need to be increased to avoid interference with radio navigationaids,particularlytheglidepathandlocalizerfacilities.Informationon critical and sensitive areas of ILS and MLS is contained in ICAO Annex 10 (AeronauticalCommunications),VolumeI,AttachmentsCandGrespectively. Note1:Thedistanceof90mfor CodeNumber 3 or4isbasedonan aircraft withatailheightof20m,adistancefromthenosetothehighestpartofthetail of 52.7 m and a nose height of 10 m holding at an angle of 45 or more with respecttotherunwaycentreline,beingclearoftheObstacleFreeZoneandnot accountableforthecalculationofOCA/H. Note2:Thedistanceof60mforCodeNumber2isbasedonanaircraftwitha tailheightof8m,adistancefromthenosetothehighestpartofthetailof24.6 mandanoseheightof5.2mholdingatanangleof45ormorewithrespectto therunwaycentreline,beingclearoftheObstacleFreeZone.

8.5.2.4

8.5.2.5

WheretheCodeLetterisF,thisdistanceshouldbe107.5m. APP827

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX8 Note:Thedistanceof107.5mforCodeNumber4wheretheCodeLetterisFis basedonanaircraftwithatailheightof24m,adistancefromthenosetothe highestpartofthetailof62.2mandanoseheightof10mholdingatanangle of 45 or more with respect to the runway centre line, being clear of the ObstacleFreeZone. 8.5.2.6 Ifaholdingbay,runwayholdingpositionorroadholdingpositionforaprecision approach runway Code Number 4 is at a greater elevation compared to the threshold,thedistanceof90mor107.5m,asappropriate,specifiedinTableApp 82shall be further increased5 mforeverymetrethebayorpositionishigher thanthethreshold. ThelocationofarunwayholdingpositionestablishedinaccordancewithClause 8.5.1.3 of this Appendix shall be such that a holding aircraft or vehicle will not infringe the Obstacle Free Zone, Approach Surface, Takeoff Climb Surface or ILS/MLScritical/sensitiveareaorinterferewiththeoperationofradionavigation aids. APRONS General Apronsshallbeprovidedtopermittheonandoffloadingofpassengers,cargo ormailaswellastheservicingofaircraftwithoutinterferingwiththeaerodrome traffic. 8.6.2 SizeofAprons The total apron area shall be adequate to permit expeditious handling of the aerodrometrafficatitsmaximumanticipateddensity. 8.6.3 StrengthofAprons Eachpartofanapronshallbecapableofwithstandingthetrafficoftheaircraftit isintendedtoserve,dueconsiderationbeinggiventothefactthatsomeportions oftheapronwillbesubjectedtoahigherdensityoftrafficand,asaresultofslow movingorstationaryaircraft,tohigherstressesthanarunway. 8.6.4 8.6.4.1 SlopesonAprons Slopes on an apron, including those on an aircraft stand taxilane, shall be sufficienttopreventaccumulationofwateronthesurfaceoftheapronandshall bekeptaslevelasdrainagerequirementspermit. Onanaircraftstandthemaximumslopeshallnotexceed1percent.

8.5.2.7

8.6 8.6.1

8.6.4.2

APP828

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX8 8.6.5 8.6.5.1 ClearanceDistancesonAircraftStands An aircraft stand shall provide the following minimum clearances between an aircraftusingthestandandaircraftonanotherstand,anyadjacentbuilding,and otherobjects: CodeLetter A B C D E F 8.6.5.2 Clearance 3m 3m 4.5m 7.5m 7.5m 7.5m

WheretheCodeLetterisD,EorF,theseclearancesmaybereducedatanosein aircraft stand provided with azimuth guidance by a visual docking guidance systemprovidedthattheaircraftstandisapowerinpushbackconfigurationand; undernocircumstancesshalltheclearancedistancesbelessthan: a) 7.5mbetweentwoadjacentaircraft; b) 2mbetweenanyfixedpassengerbridge,andthenoseofanaircraft;or c) 3.75mbetweenanyobject(excludingotheraircraft)andtheaircraftover any portion of the stand, provided that all obstacles are clear of the engineingestiondangerarea.

8.7 8.7.1

DECLAREDDISTANCES Aerodrome declared distances constitute the relevant distances for the application of the weight and performance requirements of the UAE Air NavigationRegulationsinrespectofaircraftflyingforthepurposeofAirService. ThedistancesareillustratedinFigureApp87ofthisAppendixandare: a) TakeoffRunAvailable(TORA).Thisisthelengthofrunwayavailableand suitableforthegroundrunofanaircrafttakingoff; b) AccelerateStopDistanceAvailable(ASDA).ThisisthelengthofTORAplus thelengthofanyassociatedstopway; c) Takeoff Distance Available (TODA). This is the length of TORA plus the lengthofanyassociatedclearway;and

APP829

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX8 d) Landing Distance Available (LDA). This is the length of runway available andsuitableforthegroundlandingrunofanaircraft. FigureApp87

8.7.2

The TORA, ASDA, TODA and LDA should be measured to the nearest meter for each paved and unpaved runway direction. For this purpose unpaved runways are to be marked. The distances are measured along the centre line of the runwayandofanyassociatedstopwayandclearway,andshouldbedeclaredby publicationintheAIPorinaNOTAM.Declareddistancesmaybereduceddueto obstacles or operational requirements. They may only be increased with the prioragreementoftheAuthority. IntersectionDepartureDeclaredDistances Declared distances from a runway intersection shall be calculated from the downwindedgeofthetaxiway.FigureApp88ofthisAppendixillustrateshowto determinetheoriginofintersectiondepartures. AerodromeOperatorsshallusethismethodtodeterminetheoriginoftheTake off RunAvailable,inordertomeasurethedistancesforintersectiondepartures accurately. Table App 83 illustrates how to format the information for submission to the ChiefAIPOfficer. AerodromeOperatorsshall ensuretheaccuracyofAIPcharts(2.21),sectionAD 2.13andsubmitchangestoChiefAISOfficer. Aerodrome Operators should liaise with their Aerodrome Inspector in order to notifyintersectiontakeoffdistancesintheAGAsectionoftheAIP.

8.7.3 8.7.3.1

8.7.3.2

8.7.3.3 8.7.3.4 8.7.3.5

APP830

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX8 8.7.3.6 8.7.3.7 8.7.3.8 AerodromeOperatorsshallissueaNOTAMtocovertheperioduptopublication oftherevisedAIPentryintheeventofnotbeingabletomeetanAIRACcycle. For each takeoff intersection departure, the Runway designator, Taxiway designatoralongwithTORA,TODAandASDAshallbepromulgatedwithinAIP. Where intersection departures are provided, information signs advising the available TORA shall be provided at each taxiway permitting a departure. The informationsignsmustbeinaccordancewithClause11.4ofAppendix11ofthese Regulations.SeeFigureApp119inAppendix11oftheseRegulations.

FigureApp88

APP831

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX8 TableApp83 DeclaredDistances Runway Designator 1 09L 27R 09R 27L 09L 09L 27R TORA (m) 2 3901 3884 3660 3660 3365 2840 3555 TODA (m) 3 3901 3961 3660 3660 3365 2840 3632 ASDA (m) 4 3901 3884 3660 3660 3365 2840 3555 LDA (m) 5 3595+ 3884 3353+ Remarks 6 +09Llandingthreshold displacedby306m +09Rlandingthreshold displacedby307m Takeofffromintersection withA12 Takeofffromintersection withA11 Takeofffromintersection withA4

APP832

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9

APPENDIX9 AERODROMELIGHTING 9.1 9.1.1 GENERAL LightswhichmayEndangertheSafetyofAircraft A nonaeronautical ground light near an aerodrome which might endanger the safetyofaircraftshallbeextinguished,screenedorotherwisemodifiedsoasto eliminatethesourceofdanger. 9.1.2 LaserEmissionswhichmayEndangertheSafetyofAircraft To protect the safety of aircraft against the hazardous effects of laser emitters, thefollowingprotectedzonesshallbeestablishedaroundaerodromes: a) alaserbeamfreeflightzone(LFFZ); b) alaserbeamcriticalflightzone(LCFZ);and c) alaserbeamsensitiveflightzone(LSFZ). 9.1.3 LightswhichmayCauseConfusion Anonaeronauticalgroundlightwhich,byreasonofitsintensity,configurationor colour, might prevent, or cause confusion in, the clear interpretation of aeronauticalgroundlightsshallbeextinguished,screenedorotherwisemodified soastoeliminatesuchapossibility.Inparticular,attentionshouldbedirectedto a nonaeronautical ground light visible from the air within the areas described hereunder: a) InstrumentRunwayCodeNumber4: withintheareasbeforethethresholdandbeyondtheendoftherunway extending at least 4500 m in length from the threshold and runway end and750meithersideoftheextendedrunwaycentrelineinwidth. b) InstrumentRunwayCodeNumber2or3: asina),exceptthatthelengthshouldbeatleast3000m. c) InstrumentRunwayCodeNumber1; andNonInstrumentRunway: withintheapproacharea.

APP91

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 9.1.4 ElevatedApproachLights Elevatedapproachlightsandtheirsupportingstructuresshallbefrangibleexcept that, in that portion of the approach lighting system beyond 300 m from the threshold: a) wheretheheightofasupportingstructureexceeds12m,thefrangibility requirementshallapplytothetop12monly;and b) whereasupportingstructureissurroundedbynonfrangibleobjects,only thatpartofthestructurethatextendsabovethesurroundingobjectsshall befrangible. 9.1.5 9.1.6 Whenanapproachlightfixtureorsupportingstructureisnotinitselfsufficiently conspicuous,itshallbesuitablymarked. ElevatedLights Elevatedrunway,stopwayandtaxiwaylightsshallbefrangible.Theirheightshall besufficientlylowtopreserveclearanceforpropellersandfortheenginepodsof jetaircraft. 9.1.7 SurfaceLights Lightfixturesinsetinthesurfaceofrunways,stopways,taxiwaysandapronsshall be so designed and fitted as to withstand being run over by the wheels of an aircraftwithoutdamageeithertotheaircraftortothelightsthemselves. 9.1.8 Thetemperatureproducedbyconductionorradiationattheinterfacebetween aninstalledinsetlightandanaircrafttireshouldnotexceed160Cduringa10 minuteperiodofexposure. LightIntensityandControl Theintensityofrunwaylightingshallbeadequatefortheminimumconditionsof visibility and ambient light in which use of the runway is intended, and compatiblewiththatofthenearestsectionoftheapproachlightingsystemwhen provided. 9.1.10 Where a highintensity lighting system is provided, a suitable intensity control shall be incorporated to allow for adjustment of the light intensity to meet the prevailingconditions.Separateintensitycontrolsorothersuitablemethodsshall be provided to ensure that the following systems, when installed, can be operatedatcompatibleintensities: a) approachlightingsystem; b) runwayedgelights; c) runwaythresholdlights; APP92

9.1.9

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 d) runwayendlights; e) runwaycentrelinelights; f) runwaytouchdownzonelights;and g) taxiwaycentrelinelights. 9.1.11 Ontheperimeterofandwithintheellipsedefiningthemainbeamasshownin Figure App 918 to App 927, the maximum light intensity value shall not be greater than three times the minimum light intensity value measured in accordancewiththisAppendix,collectivenotesforFigureApp918toApp928, Note2. Ontheperimeterofandwithintherectangledefiningthemainbeamasshown Figure App 929 to App 937, the maximum light intensity value shall not be greater than three times the minimum light intensity value measured in accordancewiththisAppendix,collectivenotesforFigureApp929toApp938, Note2. EMERGENCYLIGHTING Application Atanaerodromeprovidedwithrunwaylightingandwithoutasecondarypower supply,sufficientemergencylightsshallbeconvenientlyavailableforinstallation on at least the primary runway in the event of failure of the normal lighting system. 9.2.2 Location Wheninstalledonarunwaytheemergencylightsshall,asaminimum,conform totheconfigurationrequiredforanonInstrumentRunway. 9.2.3 Characteristics The colour of the emergency lights should conform to the colour requirements for runway lighting, except that, where the provision of coloured lights at the thresholdandtherunwayendisnotpracticable,alllightsmaybevariablewhite orasclosetovariablewhiteaspracticable. 9.3 9.3.1 AERONAUTICALBEACONS Application Where operationally necessary as determined by the Authority an aerodrome beaconoranidentificationbeaconshallbeprovidedateachaerodromeintended foruseatnight.

9.1.12

9.2 9.2.1

APP93

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 9.3.2 The operational requirement shall be determined having regard to the requirements of the air traffic using the aerodrome, the conspicuity of the aerodrome features in relation to its surroundings and the installation of other visualandnonvisualaidsusefulinlocatingtheaerodrome AerodromeBeacon An aerodrome beacon shall be provided at an aerodrome intended for use at nightifoneormoreofthefollowingconditionsexist: a) aircraftnavigatepredominantlybyvisualmeans; b) reducedvisibilitiesarefrequent;or c) it is difficult to locate the aerodrome from the air due to surrounding lightsorterrain. 9.3.4 Location The aerodrome beacon, where provided, shall be located on or adjacent to the aerodromeinanareaoflowambientbackgroundlighting. 9.3.5 9.3.6 The location of the beacon shall be such that the beacon is not shielded by objectsinsignificantdirectionsanddoesnotdazzleapilotapproachingtoland. Characteristics Theaerodromebeaconshallshoweithercolouredflashesalternatingwithwhite flashes,orwhiteflashesonly.Thefrequencyoftotalflashesshallbefrom20to 30 per minute. Where used, the coloured flashes emitted by beacons at land aerodromes shall be green and coloured flashes emitted by beacons at water aerodromes shall be yellow. In the case of a combined water and land aerodrome, coloured flashes, if used, shall have the colour characteristics of whicheversectionoftheaerodromeisdesignatedastheprincipalfacility. 9.3.7 Thelightfromthebeaconshallshowatallanglesofazimuth.Theverticallight distribution shall extend upwards from an elevation of not more than 1 to an elevation determined by the appropriate authority to be sufficient to provide guidanceatthemaximumelevationatwhichthebeaconisintendedtobeused andtheeffectiveintensityoftheflashshallbenotlessthan2000cd. IDENTIFICATIONBEACON Application Anidentificationbeaconshallbeprovidedatanaerodromewhichisintendedfor useatnightandcannotbeeasilyidentifiedfromtheairbyothermeans.

9.3.3

9.4 9.4.1

APP94

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 9.4.2 Location The identification beacon shall be located on the aerodrome in an area of low ambientbackgroundlighting. 9.4.3 9.4.4 The location of the beacon shall be such that the beacon is not shielded by objectsinsignificantdirectionsanddoesnotdazzleapilotapproachingtoland. Characteristics Anidentificationbeaconatalandaerodromeshallshowatallanglesofazimuth. Theverticallightdistributionshallextendupwardsfromanelevationofnotmore than1toanelevationdeterminedbytheappropriateauthoritytobesufficient toprovideguidanceatthemaximumelevationatwhichthebeaconisintendedto beusedandtheeffectiveintensityoftheflashshallbenotlessthan2000cd. 9.4.5 9.4.6 9.4.7 An identification beacon shall show flashinggreen at a land aerodrome and flashingyellowatawateraerodrome. The identification characters shall be transmitted in the International Morse Code. Thespeedoftransmissionshouldbebetweensixandeightwordsperminute,the corresponding range of duration of the Morse dots being from 0.15 to 0.2 secondsperdot. APPROACHLIGHTINGSYSTEMS Application a) NonInstrumentRunway Where physically practicable, a simple approach lighting system as specified in 9.5.2 should be provided to serve a nonInstrument Runway where the Code Number is 3 or 4 and intended for use at night, except when the runway is used only in conditions of good visibility, and sufficientguidanceisprovidedbyothervisualaids. b) NonPrecisionApproachRunway Where physically practicable, a simple approach lighting system as specified in 9.5.2 shall be provided to serve a nonprecision approach runway, except when the runway is used only in conditions of good visibilityorsufficientguidanceisprovidedbyothervisualaids. Note: It is advisable to give consideration of a Precision Approach Category1lightingsystem. c) PrecisionApproachRunwayCategoryI

9.5 9.5.1

APP95

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 Where physically practicable, a Precision Approach Category I lighting system as specified in 9.5.3 shall be provided to serve a Precision ApproachRunwayCategoryI. d) PrecisionApproachRunwayCategoriesIIandIII A Precision Approach Category II and III lighting system as specified in 9.5.4shallbeprovidedtoserveaPrecisionApproachRunwayCategoryII orIII. TableApp91 AeronauticalGroundLighting
Day or Night Operations App Cat II & III Equipment Aerodrome Beacon Approach CI C/L 5-bars Supplementary Simple Sequenced Strobe Approach Slope PAPI HI APAPI LI APAPI Runway HI edge, threshold, end LI edge, threshold, end HI C/L Touchdown Zone Stopway Taxiway Centre Line Edge Illuminated Signs Stop bars Runway Guard Obstacle Alternate Input Power Supply Illuminated Wind Sleeve R R R R R R R R R R R R R R O R R R R R R R O R R R R R R R R R R R O R R R R R O R O O R O R O O R O R R R R R R R R R O O R R O R R R O R R R R R R R R O R O R 2 2 2 R R R R O 1 O T/O RVR <400 App Cat I T/O RVR 400-800 App N/P Instrument T/O RVR 8001200 Night Only Operations App NonInstrument T/O >1200 Notes

Scale L1 R

Scale L2 R

Scale L3 R

Scale L4 -

R = Required, O = Operationally desirable, C/L Centre Line, HI = High Intensity, LI Low Intensity, NP Non Precision, App - Approach

Note1:Maynotberequiredwhereaerodromeusedbydayonlyandhighintensity runway edge lighting installed, or when used at night in good visibility, or when sufficientguidanceisprovidedbyothervisualaids. Note2:AllrunwaysusedforAirServiceshouldbeequippedwithPAPI.

APP96

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 9.5.2 9.5.2.1 SimpleApproachLightingSystem Location Asimpleapproachlightingsystemshallconsistofarowoflightsontheextended centre line of the runway extending, whenever possible, over a distance of not lessthan420mfromthethresholdwitharowoflightsformingacrossbar18m or30minlengthatadistanceof300mfromthethreshold. FigureApp91 SimpleApproachLightingSystem

9.5.2.2

The lights forming the crossbar shall be as nearly as practicable in a horizontal straightlineatrightanglesto,andbisectedby,thelineofthecentrelinelights. Thelightsofthecrossbarshallbespacedsoastoproducealineareffect,except that,whenacrossbarof30misused,gapsmaybeleftoneachsideofthecentre line.Thesegapsshallbekepttoaminimumtomeetlocalrequirementsandeach shallnotexceed6m. Thelightsformingthecentrelineshallbeplacedatlongitudinalintervalsof60m, exceptthat,whenitisdesiredtoimprovetheguidance,anintervalof30mmay be used. The innermost light shall be located either 60 m or 30 m from the threshold, depending on the longitudinal interval selected for the centre line lights. Ifitisnotphysicallypossibletoprovideacentrelineextendingforadistanceof 420mfromthethreshold,itshallextendtoatleast300msoastoincludethe crossbar. Subject to the approach system having a crossbar at 300 m from the threshold,anadditionalcrossbarmaybeprovidedat150mfromthethreshold. The system shall lie in the horizontal plane passing through the threshold, providedthat:

9.5.2.3

9.5.2.4

9.5.2.5

APP97

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 a) no object other than an ILS or MLS azimuth antenna shall protrude throughtheplaneoftheapproachlightswithinadistanceof60mfrom thecentrelineofthesystem;and b) nolightotherthanalightlocatedwithinthecentralpartofacrossbarora centre line barrette (not their extremities) shall be screened from an approachingaircraft. c) AnyILSorMLSazimuthantennaprotrudingthroughtheplaneofthelights shallbetreatedasanobstacleandmarkedandlightedaccordingly. 9.5.2.6 Characteristics Thelightsofasimpleapproachlightingsystemshallbefixedlightsandthecolour ofthelightsshallbesuchastoensurethatthesystemisreadilydistinguishable from other aeronautical ground lights, and from extraneous lighting if present. Eachcentrelinelightshallconsistofeither: a) asinglesource;or b) abarretteatleast3minlength. 9.5.2.7 WhereprovidedforanonInstrumentRunway,thelightsshallshowatallangles inazimuthnecessarytoapilotonbaselegandfinalapproach.Theintensityof the lights shall be adequate for all conditions of visibility and ambient light for whichthesystemhasbeenprovided. Whereprovidedforanonprecisionapproachrunway,thelightsshallshowatall angles in azimuth necessary to the pilot of an aircraft which on final approach doesnotdeviatebyanabnormalamountfromthepathdefinedbythenonvisual aid.Thelightsshallbedesignedtoprovideguidanceduringbothdayandnightin themostadverseconditionsofvisibilityandambientlightforwhichitisintended thatthesystemremainusable. PrecisionApproachCategoryILightingSystem Location APrecisionApproachCategoryIlightingsystemshallconsistofarowoflightson theextendedcentrelineoftherunwayextendingoveradistanceof900mfrom therunwaythresholdwitharowoflightsformingacrossbar30minlengthata distanceof300mfromtherunwaythreshold. 9.5.3.2 Thelightsformingthecrossbarshallbeinahorizontalstraightlineatrightangles to,andbisectedby,thelineofthecentrelinelights.Thelightsofthecrossbar shallbespacedsoastoproducealineareffect,exceptthatgapsmaybelefton eachsideofthecentreline.Thesegapsshallbekepttoaminimumtomeetlocal requirementsandeachshallnotexceed6m.

9.5.2.8

9.5.3 9.5.3.1

APP98

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 9.5.3.3 9.5.3.4 Thelightsformingthecentrelineshallbeplacedatlongitudinalintervalsof30m withtheinnermostlightlocated30mfromthethreshold. The system shall lie in the horizontal plane passing through the threshold, providedthat: a) no object other than an ILS or MLS azimuth antenna shall protrude throughtheplaneoftheapproachlightswithinadistanceof60mfrom thecentrelineofthesystem;and b) nolightotherthanalightlocatedwithinthecentralpartofacrossbarora centre line barrette (not their extremities) shall be screened from an approachingaircraft. 9.5.3.5 9.5.3.6 AnyILSorMLSazimuthantennaprotrudingthroughtheplaneofthelightsshall betreatedasanobstacleandmarkedandlightedaccordingly. Characteristics Theextendedcentreline andcrossbarlights ofaPrecisionApproachCategory I lightingsystemshallbefixedlightsshowingvariablewhite.Eachcentrelinelight positionshallconsistofeither: a) asinglelightsourceintheinnermost300mofthecentreline,twolight sourcesinthecentral300mofthecentrelineandthreelightsourcesin theouter300mofthecentrelinetoprovidedistanceinformation;or b) abarrette. 9.5.3.7 Wheretheserviceabilityleveloftheapproachlightsspecifiedasamaintenance objective in Chapter 4, Clause 4.15.13.4 of these Regulations can be demonstrated,eachcentrelinelightpositionmayconsistofeither: a) asinglelightsource;or b) abarrette. 9.5.3.8 The centre line barrettes shall be at least 4 m in length. When barrettes are composedoflightsapproximatingtopointsources,thelightsshallbeuniformly spacedatintervalsofnotmorethan1.5m. Ifthecentrelineconsistsofbarrettes,eachbarretteshouldbesupplementedby acapacitordischargelight,exceptwheresuchlightingisconsideredunnecessary by the Authority taking into account the characteristics of the system and the natureofthemeteorologicalconditions. Each capacitor discharge light shall be flashed twice a second in sequence, beginningwiththeoutermostlightandprogressingtowardthethresholdtothe innermost light of the system. The design of the electrical circuit shall be such

9.5.3.9

9.5.3.10

APP99

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 that these lights can be operated independently of the other lights of the approachlightingsystem. 9.5.3.11 Ifthecentrelineconsistsofasinglelightsource,additionalcrossbarsoflightsto the crossbar provided at 300 m from the threshold shall be provided at 150 m, 450m,600mand750mfromthethreshold.Thelightsformingeachcrossbar shouldbeinahorizontalstraightlineatrightanglesto,andbisectedby,theline of the centre line lights. The lights shall be spaced so as to produce a linear effect,exceptthatgapsmaybeleftoneachsideofthecentreline.Thesegaps shallbekepttoaminimumtomeetlocalrequirementsandeachshallnotexceed 6m. Wheretheadditionalcrossbarsareincorporatedinthesystem,theouterendsof thecrossbarsshalllieontwostraightlinesthateitherareparalleltothelineof the centre line lights or converge to meet the runway centre line 300 m from threshold. Thelightsshallbeinaccordancewiththespecificationsof,FigureApp917ofthis Appendix. PrecisionApproachCategoryIIandIIILightingSystem Location The approach lighting system shall consist of a row of lights on the extended centrelineoftherunway,extending,overadistanceof900mfromtherunway threshold.Inaddition,thesystemshallhavetwosiderowsoflights, extending 270 m from the threshold, and two crossbars, one at 150 m and one at 300 m fromthethreshold,allasshowninFigureApp91.Wheretheserviceabilitylevel of the approach lights specified as maintenance objectives in Chapter 4, Clause 4.15.13.4 of these Regulations can be demonstrated, the system may have two siderowsoflights,extending240mfromthethreshold,andtwocrossbars,one at150mandoneat300mfromthethreshold,allasshowninFigureApp92of thisAppendix.

9.5.3.12

9.5.3.13 9.5.4 9.5.4.1

APP910

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 FigureApp92 Inner300mApproachandRunwayLightingfor PrecisionApproachRunwaysCategoriesIIandIII

APP911

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 FigureApp93 Inner300mApproachandRunwayLightingforPrecisionApproachRunways CategoriesIIandIIIwheretheServiceabilityLevelsoftheLightsSpecifiedas MaintenanceObjectivesinChapter4oftheseRegulationscanbeDemonstrated

9.5.4.2

Thelightsformingthecentrelineshallbeplacedatlongitudinalintervalsof30m withtheinnermostlightslocated30mfromthethreshold.

APP912

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 9.5.4.3 Thelightsformingthesiderowsshallbeplacedoneachsideofthecentreline,at alongitudinalspacingequaltothatofthecentrelinelightsandwiththefirstlight located30mfromthethreshold.Wheretheserviceabilityleveloftheapproach lightsspecifiedasmaintenanceobjectivesinChapter4oftheseRegulationscan bedemonstrated,lightsformingthesiderowsmaybeplacedoneachsideofthe centreline,atalongitudinalspacingof60mwiththefirstlightlocated60mfrom thethreshold.Thelateralspacing(orgauge)betweentheinnermostlightsofthe siderowsshallbenotlessthan18mnormorethan22.5m,andpreferably18m, butinanyeventshallbeequaltothatofthetouchdownzonelights. Thecrossbarprovidedat150mfromthethresholdshallfillinthegapsbetween thecentrelineandsiderowlights. Thecrossbarprovidedat300mfromthethresholdshallextendonbothsidesof thecentrelinelightstoadistanceof15mfromthecentreline. Ifthecentrelinebeyondadistanceof300mfromthethresholdconsistsoflights as described in Clause 9.5.4.2 b) ii) or 9.5.4.2 c) ii) of this Appendix, additional crossbars of lights shall be provided at 450 m, 600 m and 750 m from the threshold. Wheretheadditionalcrossbarsareincorporatedinthesystem,theouterendsof thesecrossbarsshalllieontwostraightlinesthateitherareparalleltothecentre lineorconvergetomeettherunwaycentreline300mfromthethreshold. The system shall lie as nearly as practicable in the horizontal plane passing throughthethreshold,providedthat: a) no object other than an ILS or MLS azimuth antenna shall protrude throughtheplaneoftheapproachlightswithinadistanceof60mfrom thecentrelineofthesystem;and b) nolightotherthanalightlocatedwithinthecentralpartofacrossbarora centre line barrette (not their extremities) shall be screened from an approachingaircraft. 9.5.4.9 9.5.4.10 AnyILSorMLSazimuthantennaprotrudingthroughtheplaneofthelightsshall betreatedasanobstacleandmarkedandlightedaccordingly. Characteristics ThecentrelineofaPrecisionApproachCategoryIIandIIIlightingsystemforthe first300mfromthethresholdshallconsistofbarrettesshowingvariablewhite, exceptthat,wherethethresholdisdisplaced300mormore,thecentrelinemay consist of single light sources showing variable white. Where the serviceability level of the approach lights specified as maintenance objectives in Chapter 4, Clause4.15.13.4oftheseRegulationscanbedemonstrated,thecentrelineofa PrecisionApproachCategoryIIandIIIlightingsystemforthefirst300mfromthe thresholdmayconsistofeither: APP913

9.5.4.4 9.5.4.5 9.5.4.6

9.5.4.7

9.5.4.8

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 a) barrettes, where the centre line beyond 300 m from the threshold consistsofbarrettesasdescribedin9.4.31a);or b) alternatesinglelightsourcesandbarrettes,wherethecentrelinebeyond 300mfromthethresholdconsistsofsinglelightsourcesasdescribedin 9.4.31 b), with the innermost single light source located 30 m and the innermostbarrettelocated60mfromthethreshold;or c) singlelightsourceswherethethresholdisdisplaced300mormore allofwhichshallshowvariablewhite. 9.5.4.11 Beyond300mfromthethresholdeachcentrelinelightpositionshallconsistof either: a) abarretteasusedontheinner300m;or b) two light sources in the central 300 m of the centre line and three light sourcesintheouter300mofthecentreline allofwhichshallshowvariablewhite. 9.5.4.12 Where the serviceability level of the approach lights specified as maintenance objectives in Chapter 4, Clause 4.15.13.4 of these Regulations can be demonstrated,beyond 300mfromthethresholdeachcentrelinelightposition mayconsistofeither: a) abarrette;or b) asinglelightsource allofwhichshallshowvariablewhite. 9.5.4.13 The barrettesshall beat least 4 m in length. When barrettesarecomposed of lights approximating to point sources, the lights shall be uniformly spaced at intervalsofnotmorethan1.5m. If the centre line beyond 300 m from the threshold consists of barrettes, each barrette beyond 300 m should be supplemented by a capacitor discharge light, except where such lighting is considered unnecessary taking into account the characteristicsofthesystemandthenatureofthemeteorologicalconditions. Each capacitor discharge light shall be flashed twice a second in sequence, beginningwiththeoutermostlightandprogressingtowardthethresholdtothe innermostlightofthesystem.(SeeFigureApp93)Thedesignoftheelectrical circuitshallbesuchthattheselightscanbeoperatedindependentlyoftheother lightsoftheapproachlightingsystem.

9.5.4.14

9.5.4.15

APP914

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 FigureApp94 CapacitorDischargeLightingSystem

9.5.4.16

Theobjectiveistoprovideacontinuousripplealongthelengthoftheextended centreline.Thedurationofeachdischargeshouldnotexceed200milliseconds and the next discharge in sequenceshould commence within 1.2 second of the initiation of the previous discharge. Adjustment to the discharge duration and trigger rate should be made in order to achieve the optimum ripple effect withoutanybreaks. Thestrobeapproachlightsshallbeindependentlyswitchedfromtherestofthe AGL. The side row shall consist of barrettes showing red. The length of a side row barrette and the spacing of its lights shall be equal to those of the touchdown zonelightbarrettes. Thelightsformingthecrossbarsshallbefixedlightsshowingvariablewhite.The lightsshallbeuniformlyspacedatintervalsofnotmorethan2.7m. Theintensityoftheredlightsshallbecompatiblewiththeintensityofthewhite lights. ThelightsshallbeinaccordancewiththespecificationsofFigureApp917toApp 918ofthisAppendix. VISUALAPPROACHSLOPEINDICATORSYSTEMS Application Avisualapproachslopeindicatorsystemshallbeprovidedtoservetheapproach toarunwaywhetherornottherunwayisservedbyothervisualapproachaidsor bynonvisualaids,whereoneormoreofthefollowingconditionsexist:

9.5.4.17 9.5.4.18

9.5.4.19 9.5.4.20 9.5.4.21 9.6 9.6.1 9.6.1.1

APP915

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 a) the runway is used by turbojet or other aircraft with similar approach guidancerequirements; b) thepilotofanytypeofaircraftmayhavedifficultyinjudgingtheapproach dueto: i) inadequatevisualguidancesuchasisexperiencedduringanapproach overwaterorfeaturelessterrainbydayorintheabsenceofsufficient extraneouslightsintheapproachareabynight,or ii) misleadinginformationsuchasisproducedbydeceptivesurrounding terrainorrunwayslopes; c) thepresenceofobjectsintheapproachareamayinvolveserioushazardif anaircraftdescendsbelowthenormalapproachpath,particularlyifthere arenononvisualorothervisualaidstogivewarningofsuchobjects; d) physicalconditionsateitherendoftherunwaypresentaserioushazardin theeventofanaircraftundershootingoroverrunningtherunway;and e) terrain or prevalent meteorological conditions are such that the aircraft maybesubjectedtounusualturbulenceduringapproach. 9.6.1.2 The standard visual approach slope indicator systems shall consist of either the following: a) TVASIS and ATVASIS conforming to the specifications contained in this Appendix; b) PAPIandAPAPIsystemsconformingtothespecificationscontainedinthis Appendix; asshowninFigureApp95ofthisAppendix.

APP916

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 FigureApp95 VisualApproachSlopeIndicatorSystems

9.6.1.3 9.6.1.4

Avisualslopeindicatorsystemshallbeprovidedatallcertifiedaerodromeswhen oneormoreoftheconditionsspecifiedin9.5.1exist. Wherearunwaythresholdistemporarilydisplacedfromthenormalpositionand oneormoreoftheconditionsspecifiedin9.5.1exist,aPAPIshouldbeprovided exceptthatwheretheCodeNumberis1or2anAPAPImaybeprovided. TVASISandATVASIS DuetothelackofusagebothgloballyandwithintheUAE,detailofthesesystems hasbeenwithdrawn.ShouldanAerodromeOperatorwishtoutilisethissystem theyshouldcontacttheAuthorityforguidance.

9.6.2

9.6.3 9.6.3.1

PAPIandAPAPI Description The PAPI system shall consist of awing bar of 4 sharp transition multilamp (or pairedsinglelamp)unitsequallyspaced.Thesystemshallbelocatedontheleft sideoftherunwayunlessitisphysicallyimpracticabletodoso.

9.6.3.2

TheAPAPIsystemshallconsistofawingbarof2sharptransitionmultilamp(or paired single lamp) units. The system shall be located on the left side of the runwayunlessitisphysicallyimpracticabletodoso. ThewingbarofaPAPIshallbeconstructedandarrangedinsuchamannerthata pilotmakinganapproachwill:

9.6.3.3

APP917

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 a) when on or close to the approach slope, see the two units nearest the runwayasredandthetwounitsfarthestfromtherunwayaswhite; b) whenabovetheapproachslope,seetheoneunitnearesttherunwayas red and the three units farthest from the runway as white; and when furtherabovetheapproachslope,seealltheunitsaswhite;and c) whenbelowtheapproachslope,seethethreeunitsnearesttherunway asredandtheunitfarthestfromtherunwayaswhite;andwhenfurther belowtheapproachslope,seealltheunitsasred. 9.6.3.4 The wing bar of an APAPI shall be constructed and arranged in such a manner thatapilotmakinganapproachwill: d) whenonorclosetotheapproachslope,seetheunitnearertherunwayas redandtheunitfartherfromtherunwayaswhite; e) whenabovetheapproachslope,seeboththeunitsaswhite;and f) whenbelowtheapproachslope,seeboththeunitsasred. 9.6.3.5 Siting ThelightunitsshallbelocatedasinthebasicconfigurationillustratedinFigure App96,subjecttotheinstallationtolerancesgiventherein.Theunitsforminga wingbarshallbemountedsoastoappeartothepilotofanapproachingaircraft tobesubstantiallyinahorizontalline.Thelightunitsshallbemountedaslowas possibleandshallbefrangible.

APP918

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 FigureApp96 SitingofPAPIandAPAPI

9.6.3.6

InstallationTolerances WhereaPAPIorAPAPIisinstalledonarunwaynotequippedwithanILSorMLS, the distance D1 shall be calculated to ensure that the lowest height at which a pilot will see a correct approach path indication (Figure App 97, angle B for a PAPIandangleAforanAPAPI)providesthewheelclearanceoverthethreshold specified in Table App 91 for the most demanding amongst aircraft regularly usingtherunway.

9.6.3.7

WhereaPAPIorAPAPIisinstalledonarunwayequippedwithanILSand/orMLS, the distance D1 shall be calculated to provide the optimum compatibility betweenthevisualandnonvisualaidsfortherangeofeyetoantennaheightsof the aircraft regularly using the runway. The distance shall be equal to that between the threshold and the effective origin of the ILS glide path or MLS minimumglidepath,asappropriate,plusacorrectionfactorforthevariationof eyetoantenna heights of the aircraft concerned. The correction factor is obtained by multiplying the average eyetoantenna height of those aircraft by thecotangentoftheapproachangle.However,thedistanceshallbesuchthatin nocasewillthewheelclearanceoverthethresholdbelowerthanthatspecified incolumn(3)ofTableApp91. Note: See Section 5.2.5 for specifications on aiming point marking. Guidance on the harmonization of PAPI, ILS and/or MLS signals is contained in the AerodromeDesignManual(ICAODoc9157),Part4.

9.6.3.8

Ifawheelclearance,greaterthanthatspecifiedina)aboveisrequiredforspecific aircraft,thiscanbeachievedbyincreasingD1. APP919

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 9.6.3.9 9.6.3.10 DistanceD1shallbeadjustedtocompensatefordifferencesinelevationbetween thelenscentresofthelightunitsandthethreshold. To ensure that units are mounted as low as possible and to allow for any transverse slope, small height adjustments of up to 5 cm between units are acceptable. A lateral gradient not greater that 1.25 percent can be accepted provideditisuniformlyappliedacrosstheunits. Aspacingof6m(1m)betweenPAPIunitsshouldbeusedonCodeNumbers1 and2.Insuchanevent,theinnerPAPIunitshallbelocatednotlessthan10m(1 m)fromtherunwayedge. Note:Reducingthespacingbetweenlightunitsresultsinareductioninusable rangeofthesystem. 9.6.3.12 The lateral spacing between APAPI units may be increased to 9 m (1 m) if greaterrangeisrequiredorlaterconversiontoafullPAPIisanticipated.Inthe latter case, the inner APAPI unit shall be located 15 m (1 m) from the runway edge. CharacteristicsoftheLightUnits Thesystemshallbesuitableforbothdayandnightoperations. 9.6.3.14 Thecolour transition from red to white in thevertical planeshall besuch as to appear to an observer, at a distance of not less than 300 m, to occur within a verticalangleofnotmorethan3'. AtfullintensitytheredlightshallhaveaYcoordinatenotexceeding0.320. ThelightintensitydistributionofthelightunitsshallbeasshowninFigureApp9 39ofthisAppendix Suitableintensitycontrolshallbeprovidedsoastoallowadjustmenttomeetthe prevailingconditionsandtoavoiddazzlingthepilotduringapproachandlanding. Eachlightunitshallbecapableofadjustmentinelevationsothatthelowerlimit of the white part of the beam may be fixed at any desired angle of elevation between130'andatleast430'abovethehorizontal. The light units shall be so designed that deposits of condensation, dirt, etc., on optically transmitting or reflecting surfaces shall interfere to the least possible extentwiththelightsignalsandshallnotaffectthecontrastbetweentheredand whitesignalsandtheelevationofthetransitionsector. ApproachSlopeandElevationSettingofLightUnits The approach slope as defined in Figure App 97 of this Appendix shall be appropriateforusebytheaircraftusingtheapproach.

9.6.3.11

9.6.3.13

9.6.3.15 9.6.3.16 9.6.3.17 9.6.3.18

9.6.3.19

9.6.3.20

APP920

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 9.6.3.21 WhentherunwayisequippedwithanILSand/orMLS,thesitingandtheangleof elevationofthelightunitsshallbesuchthatthevisualapproachslopeconforms as closely as possible with the glide path of the ILS and/or the minimum glide pathoftheMLS,asappropriate. TheangleofelevationsettingsofthelightunitsinaPAPIwingbarshallbesuch that,duringanapproach,thepilotofanaircraftobservingasignalofonewhite andthreeredswillclearallobjectsintheapproachareabyasafemargin. The angle of elevation settings of the light units in an APAPI wing bar shall be such that, during an approach, the pilot of an aircraft observing the lowest onslopesignal, i.e.onewhiteandonered,willclearallobjectsintheapproach areabyasafemargin. Theazimuthspreadofthelightbeamshallbesuitablyrestrictedwhereanobject locatedoutsidetheobstacleprotectionsurfaceofthePAPIorAPAPIsystem,but withinthelaterallimitsofitslightbeam,isfoundtoextendabovetheplaneof the obstacle protection surface and an Aeronautical Study indicates that the object could adversely affect the safety of operations. The extent of the restrictionshallbesuchthattheobjectremainsoutsidetheconfinesofthelight beam. Where wing bars are installed on each side of the runway to provide roll guidance,correspondingunitsshallbesetatthesameanglesothatthesignalsof eachwingbarchangesymmetricallyatthesametime. ObstacleProtectionSurface Anobstacleprotectionsurfaceshallbeestablishedwhenitisintendedtoprovide avisualapproachslopeindicatorsystem. 9.6.3.27 The characteristics of the obstacle protection surface, i.e. origin, divergence, length and slope shall correspond to those specified in the relevant column of TableApp92andinFigureApp98. New objects or extensions of existing objects shall not be permitted above an obstacleprotectionsurfaceexceptwhen,intheopinionoftheAuthority,thenew objectorextensionwouldbeshieldedbyanexistingimmovableobject. Existing objects above an obstacle protection surface shall be removed except when, in the opinion of the appropriate authority, the object is shielded by an existing immovable object, or after an Aeronautical Study it is determined that theobjectwouldnotadverselyaffectthesafetyofoperationsofaircraft. WhereanAeronauticalStudyindicatesthatanexistingobjectextendingabovean obstacle protection surface could adversely affect the safety of operations of aircraftoneormoreofthefollowingmeasuresshallbetaken: a) suitablyraisetheapproachslopeofthesystem;

9.6.3.22

9.6.3.23

9.6.3.24

9.6.3.25

9.6.3.26

9.6.3.28

9.6.3.29

9.6.3.30

APP921

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 b) reducetheazimuthspreadofthesystemsothattheobjectisoutsidethe confinesofthebeam; c) displace the axis of the system and its associated obstacle protection surfacebynomorethan5; d) suitablydisplacethethreshold;and e) where d) is found to be impracticable, suitably displace the system upwind of the threshold to provide an increase in threshold crossing heightequaltotheheightoftheobjectpenetration. FigureApp97 LightBeamsandAngleofElevationSettingofPAPIandAPAPI

APP922

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 FigureApp98 WheelClearanceOverThresholdforPAPIandAPAPI

FigureApp99 DimensionsandSlopesoftheObstacleProtectionSurface

Note:Referenceinnoted.ofthediagramisincorrect.CorrectreferenceisFigure 97ofthisAppendix.

APP923

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 FigureApp910 ObstacleProtectionSurfaceforVisualApproachSlopeIndicatorSystems

Note:ReferencetoTable5.3inthediagramisincorrect.Correctreferenceis TableApp91ofthisAppendix. 9.7 9.7.1 CIRCLINGGUIDANCELIGHTS Application Circling guidance lightsshould be provided when existingapproach and runway lightingsystems do notsatisfactorily permit identification of therunway and/or approachareatoacirclingaircraftintheconditionsforwhichitisintendedthe runwaybeusedforcirclingapproaches. 9.7.2 Location The location and number of circling guidance lights when provided shall be adequatetoenableapilot,asappropriate,to: a) join the downwind leg or align and adjust the aircrafts track to the runwayatarequireddistancefromitandtodistinguishthethresholdin passing;and

APP924

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 b) keepinsighttherunwaythresholdand/orotherfeatureswhichwillmake itpossibletojudgetheturnontobaselegandfinalapproach,takinginto accounttheguidanceprovidedbyothervisualaids. 9.7.3 Circlingguidancelightswhenprovidedshallconsistof a) lights indicating the extended centre line of the runway and/or parts of anyapproachlightingsystem;or b) lightsindicatingthepositionoftherunwaythreshold;or c) lightsindicatingthedirectionorlocationoftherunway; or a combination of such lights as is appropriate to the runway under consideration. 9.7.4 Characteristic Circlingguidancelightsshallbefixedorflashinglightsofanintensityandbeam spread adequate for the conditions of visibility and ambient light in which it is intended to make visual circling approaches. The flashing lights shall be white, andthesteadylightseitherwhiteorgaseousdischargelights. 9.7.5 9.8 9.8.1 Thelightsshallbedesignedandbeinstalledinsuchamannerthattheywillnot dazzleorconfuseapilotwhenapproachingtoland,takingoffortaxiing. RUNWAYLEADINLIGHTINGSYSTEMS Application A runway leadin lighting system should be provided where it is desired to provide visual guidance along a specific approach path, for reasons such as avoidinghazardousterrainorforpurposesofnoiseabatement. 9.8.2 Location Arunwayleadinlightingsystemwhenprovidedshallconsistofgroupsoflights positionedsoastodefinethedesiredapproachpathandsothatonegroupmay be sighted from the preceding group. The interval between adjacent groups shouldnotexceedapproximately1600m. 9.8.3 A runway leadin lighting system shall when provided extend from a point as determinedbytheAuthority,uptoapointwheretheapproachlightingsystem,if provided,ortherunwayortherunwaylightingsystemisinview. Characteristics Each group of lights of a runway leadin lighting system shall consist of at least three flashing lights in a linear or cluster configuration. The system may be

9.8.4

APP925

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 augmentedbysteadyburninglightswheresuchlightswouldassistinidentifying thesystem. 9.8.5 9.8.6 9.9 9.9.1 Theflashinglightsshallbewhite,andthesteadyburninglightsgaseousdischarge lights. Theflashinglightsineachgroupshallflashinsequencetowardstherunway. RUNWAYTHRESHOLDIDENTIFICATIONLIGHTS Application Runwaythresholdidentificationlightsshallbeinstalled: a) at the threshold of a nonprecision approach runway when additional thresholdconspicuityisnecessaryorwhereitisnotpracticabletoprovide otherapproachlightingaids;and b) where a runway threshold is permanently displaced from the runway extremity or temporarily displaced from the normal position and additionalthresholdconspicuityisnecessary. 9.9.2 Location Runway threshold identification lights shall be located symmetrically about the runway centre line, in line with the threshold and approximately 10 m outside eachlineofrunwayedgelights. 9.9.3 Characteristics Runway threshold identification lights shall be flashing white lights with a flash frequencybetween60and120perminute. 9.9.4 9.10 9.10.1 Thelightsshallbevisibleonlyinthedirectionofapproachtotherunway. RUNWAYEDGELIGHTS Application Runwayedgelightsshallbeprovidedforarunwayintendedforuseatnightorfor aprecisionapproachrunwayintendedforusebydayornight. 9.10.2 9.10.3 Runwayedgelightsshouldbeprovidedonarunwayintendedfortakeoffwithan operatingminimumbelowanRVRof800mbyday. Location Runwayedgelightsshallbeplacedalongthefulllengthoftherunwayandshall beintwoparallelrowsequidistantfromthecentreline.

APP926

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 9.10.4 Runwayedgelightsshallbeplacedalongtheedgesoftheareadeclaredforuse astherunwayoroutsidetheedgesoftheareaatadistanceofnotmorethan3 m. Wherethewidthoftheareawhichcouldbedeclaredasrunwayexceeds60m, the distance between the rows of lights shall be determined by the Authority taking into account the nature of the operations, the light distribution characteristics of the runway edge lights, and other visual aids serving the runway. Thelightsshallbeuniformlyspacedinrowsatintervalsofnotmorethan60mfor an Instrument Runway, and at intervals of not more than 100 m for a non InstrumentRunway.Thelightsonoppositesidesoftherunwayaxisshallbeon linesatrightanglestothataxis.Atintersectionsofrunways,lightsmaybespaced irregularlyoromitted,providedthatadequateguidanceremainsavailabletothe pilot. Characteristics Runwayedgelightsshallbefixedlightsshowingvariablewhite,exceptthat: a) inthecaseofadisplacedthreshold,thelightsbetweenthebeginningof the runway and the displaced threshold shall show red in the approach direction;and b) asectionofthelights600moronethirdoftherunwaylength,whichever is the less, at the remote end of the runway from the end at which the takeoffrunisstarted,mayshowyellow. 9.10.8 Therunwayedgelightsshallshowat allanglesinazimuthnecessaryto provide guidance to a pilot landing or taking off in either direction. When the runway edgelightsareintendedtoprovidecirclingguidance,theyshallshowatallangles inazimuth. Inallanglesofazimuthrequiredin9.9.8,runwayedgelightsshallshowatangles up to 15 above the horizontal with an intensity adequate for the conditions of visibility and ambient light in which use of the runway for takeoff orlandingis intended. In any case, the intensity shall be at least 50 cd except that at an aerodromewithoutextraneouslightingtheintensityofthelightsmaybereduced tonotlessthan25cdtoavoiddazzlingthepilot. Runwayedgelightsonaprecisionapproachrunwayshallbeinaccordancewith thespecificationsofFigureApp925orApp926ofthisAppendix. RUNWAYTHRESHOLDANDWINGBARLIGHTS (seeFigureApp911ofthisAppendix)

9.10.5

9.10.6

9.10.7

9.10.9

9.10.10 9.11

APP927

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 9.11.1 ApplicationofRunwayThresholdLights Runway threshold lights shall be provided for a runway equipped with runway edgelightsexceptonanoninstrumentornonprecisionapproachrunwaywhere thethresholdisdisplacedandwingbarlightsareprovided. 9.11.2 LocationofRunwayThresholdLights When a threshold is at the extremity of a runway, the threshold lights shall be placedinarowatrightanglestotherunwayaxisasneartotheextremityofthe runwayaspossibleand,inanycase,notmorethan3moutsidetheextremity. 9.11.3 When a threshold is displaced from the extremity of a runway, threshold lights shall be placed in a row at right angles to the runway axis at the displaced threshold. Thresholdlightingshallconsistof: a) onanoninstrumentornonprecisionapproachrunway,atleastsixlights; b) onaPrecisionApproachRunwayCategoryI,atleastthenumberoflights thatwouldberequiredifthelightswereuniformlyspacedatintervalsof3 mbetweentherowsofrunwayedgelights;and c) onaPrecisionApproachRunwayCategoryIIorIII,lightsuniformlyspaced betweentherowsofrunwayedgelightsatintervalsofnotmorethan3m. 9.11.5 ThelightsprescribedinClause9.11.4a)andb)shouldbeeither: a) equallyspacedbetweentherowsofrunwayedgelights,or b) symmetricallydisposedabouttherunwaycentrelineintwogroups,with the lights uniformly spaced in each group and with a gap between the groups equal to the gauge of the touchdown zone marking or lighting, where such is provided, or otherwise not more than half the distance betweentherowsofrunwayedgelights. 9.11.6 ApplicationofWingBarLights Wing bar lights should be provided on a precision approach runway when additionalconspicuityisconsidereddesirable. 9.11.7 Wingbarlightsshallbeprovidedonanoninstrumentornonprecisionapproach runway where the threshold is displaced and runway threshold lights are required,butarenotprovided. LocationofWingBarLights Wingbarlightsshallbesymmetricallydisposedabouttherunwaycentrelineat thethresholdintwogroups,i.e.wingbars.Eachwingbarshallbeformedbyat APP928

9.11.4

9.11.8

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 leastfivelightsextendingatleast10moutwardfrom,andatrightanglesto,the lineoftherunwayedge lights,withtheinnermost lightofeachwingbar inthe lineoftherunwayedgelights. 9.11.9 CharacteristicsofRunwayThresholdandWingBarLights Runwaythresholdandwingbarlightsshallbefixedunidirectionallightsshowing greeninthedirectionofapproachtotherunway.Theintensityandbeamspread ofthelightsshallbeadequatefortheconditionsofvisibilityandambientlightin whichuseoftherunwayisintended. 9.11.10 9.11.11 9.12 Runwaythreshold lightson aprecisionapproachrunwayshall be inaccordance withthespecificationsof,FigureApp919ofthisAppendix. Thresholdwingbarlightsonaprecisionapproachrunwayshallbeinaccordance withthespecificationsof,FigureApp920ofthisAppendix. RUNWAYENDLIGHTS (seeFigureApp911ofthisAppendix) 9.12.1 Application Runway end lights shall be provided for a runway equipped with runway edge lights. 9.12.2 Location Runwayendlightsshallbeplacedonalineatrightanglestotherunwayaxisas neartotheendoftherunway aspossibleand,inany case, notmorethan3m outsidetheend. 9.12.3 Runwayendlightingshallconsistofatleastsixlights.Thelightsshouldbeeither: a) equallyspacedbetweentherowsofrunwayedgelights,or b) symmetricallydisposedabouttherunwaycentrelineintwogroupswith the lights uniformly spaced in each group and with a gap between the groups of not more than half the distance between the rows of runway edgelights. c) For a Precision Approach Runway Category III, the spacing between runway end lights, except between the two innermost lights if a gap is used,shallnotexceed6m. Note:Lightingcircuitryshallbesuchthatthefailureofonelightingcircuitwill notresultinthenumberofworkingrunwayendlightsbeinglessthansix.

APP929

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 9.12.4 Characteristics Runwayendlightsshallbefixedunidirectionallightsshowingredinthedirection oftherunway.Theintensityandbeamspreadofthelightsshallbeadequatefor the conditions of visibility and ambient light in which use of the runway is intended. 9.12.5 Runway end lights on a precision approach runway shall be in accordance with thespecificationsofFigureApp924ofthisAppendix.

APP930

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 FigureApp911 ArrangementofRunwayThresholdandRunwayEndLights

APP931

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 FigureApp912 ExampleofApproachandRunwayLightingforRunwaywithDisplaced Thresholds

APP932

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 9.13 9.13.1 RUNWAYCENTRELINELIGHTS Application Runway centre line lights shall be provided on a Precision Approach Runway CategoryIIorIII. 9.13.2 Runway centre line lights shall be provided on a Precision Approach Runway CategoryIwhentherunwayisusedbyaircraftwithhighlandingspeedsorwhere the width, as measured perpendicular to the runway centre line, between the runwayedgelightsisgreaterthan50m. Runwaycentrelinelightsshallbeprovidedonarunwayintendedtobeusedfor takeoffwithanoperatingminimumbelowanRVRof400m. Runwaycentrelinelightsshallbeprovidedonarunwayintendedtobeusedfor takeoffwithanoperatingminimumofanRVRof400morhigherwhenusedby aircraft with a very high takeoff speed, or where the width, as measured perpendicular to the runway centre line, between the runway edge lights is greaterthan50m. Location Runway centre line lights shall be located along the centre line of the runway, except that the lights may be uniformly offset to the same side of the runway centre line by not more than 60 cm where it is not practicable to locate them alongthecentreline.Thelightsshallbelocatedfromthethresholdtotheendat longitudinalspacingofapproximately15m.Wheretheserviceabilitylevelofthe runway centre line lights specified as maintenance objectives in Chapter 4 of these Regulations can be demonstrated and the runway is intended for use in Runway Visual Range conditions of 300 m or greater, the longitudinal spacing maybeapproximately30m. 9.13.6 Centrelineguidancefortakeofffromthebeginningofarunwaytoadisplaced thresholdshouldbeprovidedby: a) an approach lighting system if its characteristics and intensity settings afford the guidance required during takeoff and it does not dazzle the pilotofanaircrafttakingoff;or b) runwaycentrelinelights;or c) barrettesofatleast3mlengthandspacedatuniformintervalsof30m, as shown in Figure App 910, designed so that their photometric characteristics and intensity setting afford the guidance required during takeoffwithoutdazzlingthepilotofanaircrafttakingoff. 9.13.7 Wherenecessary,provisionshouldbemadetoextinguishthosecentrelinelights specifiedinb)orresettheintensityoftheapproachlightingsystemorbarrettes

9.13.3 9.13.4

9.13.5

APP933

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 when the runway is being used for landing. In no case should only the single source runway centre line lights show from the beginning of the runway to a displacedthresholdwhentherunwayisbeingusedforlanding. 9.13.8 Characteristics Runway centre line lights shall be fixed lights showing variable white from the threshold to the point 900 m from the runway end; alternate red and variable white from 900 m to 300 m from the runway end; and red from 300 m to the runwayend,exceptthatforrunwayslessthan1 800 minlength,thealternate red and variable white lights shall extend from the midpoint of the runway usableforlandingto300mfromtherunwayend. 9.13.9 9.14 9.14.1 RunwaycentrelinelightsshallbeinaccordancewiththespecificationsofFigure App922orApp923oftheseRegulations. RUNWAYTOUCHDOWNZONELIGHTS Application Touchdown zone lights shall be provided in the touchdown zone of a Precision ApproachRunwayCategoryIIorIII. Note:FurtherguidanceisgivenwithinFigureApp91andFigureApp92. 9.14.2 Location Touchdownzonelightsshallextendfromthethresholdforalongitudinaldistance of900m,exceptthat,onrunwayslessthan1800minlength,thesystemshallbe shortened so that it does not extend beyond the midpoint of the runway. The pattern shall be formed by pairs of barrettes symmetrically located about the runwaycentreline.Thelateralspacingbetweentheinnermostlightsofapairof barrettes shall be equal to the lateral spacing selected for the touchdown zone marking.Thelongitudinalspacingbetweenpairsofbarrettesshallbeeither30m or60m. 9.14.3 Characteristics Abarretteshallbecomposedofatleastthreelightswithaspacingbetweenthe lightsofnotmorethan1.5m. 9.14.4 9.14.5 9.14.6 Abarretteshallbenotlessthan3mormorethan4.5minlength. Touchdownzonelightsshallbefixedunidirectionallightsshowingvariablewhite. Touchdown zone lights shall be in accordance with the specifications of Figure App922ofthisAppendix.

APP934

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 9.15 9.15.1 RAPIDEXITTAXIWAYINDICATORLIGHTS Application Rapidexittaxiwayindicatorlightsshouldbeprovidedonarunwayintendedfor useinRunwayVisualRangeconditionslessthanavalueof300mand/orwhere thetrafficdensityisheavy. 9.15.2 Rapidexittaxiwayindicatorlightsshallnotbedisplayedintheeventofanylamp failureorotherfailurethatpreventsthedisplayofthelightpatterndepictedin FigureApp911,infull. Asetofrapidexittaxiwayindicatorlightsshallbelocatedontherunwayonthe samesideoftherunway centre lineastheassociated rapidexittaxiway, inthe configurationshowninFigureApp911.Ineachset,thelightsshallbelocated2 m apart and the light nearest to the runway centre line shall be displaced 2 m fromtherunwaycentreline. Wheremorethanonerapidexittaxiwayexistsonarunway,thesetofrapidexit taxiwayindicatorlightsforeachexitshallnotoverlapwhendisplayed. Characteristic Rapid exit taxiway indicator lights shall be fixed unidirectional yellow lights, aligned so as to be visible to the pilot of a landing aircraft in the direction of approachtotherunway. 9.15.6 9.15.7 Rapidexittaxiwayindicatorlightsshallbeinaccordancewiththespecificationsin FigureApp922orFigureApp923,ofthisAppendixasappropriate. Rapid exit taxiway indicator lights shall be supplied with power on a separate circuittootherrunwaylightingsothattheymaybeusedwhenotherlightingis switchedoff.

9.15.3

9.15.4 9.15.5

APP935

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 FigureApp913 RapidExitTaxiwayIndicatorLights(RETILS)

9.16 9.16.1

STOPWAYLIGHTS Application Stopwaylightsshallbeprovidedforastopwayintendedforuseatnight.

9.16.2

Location Stopwaylightsshallbeplacedalongthefulllengthofthestopwayandshallbein two parallel rows that are equidistant from the centre line and coincident with therowsoftherunwayedgelights.Stopwaylightsshallalsobeprovidedacross theendofastopwayonalineatrightanglestothestopwayaxisasneartothe endofthestopwayaspossibleand,inanycase,notmorethan3moutsidethe end.

9.16.3

Characteristics Stopwaylightsshallbefixedunidirectionallightsshowingredinthedirectionof therunway.

9.17 9.17.1

TAXIWAYCENTRELINELIGHTS Application Taxiwaycentrelinelightsshallbeprovidedonanexittaxiway,taxiway,andapron intendedforuseinRunwayVisualRangeconditionslessthanavalueof300min such a manner as to provide continuous guidance between the runway centre lineandaircraftstands,exceptthattheselightsneednotbeprovidedwherethe

APP936

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 traffic density is light and taxiway edge lights and centre line marking provide adequateguidance. 9.17.2 Taxiway centre line lights should be provided on a taxiway intended for use at nightinRunwayVisualRangeconditionsof300morgreater,andparticularlyon complex taxiway intersections and exit taxiways, except that these lights need not be provided where the traffic density is light and taxiway edge lights and centrelinemarkingprovideadequateguidance. Taxiwaycentrelinelightsshallbeprovidedonanexittaxiway,taxiway,andapron inallvisibilityconditionswherespecifiedascomponentsofanAdvancedSurface Movement Guidance and Control System in such a manner as to provide continuousguidancebetweentherunwaycentrelineandaircraftstands. Taxiway centre line lights shall be provided on a runway forming part of a standard taxiroute and intended for taxiing in Runway Visual Range conditions lessthanavalueof300m,exceptthattheselightsneednotbeprovidedwhere thetrafficdensityislightandtaxiwayedgelightsandcentrelinemarkingprovide adequateguidance. Taxiwaycentrelinelightsshallbeprovidedinallvisibilityconditionsonarunway forming part of a standard taxiroute where specified as components of an AdvancedSurfaceMovementGuidanceandControlSystem. Characteristics Taxiwaycentrelinelightsonataxiwayotherthananexittaxiwayandonarunway formingpartofastandardtaxirouteshallbefixedlightsshowinggreenwithbeam dimensionssuchthatthelightisvisibleonlyfromaircraftonorinthevicinityof thetaxiway. 9.17.7 Taxiwaycentrelinelightsonanexittaxiwayshallbefixedlights.Alternatetaxiway centre line lights shall show green and yellow from their beginning near the runway centre line to the perimeter of the ILS/MLS critical/sensitive area or the lower edge of the Inner Transitional Surface, whichever is farthest from the runway; and thereafter all lights shall show green (Figure App 912). The light nearesttotheperimetershallalwaysshowyellow.Whereaircraftmayfollowthe same centre line in both directions, all the centre line lights shallshow green to aircraftapproachingtherunway.

9.17.3

9.17.4

9.17.5

9.17.6

APP937

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 FigureApp914 TaxiwayLighting

APP938

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 9.17.8 Taxiwaycentrelinelightsshallbeinaccordancewiththespecificationsof: a) Figure App 928, App 929, or App 930 for taxiways intended for use in RunwayVisualRangeconditionsoflessthanavalueof300m;and b) FigureApp931orApp932forothertaxiways. 9.17.9 Wherehigherintensitiesarerequired,fromanoperationalpointofview,taxiway centrelinelightsonrapidexittaxiwaysintendedforuseinRunwayVisualRange conditions less than a value of 300 m shall be in accordance with the specifications of Figure App 928. The number of levels of brilliancy settings for theselightsshallbethesameasthatfortherunwaycentrelinelights. Where taxiway centre line lights are specified as components of an Advanced SurfaceMovementGuidanceandControlSystemandwhere,fromanoperational pointofview,higherintensitiesarerequiredtomaintaingroundmovementsata certain speed in very low visibilities or in bright daytime conditions, taxiway centrelinelightsshallbeinaccordancewiththespecificationsofFigureApp933, App934orApp935. Location Taxiway centre line lights shall be located on the taxiway centre line marking, exceptthattheymaybeoffsetbynotmorethan30cmwhereitisnotpracticable tolocatethemonthemarking. 9.17.12 9.17.13 TaxiwayCentreLineLightsonTaxiways Location Taxiway centre line lights on a straight section of a taxiway shall be spaced at longitudinalintervalsofnotmorethan30m,exceptthat: a) larger intervals not exceeding 60 m may be used where, because of the prevailing meteorological conditions, adequate guidance is provided by suchspacinganditisapprovedbytheAuthority; b) intervalslessthan30mshallbeprovidedonshortstraightsections;and c) onataxiwayintendedforuseinRVRconditionsoflessthanavalueof300 m,thelongitudinalspacingshallnotexceed15m. 9.17.14 Taxiway centre line lights on a taxiway curve shall continue from the straight portion of the taxiway at a constant distance from the outside edge of the taxiwaycurve.Thelightsshallbespacedatintervalssuchthataclearindication ofthecurveisprovided. OnataxiwayintendedforuseinRVRconditionsoflessthanavalueof300m,the lightsonacurveshallnotexceedaspacingof15mandonacurveoflessthan

9.17.10

9.17.11

9.17.15

APP939

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 400mradiusthelightsshallbespacedatintervalsofnotgreaterthan7.5m.This spacingshallextendfor60mbeforeandafterthecurve. 9.17.16 9.17.17 TaxiwayCentreLineLightsonRapidExitTaxiways Location Taxiway centre line lights on a rapid exit taxiway shall commence at a point at least 60 m before the beginning of the taxiway centre line curve and continue beyondtheendofthecurvetoapointonthecentrelineofthetaxiwaywherean aircraftcanbeexpectedtoreachnormaltaxiingspeed.Thelightsonthatportion paralleltotherunwaycentrelineshallalwaysbeatleast60cmfromanyrowof runwaycentrelinelights,asshowninFigureApp9.12andFigureApp913. 9.17.18 The lights should be spaced at longitudinal intervals of not more than 15 m, exceptthat,whererunwaycentrelinelightsarenotprovided,agreaterinterval notexceeding30mmaybeused. TaxiwayCentreLineLightsonotherExitTaxiways Location Taxiway centre line lights on exit taxiways other than rapid exit taxiways shall commence at the point where the taxiway centre line marking begins to curve fromtherunwaycentreline,andfollowthecurvedtaxiwaycentrelinemarkingat leasttothepointwherethemarkingleavestherunway.Thefirstlightshallbeat least60cmfromanyrowofrunwaycentrelinelights,asshowninFigureApp9 13. Thelightsshallbespacedatlongitudinalintervalsofnotmorethan7.5m. TaxiwayCentreLineLightsonRunways Location Taxiwaycentrelinelightsonarunwayformingpartofastandardtaxirouteand intendedfortaxiinginRunwayVisualRangeconditionslessthanavalueof300m shallbespacedatlongitudinalintervalsnotexceeding15m.

9.17.19 9.17.20 9.17.21

9.17.22 9.17.23 9.17.24

APP940

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 FigureApp915 OffsetRunwayandTaxiwayCentreLineLights

9.17.25

Where a runway forming part of a standard taxiroute is provided with runway lightingandtaxiwaylighting,thelightingsystemsshallbeinterlockedtopreclude thepossibilityofsimultaneousoperationofbothformsoflighting. TAXIWAYEDGELIGHTS Application Taxiwayedgelightsshallbeprovidedattheedgesofarunwayturnpad,holding bay, apron, etc. intended for use at night and on a taxiway not provided with taxiwaycentrelinelightsandintendedforuseatnight,exceptthattaxiwayedge lights need not be provided where, considering the nature of the operations, adequateguidancecanbeachievedbysurfaceilluminationorothermeans.

9.18 9.18.1

9.18.2

Taxiwayedgelightsshallbeprovidedonarunwayformingpartofastandardtaxi route and intended for taxiing at night where the runway is not provided with taxiwaycentrelinelights. Location Taxiwayedgelightsonastraightsectionof ataxiwayandona runwayforming partofastandardtaxirouteshallbespacedatuniformlongitudinalintervalsof notmorethan60m.Thelightsonacurveshallbespacedatintervalslessthan 60msothataclearindicationofthecurveisprovided.

9.18.3

9.18.4

Taxiway edge lights on a holding bay, apron, etc. should be spaced at uniform longitudinalintervalsofnotmorethan60m. APP941

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 9.18.5 9.18.6 Taxiwayedgelightsonarunwayturnpadshallbespacedatuniformlongitudinal intervalsofnotmorethan30m. The lights shall be located as near as practicable to the edges of the taxiway, runway turn pad, holding bay, apron or runway, etc. or outside the edges at a distanceofnotmorethan3m. Characteristics Taxiwayedgelightsshallbefixedlightsshowingblue.Thelightsshallshowupto atleast30abovethehorizontalandatallanglesinazimuthnecessarytoprovide guidancetoapilottaxiingineitherdirection.Atanintersection,exitorcurvethe lightsshallbeshieldedasfaraspracticablesothattheycannotbeseeninangles ofazimuthinwhichtheymaybeconfusedwithotherlights. 9.19 9.19.1 RUNWAYTURNPADLIGHTS Application Runway turn pad lights shall be provided for continuous guidance on a runway turnpadintendedforuseinRunwayVisualRangeconditionslessthanavalueof 350 m, to enable an aircraft to complete a 180 degree turn and align with the runwaycentreline. 9.19.2 9.19.3 Runwayturnpadlightsshallbeprovidedonarunwayturnpadintendedforuse atnight. Location Runway turn pad lights should normally be located on the runway turn pad marking,exceptthattheymaybeoffsetbynotmorethan30cmwhereitisnot practicabletolocatethemonthemarking. 9.19.4 9.19.5 9.19.6 Runwayturnpadlightsonastraightsectionoftherunwayturnpadmarkingshall bespacedatlongitudinalintervalsofnotmorethan15m. Runwayturnpadlightsonacurvedsectionoftherunwayturnpadmarkingshall notexceedaspacingof7.5m. Characteristics Runway turn pad lights shall be unidirectional fixed lights showing green with beam dimensions such that the light is visible only from aircraft on or approachingtherunwayturnpad. 9.19.7 Runway turn pad lights shall be in accordance with the specifications of Figure App929,App930orApp931ofthisAppendix,asappropriate.

9.18.7

APP942

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 9.20 9.20.1 STOPBARS Application Astopbarshall be providedateveryrunwayholdingpositionservingarunway when it is intended that the runway will be used in Runway Visual Range conditionslessthanavalueof550m. Note: It is permissible to colocate Runway Holding Positions Category I and CategoryII/IIIprovidingthatthegreaterdistancefromtherunwaycentrelineis applied. 9.20.2 Whereastopbarhasnotbeenprovided: a) Appropriate aids and procedures are available to assist in preventing inadvertentincursionsofaircraftandvehiclesontotherunwayincluding: b) Limitingaircraftonthemanoeuvringaretooneatatime;and c) LimitingvehiclesontheManoeuvringAreatotheessentialminimum. 9.20.3 AstopbarshallbeprovidedatanIntermediateHoldingPositionwhenitispartof asurfacemovementguidanceandcontrolsystemusedtoprovidetrafficcontrol byvisualmeans. Where the normal stop bar lights might be obscured (from a pilots view), for example,whereapilotmayberequiredtostoptheaircraftinapositionsoclose tothelightsthattheyareblockedfromviewbythestructureoftheaircraft,then apairofelevatedlightsshouldbeaddedtoeachendofthestopbar. Location Stopbarsshallbelocatedacrossthetaxiwayatthepointwhereitisdesiredthat trafficstop.Wheretheadditionalelevatedlightsareprovided,theselightsshall belocatednotlessthan3mfromthetaxiwayedge. 9.20.6 Characteristics Stop bars shall consist of lights spaced at intervals of 3 m across the taxiway, showing red in the intended direction(s) of approach to the intersection or runwayholdingposition. 9.20.7 9.20.8 Stopbarsinstalledatarunwayholdingpositionshallbeunidirectionalandshall showredinthedirectionofapproachtotherunway. Where the additional elevated lights are provided, these lights shall have the same characteristics as the lights in the stop bar, but shall be visible to approachingaircraftuptothestopbarposition.

9.20.4

9.20.5

APP943

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 9.20.9 Selectively switchable stop bars shall be installed in conjunction with taxiway centrelinelights(extendingforadistanceofatleast90mfromthestopbar)in thedirectionthatitisintendedforanaircrafttoproceedfromthestopbar. The intensity in red light and beam spreads of stop bar lights shall be in accordancewiththespecificationsinFiguresApp929throughApp932,ofthis Appendixasappropriate. WherestopbarsarespecifiedascomponentsofanAdvancedSurfaceMovement Guidance and Control System and where, from an operational point of view, higherintensitiesarerequiredtomaintaingroundmovementsatacertainspeed in very low visibilities or in bright daytime conditions, the intensity in red light andbeamspreadsofstopbarlightsshallbeinaccordancewiththespecifications of,FigureApp933,App934orApp935ofthisAppendix. Where a wide beam fixture is required, the intensity in red light and beam spreadsofstopbarlightsshallbeinaccordancewiththespecificationsof,Figure App933orApp935ofthisAppendix. Thelightingcircuitshallbedesignedsothat: a) stopbarslocatedacrossentrancetaxiwaysareselectivelyswitchable; b) stop bars located across taxiways intended to be used only as exit taxiwaysareswitchableselectivelyoringroups; c) when a stop bar is illuminated, any taxiway centre line lights installed beyondthestopbarshallbeextinguishedforadistanceofatleast90m; and d) d) stop bars shall be interlocked with the taxiway centre line lights so thatwhenthecentrelinelightsbeyondthestop bar areilluminatedthe stopbarisextinguishedandviceversa. 9.21 9.21.1 INTERMEDIATEHOLDINGPOSITIONLIGHTS Application Exceptwhereastopbarhasbeeninstalled,IntermediateHoldingPositionlights shallbeprovidedatanIntermediateHoldingPositionintendedforuseinRunway VisualRangeconditionslessthanavalueof300m. 9.21.2 9.21.3 IntermediateHoldingPositionlightsshallbeprovidedatanIntermediateHolding Positionwherethereisnoneedforstopandgosignalsasprovidedbyastopbar. Location Intermediate Holding Position lights shall be located along the Intermediate HoldingPositionmarkingatadistanceof0.3mpriortothemarking.

9.20.10

9.20.11

9.20.12

9.20.13

APP944

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 9.21.4 Characteristics Intermediate Holding Position lights shall consist of three fixed unidirectional lights showing yellow in the direction of approach to the Intermediate Holding Positionwithalightdistributionsimilartotaxiwaycentrelinelightsifprovided. Thelightsshallbedisposedsymmetricallyaboutandatrightangletothetaxiway centreline,withindividuallightsspaced1.5mapart. 9.22 RUNWAYGUARDLIGHTS Note: The purpose of runway guard lights is to warn pilots, and drivers of vehicleswhentheyareoperatingontaxiways,thattheyareabouttoenteran activerunway.Therearetwostandardconfigurationsofrunwayguardlightsas illustratedinFigureApp915. FigureApp916 RunwayGuardLights

Note:ReferencetoClauses5.3.22.4and5.3.22.5inthediagramareincorrect. CorrectreferenceistoClauses9.21.3and9.21.4ofthisAppendix. 9.22.1 Application Runwayguardlights,ConfigurationA,shallbeprovidedateachtaxiway/runway intersectionassociatedwitharunwayintendedforusein: a) RunwayVisualRangeconditionslessthanavalueof550m;and

b) Runway Visual Range conditions greater than a value of 550 m where a stopbarisnotinstalled.;and

APP945

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 c) Runwayguardlights,ConfigurationAorConfigurationBorboth,shallbe provided at each taxiway/runway intersection where enhanced conspicuity of the taxiway/runway intersection is needed, such as on a widethroattaxiway,exceptthatConfigurationBshouldnotbecollocated withastopbar. 9.22.2 Location Runwayguardlights,ConfigurationA,shallbelocatedateachsideofthetaxiway atadistancefromtherunwaycentrelinenotlessthanthatspecifiedforatake offrunwayinTableApp82. 9.22.3 Runway guard lights, Configuration B, shall be located across the taxiway at a distance from the runway centre line not less than that specified for a takeoff runwayinTableApp82. Characteristics Runwayguardlights,ConfigurationA,shallconsistoftwopairsofyellowlights. 9.22.5 Wherethereisaneedtoenhancethecontrastbetweentheonandoffstateof runwayguardlights,ConfigurationA,intendedforuseduringtheday,avisorof sufficientsizetopreventsunlightfromenteringthelenswithoutinterferingwith thefunctionofthefixtureshallbelocatedaboveeachlamp. Runway guard lights, Configuration B, shall consist of yellow lights spaced at intervalsof3macrossthetaxiway. Thelightbeamshallbeunidirectionalandalignedsoastobevisibletothepilot ofanaircrafttaxiingtotheholdingposition. TheintensityinyellowlightandbeamspreadsoflightsofConfigurationAshallbe inaccordancewiththespecificationsinFigureApp940ofthisAppendix. Whererunwayguardlightsareintendedforuseduringtheday,theintensityin yellowlightandbeamspreadsoflightsofConfigurationAshallbeinaccordance withthespecificationsinFigureApp941ofthisAppendix. WhererunwayguardlightsarespecifiedascomponentsofanAdvancedSurface Movement Guidance and Control System where higher light intensities are required,theintensityinyellowlightandbeamspreadsoflightsofConfiguration A shall be in accordance with the specifications in Figure App 941 of this Appendix. TheintensityinyellowlightandbeamspreadsoflightsofConfigurationBshallbe inaccordancewiththespecificationsinFigureApp928ofthisAppendix. Whererunwayguardlightsareintendedforuseduringtheday,theintensityin yellowlightandbeamspreadsoflightsofConfigurationBshallbeinaccordance withthespecificationsinFigureApp936ofthisAppendix. APP946

9.22.4

9.22.6 9.22.7 9.22.8 9.22.9

9.22.10

9.22.11 9.22.12

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 9.22.13 WhererunwayguardlightsarespecifiedascomponentsofanAdvancedSurface Movement Guidance and Control System where higher light intensities are required,theintensityinyellowlightandbeamspreadsoflightsofConfiguration B shall be in accordance with the specifications in Figure App 936 of this Appendix ThelightsineachunitofConfigurationAshallbeilluminatedalternately. For Configuration B, adjacent lights shall be alternately illuminated and alternativelightsshallbeilluminatedinunison. Thelightsshallbeilluminatedbetween30and60cyclesperminuteandthelight suppressionandilluminationperiodsshallbeequalandoppositeineachlight. APRONFLOODLIGHTING Application Apronfloodlightingshallbeprovidedonanapron,andonadesignatedisolated aircraftparkingpositionintendedtobeusedatnight. 9.23.2 Location Apron floodlights shall be located so as to provide adequate illumination on all apronserviceareas,withaminimumofglaretopilotsofaircraftinflightandon theground,aerodromeandaproncontrollers,andpersonnelontheapron.The arrangement and aiming of floodlights shall be such that an aircraft stand receiveslightfromtwoormoredirectionstominimiseshadows. 9.23.3 Characteristics Thespectraldistributionofapronfloodlightsshallbesuchthatthecoloursused for aircraft marking connected with routine servicing, and for surface and obstaclemarking,canbecorrectlyidentified.Monochromaticlightsmustnotbe used. 9.23.4 Theaverageilluminanceshallbeatleastthefollowing: a) Aircraftstand: i) horizontal illuminance 20 lux with a uniformity ratio (average to minimum)ofnotmorethan4to1;and ii) vertical illuminance 20 lux at a height of 2 m above the apron in relevantdirections. b) Otherapronareas:

9.22.14 9.22.15 9.22.16 9.23 9.23.1

APP947

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 horizontalilluminance50percentoftheaverageilluminanceonthe aircraft stands with a uniformity ratio (average to minimum) of not morethan4to1. 9.24 9.24.1 VISUALDOCKINGGUIDANCESYSTEM Application A visual docking guidance system shall be provided when it is intended to indicate,byavisualaid,theprecisepositioningofanaircraftonanaircraftstand andotheralternativemeans,suchasmarshallers,arenotpracticable. 9.24.2 Characteristics Thesystemshallprovidebothazimuthandstoppingguidance. 9.24.3 Theazimuthguidanceunitandthestoppingpositionindicatorshallbeadequate foruseinallweather,visibility,backgroundlightingandpavementconditionsfor whichthesystemisintendedbothbydayandnight,butshallnotdazzlethepilot. Theazimuthguidanceunitandthestoppingpositionindicatorshallbeofadesign suchthat: a) aclearindicationofmalfunctionofeitherorbothisavailabletothepilot; and b) theycanbeturnedoff. 9.24.5 Theazimuthguidanceunitandthestoppingpositionindicatorshallbelocatedin such a way that there is continuity of guidance between the aircraft stand markings, the aircraft stand manoeuvring guidance lights, if present, and the visualdockingguidancesystem. Theaccuracyofthesystemshallbeadequateforthetypeofloadingbridgeand fixedaircraftservicinginstallationswithwhichitistobeused. Thesystemshouldbeusablebyalltypesofaircraftforwhichtheaircraftstandis intended,preferablywithoutselectiveoperation. If selective operation is required to prepare the system for use by a particular type of aircraft, then the system shall provide an identification of the selected aircraft type to both the pilot and the system operator as a means of ensuring thatthesystemhasbeensetproperly. AzimuthGuidanceUnit Location The azimuth guidance unit shall be located on or close to the extension of the stand centre line ahead of the aircraft so that its signals are visible from the APP948

9.24.4

9.24.6 9.24.7 9.24.8

9.24.9 9.24.9.1

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 cockpitofanaircraftthroughoutthedockingmanoeuvreandalignedforuseby thepilotoccupyingboththeleftandrightseats. 9.24.9.2 Characteristics The azimuth guidanceunit shall provide unambiguous left/rightguidance which enablesthepilottoacquireandmaintaintheleadinlinewithoutovercontrolling. 9.24.9.3 9.24.10 When azimuth guidance is indicated by colour change, green shall be used to identifythecentrelineandredfordeviationsfromthecentreline. StoppingPositionIndicator

9.24.10.1 Location Thestoppingpositionindicatorshallbelocatedinconjunctionwith,orsufficiently close to, the azimuth guidance unit so that pilots occupying both left and right seats,canobserveboththeazimuthandstopsignalswithoutturningtheirhead. 9.24.10.2 Characteristics The stopping position information provided by the indicator for a particular aircraft type shall account for the anticipated range of variations in pilot eye heightand/orviewingangle. 9.24.10.3 The stopping position indicator shall show the stopping position for the aircraft forwhichguidanceisbeingprovided,andshallprovideclosingrateinformation to enable the pilot to gradually decelerate the aircraft to a full stop at the intendedstoppingposition. 9.24.10.4 The stopping position indicator shall provide closing rate information over a distanceofatleast10m. 9.24.10.5 When stopping guidance is indicated by colour change, green shall be used to showthattheaircraftcanproceedandredtoshowthatthestoppointhasbeen reachedexceptthatforashortdistancepriortothestoppointathirdcolourmay beusedtowarnthatthestoppingpointisclose. 9.25 9.25.1 AIRCRAFTSTANDMANOEUVRINGGUIDANCELIGHTS Application Aircraft stand manoeuvring guidance lights (Check ICAO for reference) shall be providedtofacilitatethepositioningofanaircraftonanaircraftstandonapaved apronintendedforuseinRVRconditionslessthanavalueof200m(i.e.Category IIIB). 9.25.2 Aircraft stand manoeuvring guidance lights should be provided to facilitate the positioning of an aircraft on an aircraft stand or on a paved apron intended for

APP949

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 use in poor visibility conditions, unless adequate guidance is provided by other means. 9.25.3 Location Aircraft stand manoeuvring guidance lights shall be collocated with the aircraft standmarkings. 9.25.4 Characteristics Aircraft stand manoeuvring guidance lights, other than those indicating a stop position, shall be fixed yellow lights, visible throughout the segments within whichtheyareintendedtoprovideguidance. 9.25.5 9.25.6 9.25.7 9.25.8 Thelightsusedtodelineateleadin,turningandleadoutlinesshouldbespaced atintervalsofnotmorethan7.5moncurvesand15monstraightsections. Thelightsindicatingastoppositionshallbefixed,unidirectionallights,showing red. The intensity of the lights shall be adequate for the condition of visibility and ambientlightinwhichtheuseoftheaircraftstandisintended. Thelightingcircuitshouldbedesignedsothatthelightsmaybeswitchedonto indicatethatanaircraftstandistobeusedandswitchedofftoindicatethatitis nottobeused. ROADHOLDINGPOSITIONLIGHT Application A roadholding position light shall be provided at each roadholding position serving a runway when it is intended that the runway will be used in Runway VisualRangeconditionslessthanavalueof550m. 9.26.2 Location A roadholding position light shall be located adjacent to the holding position marking1.5m(0.5m)fromoneedgeoftheroad,i.e.leftorrightasappropriate tothelocaltrafficregulations. 9.26.3 Characteristics Theroadholdingpositionlightshallcomprise: a) acontrollablered(stop)/green(go)trafficlight;or b) aflashingredlight 9.26.4 Theroadholdingpositionlightbeamshallbeunidirectionalandalignedsoasto bevisibletothedriverofavehicleapproachingtheholdingposition APP950

9.26 9.26.1

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 9.26.5 The intensity of the light beam shall be adequate for the conditions of visibility andambientlightinwhichtheuseoftheholdingpositionisintended,butshall notdazzlethedriver The flash frequency of the flashingred light shall be between 30 and 60 per minute. LIGHTSINUNSERVICEABLEORCLOSEDAREAS Application Unserviceablity lights shall be displayed to delineate an area unsafe for aircraft operation,i.e.closedareas,areastemporarilyunserviceable. 9.27.2 Location Unserviceability lights shall be positioned at the outer perimeter of an unserviceablearea,orattheentrytothetaxiway/aircraftstandasappropriate. Note: Unserviceability lights are normally used in conjunction with the extinguishmentofotherairfieldlighting.Runwaycentrelineandedgelighting, and taxiway lighting shall be turned off in areas that are closed to aircraft traffic. This includes taxiway centre line lights that form a guidance path immediatelyleadingtotheclosedarea. 9.27.3 A minimum of four lightsshall be used except whether the area is triangular in shapewhereaminimumofthreelightsmaybeemployed.Thenumberoflights mustbeincreasedwheretheareaislargeorofunusualconfiguration.Withthe exception of 9.26.4, at least one light shall be installed for each 7.5 m of peripheral distance of the area. If the lights are directional, they shall be orientated so that as far as possible their beams are aligned from the direction whichaircraftorvehiclesareapproaching. In addition to closed markings, when a runway or taxiway, or portion thereof closed is intercepted by a usable runway or taxiway which is used at night, unserviceability lights shall be placed across the entrance to the closed area at intervalsnotexceeding3m. CharacteristicsofUnserviceabilityLights Anunserviceabilitylightshallconsistofaredfixedlight.Thelightshallhavean intensitysufficienttoensureconspicuityconsideringtheintensityoftheadjacent lights and the general level of illumination against which it would normally be viewed.Innocaseshalltheintensitybelessthan10cdofredlight. 9.27.6 Unserviceable area lights shall be mounted so as to be frangible. Their height shallbesufficientlylowtopreserveclearanceforpropellersandforenginepods ofjetaircraft.

9.26.6 9.27 9.27.1

9.27.4

9.27.5

APP951

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 9.27.7 9.28 9.28.1 Ifthelightsaredirectional,theyshallbeorientatedsothatasfaraspossibletheir beamsarealignedinthedirectionfromwhichaircraftorvehicleswillapproach. LIGHTSFORTEMPORARYCLOSUREOFRUNWAY Alightedvisualaidmaybeutilizedtoindicatethetemporaryclosureofarunway instead of closure markings. Where installed the lighted visual aid unit should complywiththefollowing: a) Beaportable,towableunitthatcanbequicklyremovedfromtherunway. b) Consistofclearincandescentlampsortransmitawhitecolour,arranged intheshapeofaletterxwitharmscrossedatanappropriateangleto makethexdiscernible.Thearmsshallbepaintedwhiteoryellowonall sidessothattheunitwillbeclearlyvisiblewheninitsposition.Thearms mustbeatleast4.5minlengthwithaminimumof9xequallyspaced150 Wspotlights. c) Itshouldbeenergizedbyaportablepowersupply d) Itshallbecontrolledsothatthelightedsignalwillflashatanapproximate rateof2.53secondsonand12.5secondsoff. e) It shall provide the following daytime visual reference during VFR conditionswhenplacedonthecentrelineatthethresholdmarkings. f) Visibletothepilotatarangeofatleast5nm g) Recognisableasaletterxfromarangeofatleast12nm h) Itshallprovidelampdimmingcapabilityfornighttimeoperations i) Itshallproduceasignalthatprovidesahorizontalcoveragetoatleast15 degrees on each side of the runway centre line, and a vertical coverage from0degreesto10degreesabovehorizontal,bothdayandnight,ata rangeof0.5nm j) Itshallhaveadjustableaimingandlevellingtoallowtiltingtoanoptimum angleof3degreesfromvertical k) It shall be able to withstand wind speeds of 40 kts without affecting aimingoroperation l) It shall include an illuminated failure indicator that is visible from back (runway side) of the unit, that can be seen from the aerodrome control tower 9.28.2 Where a visual aid as described in 9.27.1 is used to denote a temporary closed runway, a minimum of two units shall be located on the runway. One shall be located on the centre line at the threshold of the runway in use, and another APP952

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 located at the aiming point 350400 m from the threshold. All other airfield lightingassociatedwiththerunwayshallbeextinguishedinassociationwiththe useoftheseunits. 9.29 9.29.1 COLOURSPECIFICATIONS General IntroductoryNoteThefollowingspecificationsdefinethechromaticitylimitsof colours to be used for aeronautical ground lights, markings, signs and panels. Thespecificationsareinaccordwiththe1983specificationsoftheInternational CommissiononIllumination(CIE). It is not possible to establish specifications for colours such that there is no possibilityofconfusion.Forreasonablycertainrecognition,itisimportantthat theeyeilluminationbewellabovethethresholdofperception,thatthecolour not be greatly modified by selective atmospheric attenuations and that the observerscolourvisionbeadequate.Thereisalsoariskofconfusionofcolour atanextremelyhighlevelofeyeilluminationsuchasmaybeobtainedfroma highintensitysourceatverycloserange.Experienceindicatesthatsatisfactory recognitioncanbeachievedifdueattentionisgiventothesefactors. The chromaticities are expressed in terms of the standard observer and coordinate system adopted by the International Commission on Illumination (CIE)atitsEighthSessionatCambridge,England,in1931.* 9.29.2 9.29.3 ColoursforAeronauticalGroundLights Chromaticities The chromaticities of aeronautical ground lights shall be within the following boundaries CIEEquations(seeFigureApp917): a) Red A) Purpleboundary B) Yellowboundary b) Yellow A) Redboundary B) Whiteboundary C) Greenboundary y=0.382 y=0.7900.667x y=x0.120 y=0.980x y=0.335

APP953

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 c) Green A) Yellowboundary B) Whiteboundary C) Blueboundary d) Blue A) Greenboundary B) Whiteboundary C) Purpleboundary e) White A) Yellowboundary B) Blueboundary C) Greenboundary D) Purpleboundary f) VariableWhite A) Yellowboundary B) Blueboundary C) Greenboundary D) Purpleboundary x=0.255+0.750yandx=1.1851.500y x=0.285 y=0.440andy=0.150+0.640x y=0.050+0.750xandy=0.382 x=0.500 x=0.285 y=0.440andy=0.150+0.640x y=0.050+0.750xandy=0.382 y=0.805x+0.065 y=0.400x x=0.600y+0.133 x=0.3600.080y x=0.650y y=0.3900.171x

Note: Guidance on chromaticity changes resulting from the effect of temperature on filtering elements is given in the Aerodrome Design Manual(ICAODoc9157),Part4 9.29.4 Wheredimmingisnotrequired,orwhereobserverswithdefectivecolourvision mustbeabletodeterminethecolourofthelight,greensignalsshouldbewithin thefollowingboundaries: a) Yellowboundary b) Whiteboundary c) Blueboundary y=0.7260.726x x=0.650y y=0.3900.171x

APP954

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 9.29.5 Whereincreasedcertaintyofrecognitionismoreimportantthanmaximumvisual range,greensignalsshouldbewithinthefollowingboundaries: a) Yellowboundary b) Whiteboundary c) Blueboundary y=0.7260.726x x=0.625y0.041 y=0.3900.171x

Note:SeeCIEPublicationNo.15,Colorimetry(1971) 9.29.6 DiscriminationbetweenLights Ifthereisarequirementtodiscriminateyellowandwhitefromeachother,they shouldbedisplayedincloseproximityoftimeorspaceas,forexample,bybeing flashedsuccessivelyfromthesamebeacon. 9.29.7 Ifthereisarequirementtodiscriminateyellowfromgreenand/orwhite,asfor example on exit taxiway centre line lights, the y coordinates of the yellow light shouldnotexceedavalueof0.40. Note:Thelimitsofwhitehavebeenbasedontheassumptionthattheywillbe usedinsituationsinwhichthecharacteristics(colourtemperature)ofthelight sourcewillbesubstantiallyconstant 9.29.8 The colour variable white is intended to be used only for lights that are to be variedinintensity,e.g.toavoiddazzling.Ifthiscolouristobediscriminatedfrom yellow,thelightsshouldbesodesignedandoperatedthat: a) the x coordinate of the yellow is at least 0.050 greater than the x coordinateofthewhite;and b) the disposition of the lights will be such that the yellow lights are displayedsimultaneouslyandincloseproximitytothewhitelights. 9.29.9 The colour of aeronautical ground lights shall be verified as being within the boundariesspecifiedinFigureApp916bymeasurementatfivepointswithinthe arealimitedbytheinnermostisocandelacurve(isocandeladiagramsinAppendix 9 refer), with operation at rated current or voltage. In the case of elliptical or circularisocandelacurves,thecolourmeasurementsshallbetakenatthecentre and at the horizontal and vertical limits. In the case of rectangular isocandela curves, the colour measurements shall be taken at the centre and the limits of thediagonals(corners).Inaddition,thecolourofthelightshallbecheckedatthe outermost isocandela curve to ensure that there is no colour shift that might causesignalconfusiontothepilot. Note 1: For the outermost isocandela curve, a measurement of colour coordinates should be made and recorded for review and judgement of acceptabilitybytheappropriateauthority.

APP955

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 Note 2: Certain light units may have application so that they may be viewed and used by pilots from directions beyond that of the outermost isocandela curve (e.g. stop bar lights at significantly wide runwayholding positions). In such instances, the appropriate authority should assess the actual application and if necessary require a check of colour shift at angular ranges beyond the outermostcurve. 9.29.10 In the case of visual approach slope indicators and other light units having a colour transition sector, the colour shall be measured at points in accordance with2.2.4,exceptthatthecolourareasshallbetreatedseparatelyandnopoint shallbewithin0.5degreesofthetransitionsector.

APP956

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 FigureApp917 ColoursforAeronauticalGroundLights

APP957

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9

FigureApp918 IsocandelaDiagramforApproachCentreLineLightandCrossbars (WhiteLight)

4.SeecollectivenotesforFiguresApp918toApp928

APP958

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 FigureApp919 IsocandelaDiagramforApproachSideRowLight (RedLight)

4.SeecollectivenotesforFiguresApp918toApp928

APP959

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9

FigureApp920 IsocandelaDiagramforThresholdLight (GreenLight)

3.SeecollectivenotesforFiguresApp918toApp928

APP960

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 FigureApp921 IsocandelaDiagramforThresholdWingBarLight (GreenLight)

3.SeecollectivenotesforFiguresApp918toApp928

APP961

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 FigureApp922 IsocandelaDiagramforTouchdownZoneLight (WhiteLight)

3.SeecollectivenotesforFiguresApp918toApp928

APP962

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 FigureApp923 IsocandelaDiagramforRunwayCentreLineLightwith30mLongitudinal Spacing(WhiteLight)andRapidExitTaxiwayIndicatorLight(YellowLight)

4.SeecollectivenotesforFiguresApp918toApp928

APP963

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 FigureApp924 IsocandelaDiagramforRunwayCentreLineLightwith15mLongitudinal Spacing(WhiteLight)andRapidExitTaxiwayIndicatorLight(YellowLight)

4.SeecollectivenotesforFiguresApp918toApp928

APP964

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 FigureApp925 IsocandelaDiagramforRunwayEndLight (RedLight)

2.SeecollectivenotesforFiguresApp918toApp928

APP965

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 FigureApp926 IsocandelaDiagramforRunwayEdgeLightwhereWidthofRunwayis45m (WhiteLight)

2.Toein3.5degrees 3.Forredlight,multiplyvaluesby0.15. 4.Foryellowlight,multiplyvaluesby0.40. 5.SeecollectivenotesforFiguresApp918toApp928

APP966

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 FigureApp927 IsocandelaDiagramforRunwayEdgeLightwhereWidthofRunwayis60m (WhiteLight)

4.Forredlight,multiplyvaluesby0.15.
5.SeecollectivenotesforFiguresApp918toApp928

APP967

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 FigureApp928 GridPointstobeusedfortheCalculationofAverageIntensityofApproachand RunwayLights

CollectivenotestoFiguresApp918toApp928 1. The ellipses in each figure are symmetrical about the common vertical and horizontalaxes. 2. FiguresApp918toApp928showtheminimumallowablelightintensities.The average intensity of the main beam is calculated by establishing grid points as shown in Figure App 928 and using the intensity values measures at all grid points located within and on the perimeter of the ellipse representing the main beam.Theaveragevalueisthearithmeticaverageoflightintensitiesmeasured atallconsideredgridpoints. 3. Nodeviationsareacceptableinthemainbeampatternwhenthelightingfixture isproperlyaimed. 4. Averageintensityratio.Theratiobetweentheaverageintensitywithintheellipse definingthemainbeamofatypicalnewlightandtheaveragelightintensityof themainbeamofanewrunwayedgelightshallbeasfollows: FigureApp918 FigureApp919 FigureApp920 FigureApp921 Approachcentrelineandcrossbars 1.57o2.0(whitelight) Approachsiderow Threshold Thresholdwingbar 0.5to1.0(redlight) 1.0to1.5(greenlight) 1.0to1.5(greenlight)

APP968

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 FigureApp922 FigureApp923 FigureApp924 Touchdownzone Runwaycentreline(longitudinal spacing30m) Runwaycentreline(longitudinal spacing15m) 0.5to1.0(whitelight) 0.5to1.0(whitelight) 0.5to1.0forCATIII (whitelight) 0.5to0.25forCATI,II (whitelight) 0.25to0.5(redlight) 1.0(whitelight) 1.0(whitelight)

FigureApp925 FigureApp926 FigureApp927

Runwayend Runwayedge(45mrunwaywidth) Runwayedge(60mrunwaywidth)

5. Thebeamcoveragesinthefiguresprovidethenecessaryguidanceforapproaches downtoanRVRoftheorderof150mandtakeoffsdowntoanRVRoftheorder of100m. 6. Horizontal angles are measured with respect to the vertical plane through the runwaycentreline.Forlightsotherthancentrelinelights,thedirectiontowards therunwaycentrelineisconsideredpositive.Verticalanglesaremeasuredwith respecttothehorizontalplane. 7. Where, for approach centre line lights and crossbars and for approach side row lights, inset lights are used in lieu of elevated lights, e.g. on a runway with a displaced threshold, the intensity requirements can be met by installing two or threefittings(lowerintensity)ateachposition. 8. The importance of adequate maintenance cannot be overemphasized. The average intensity should never fall to a value less than 50 percent of the value showninthefiguresanditshouldbetheaimofairportauthoritiestomaintaina leveloflightoutputclosetothespecifiedminimumaverageintensity. 9. Thelightunitshallbeinstalledsothatthemainbeamisalignedwithinonehalf degreeofthespecifiedrequirement.

APP969

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 FigureApp929 IsocandelaDiagramforTaxiwayCentreLine(15mspacing)andStopBarLightsinStraight SectionsintendedforuseinRunwayVisualRangeConditionsoflessthanavalueof300m whereLargeOffsetscanOccurandforLowIntensityRunwayGuardLights,ConfigurationB

Notes: 1. Thesebeamcoveragesallowfordisplacementofthecockpitfromthecentrelineuptodistancesoftheorderof12m andareintendedforusebeforeandaftercurves. Increasedintensitiesforenhancedrapidexittaxiwaycentrelinelightsasrecommendedin9.16.9arefourtimesthe respectiveintensitiesinthefigure(i.e.800cdforminimumaveragemainbeam). SeecollectivenotesforFiguresApp929toApp938.

2.

3.

APP970

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 FigureApp930 IsocandelaDiagramforTaxiwayCentreLine(15mspacing)andStopBarLights inStraightSectionsintendedforuseinRunwayVisualRangeConditionsofLess thanavalueof300m

2.SeecollectivenotesforFiguresApp929toApp938.

APP971

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 FigureApp931 IsocandelaDiagramforTaxiwayCentreLine(7.5mspacing)andstopbar lightsincurvedsectionsintendedforuseinRunwayVisualRangeconditions oflessthanavalueof300m

2.SeecollectivenotesforFiguresApp929toApp938.

APP972

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 FigureApp932 IsocandelaDiagramforTaxiwayCentreLine(30m,60mspacing)andStop BarLightsinStraightSectionsintendedforuseinRunwayVisualRange Conditionsof300morgreater

3.SeecollectivenotesforFiguresApp929toApp938.

APP973

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 FigureApp933 IsocandelaDiagramforTaxiwayCentreLine(7.5m,15m,30mspacing)and StopBarLightsinCurvedSectionsintendedforuseinRunwayVisualRange Conditionsof300morgreater

4.SeecollectivenotesforFiguresApp929toApp938.

APP974

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 FigureApp934 IsocandelaDiagramforHighintensityTaxiwayCentreLine(15mspacing) andStopBarLightsinStraightSectionsintendedforuseinanAdvanced SurfaceMovementGuidanceandControlSystemwhereHigherLight IntensitiesareRequiredandwhereLargeOffsetscanOccur

2.SeecollectivenotesforFiguresApp929toApp938.

APP975

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 FigureApp935 IsocandelaDiagramforHighintensityTaxiwayCentreLine(15mspacing) andStopBarLightsinStraightSectionsintendedforuseinanAdvanced SurfaceMovementGuidanceandControlSystemwhereHigherLight IntensitiesareRequired

2.SeecollectivenotesforFiguresApp929toApp938.

APP976

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 FigureApp936 IsocandelaDiagramforHighintensityTaxiwayCentreLine(7.5mspacing) andStopBarLightsinCurvedSectionsintendedforuseinanAdvanced SurfaceMovementGuidanceandControlSystemwhereHigherLight IntensitiesareRequired

2.SeecollectivenotesforFiguresApp929toApp938.

APP977

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 FigureApp937 IsocandelaDiagramforHighintensityRunwayGuardLights,ConfigurationB

2.SeecollectivenotesforFiguresApp929toApp938.

APP978

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9

FigureApp938 GridPointstobeusedforCalculationofAverageIntensityofTaxiwayCentreLineandStop BarLights

CollectivenotestoFiguresApp928toApp938 1. The intensities specified in Figures App 929 to App 937 are in green and yellow light for taxiway centre line lights, yellowlightforrunwayguardlightsandredlightforstopbarlights. FiguresApp929toApp937showtheminimumallowablelightintensities.Theaverageintensityofthemainbeamis calculatedbyestablishinggridpointsasshowninFigureApp938andusingtheintensityvaluesmeasuredatallgrid points located within and on the perimeter of the rectangle representing the main beam. The average value is the arithmeticaverageofthelightintensitiesmeasuredatallconsideredgridpoints. No deviations are acceptable in the main beam or in the innermost beam, as applicable, when the lighting fixture is properlyaimed. Horizontal angles are measured with respect to the vertical plane through the taxiway centre line except on curves wheretheyaremeasuredwithrespecttothetangenttothecurve. Verticalanglesaremeasuredfromthelongitudinalslopeofthetaxiwaysurface. Theimportanceofadequatemaintenancecannotbeoveremphasized.Theintensity,eitheraveragewhereapplicable or as specified on the corresponding isocandela curves, should never fall to a value less than 50 percent of the value shown in the figures, and it should be the aim of airport authorities to maintain a level of light output close to the specifiedminimumaverageintensity. Thelightunitshallbeinstalledsothatthemainbeamortheinnermostbeam,asapplicable,isalignedwithinonehalf degreeofthespecifiedrequirement.

2.

3.

4.

5. 6.

7.

APP979

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 FigureApp939A LightIntensityDistributionofTVASISandATVASIS (Night)

Note1:Thesecurvesareforminimumintensitiesinwhitelight. Note2:Filtertransmissivityforallredsignalsis15percentminimumatoperatingtemperature. Note3:AsharptransitionfromwhitetonolightinelevationisessentialtoTVASISoperation.Forexactelevation settings,seeFigureApp96.

APP980

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 FigureApp939B LightIntensityDistributionofTVASISandATVASIS (Day)

APP981

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 FigureApp940 LightIntensityDistributionofPAPIandAPAPI

APP982

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 FigureApp941 IsocandelaDiagramforEachLightinLowintensityRunwayGuardLights ConfigurationA

APP983

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX9 FigureApp942 IsocandelaDiagramforEachLightinHighintensityRunwayGuardLights ConfigurationA

APP984

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX10

APPENDIX10 SECONDARYPOWERSUPPLYMAXIMUMSWITCHOVERTIMES

Runway NonInstrument

NavigationAidsRequiringPower Visualapproachslopeindicatorsa Runwayedgeb Runwaythresholdb Runwayendb

MaxSwitchOver Time 15seconds 15seconds

Instrument

Obstaclea SRE VOR DME D/Ffacility

15seconds 15seconds 15seconds 15seconds 15seconds 15seconds 15seconds 15seconds 15seconds 15seconds 10seconds 10seconds 10seconds 10seconds 15seconds
a,d

NonPrecisionApproach

Approachlightingsystem Simpleapproachlightingsystema,d Runwayedged Runwaythresholdd Runwayend Obstacle

a

PrecisionApproach CategoryI

ILSlocalizer ILSglidepath ILSmiddlemarker ILSoutermarker

Approachlightingsystem Simpleapproachlightingsystem Runwayedge Runwaythresholdd Runwayend Allstopbars Essentialtaxiwaya

d

15seconds 15seconds 15seconds 15seconds 1second 15seconds

APP101

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX10 MaxSwitchOver Time 15seconds 0seconds 0seconds Runwaymeantfortakeoff InRVR<800m ILSinnermarker ILSmiddlemarker ILSoutermarker 1second 1second 10seconds

Runway

NavigationAidsRequiringPower Obstaclea

PrecisionApproach CategoryII/III

ILSlocalizer ILSglidepath

Inner 300 m of the approach lighting 1second system Other parts of the approach lighting 15seconds system Runwayedge Runwaythreshold Runwayend Runwaycentreline Runwaytouchdownzone Allstopbars Essentialtaxiway Obstaclea Runwayedgec Runwayend Runwaycentreline Allstopbars Essentialtaxiwaya Obstaclea 15seconds 1second 1second 1second 1second 1second 15seconds 15seconds 15seconds 1second 1second 1second 15seconds 15seconds

a.

Suppliedwithsecondarypowerwhentheiroperationisessentialtothesafetyof flightoperations

b. SecondarypowershouldbeprovidedwhereprimaryrunwayisnonInstrument APP102

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX10 MaxSwitchOver Time

Runway

NavigationAidsRequiringPower

Runway,exceptwhereemergencylightingcanbeactivatedwithin15minutes c. Onesecondwherenorunwaycentrelinelightsareprovided d. Onesecondwhereapproachesareoverhazardousorprecipitousterrain

APP103

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX11 APPENDIX11 SIGNS 11.1 11.1.1 11.1.1.1 GENERAL Application Signs shall be provided to convey a mandatory instruction, information on a specific location or destination on a Movement Area or to provide other informationtomeettherequirementsofSMGCS Avariablemessagesignshouldbeprovidedwhere: a) theinstructionorinformationdisplayedonthesignisrelevantonlyduring acertainperiodoftime;and/or b) thereisaneedforvariablepredeterminedinformationtobedisplayedon thesigntomeettherequirementsofSMGCS 11.1.2 11.1.2.1 Characteristics Signs shall be frangible. Those located near a runway or taxiway shall be sufficiently low to preserve clearance for propellers and the engine pods of jet aircraft.Theinstalledheightofthesignshallnotexceedthedimensionshownin theappropriatecolumnofTableApp111.

11.1.1.2

TableApp111 LocationDistancesforTaxiingGuidanceSignsincludingRunwayExitSigns

Note:definedtaxiwayorrunwaypavementedgemeans:theedgeofthedefinedtaxiwayorrunwayasmarkedi.e. thisdoesnotincludetheshoulders.

11.1.2.2

Signs shall be rectangular, as shown in Figures App 118 and App 119 of this Appendixwiththelongersidehorizontal. APP111

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX11 11.1.2.3 Thefaceheightofsignsshallbeasfollows: LegendHeight 200mm 300mm 400mm 11.1.2.4 FaceHeight(Min) 400mm 600mm 800mm

ThefacewidthofsignsshallbedeterminedusingFigureApp111ofthisAppendix except that, where a mandatory instruction sign is provided on one side of a taxiwayonly,thefacewidthshallnotbelessthan: a) 1.94mwheretheCodeNumberis3or4;and b) 1.46mwheretheCodeNumberis1or2. Note:Additionalguidanceondeterminingthefacewidthofasigniscontainedin theAerodromeDesignManual(ICAODoc9157),Part4.

FigureApp111

11.1.2.5

Inscriptionheightsshallconformtothefollowingtabulation.

TableApp112

Note:Whereataxiwaylocationsignisinstalledinconjunctionwitharunwaydesignationsign,thecharactersizeshallbe thatspecifiedformandatoryinstructionsigns

APP112

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX11 11.1.2.6 Arrowdimensionsshallbeasfollows: LegendHeight 200mm 300mm 400mm 11.1.2.7 Strokewidthforsinglelettershallbeasfollows: LegendHeight 200mm 300mm 400mm 11.1.2.8 Stoke 32mm 48mm 64mm Stoke 32mm 48mm 64mm

Theformsofcharacters,i.e.letters,numbers,arrowsandsymbols,shallconform tothoseshowninFiguresApp112ofthisAppendix.Thewidthofcharactersand thespacebetweenindividualcharactersshallbedeterminedasindicatedinTable App113ofthisAppendix. Borders a) Theblackverticaldelineatorbetweenadjacentdirectionsignsshouldhave awidthofapproximately0.7ofthestrokewidth. b) Theyellowborderonastandalonelocationsignshouldbeapproximately 0.5strokewidth.

11.1.2.9

APP113

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX11 FigureApp112 FormsofCharacters

APP114

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX11 FigureApp112(cont.)

APP115

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX11 FigureApp112(cont.)

APP116

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX11 FigureApp112(cont.)

APP117

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX11 FigureApp112(cont.)

APP118

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX11 FigureApp112(cont.)

APP119

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX11 TableApp113 LetterandNumeralWidthsandSpacebetweenLettersorNumerals

APP1110

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX11 11.1.2.10 ColoursforSignsandPanels 11.1.2.11 ThecoloursofsignsshallbeinaccordancewiththespecificationsofthisAppendix. 11.1.2.12 TheonlysignsontheMovementAreautilizingredshallbemandatoryinstruction signs. Note 1: The specifications of surface colours given below apply only to freshly coloured surfaces. Colours used for, signs and panels usually change with time andthereforerequirerenewal. Note 2: Guidance on surface colours is contained in the CIE document entitled RecommendationsforSurfaceColoursforVisualSignallingPublicationNo.39 2(TC106)1983. Note 3: The specifications recommended in Clause 11.1.3.4 of this Appendix belowfortransilluminatedpanelsareinteriminnatureandarebasedontheCIE specifications for transilluminated signs. It is intended that these specifications will be reviewed and updated as and when CIE develops specifications for transilluminatedpanels 11.1.2.13 The chromaticities and luminance factors of ordinary colours, colours of retro reflective materials and colours of transilluminated (internally illuminated) signs andpanelsshallbedeterminedunderthefollowingstandardconditions: a) Angleofillumination:45; b) Directionofview:perpendiculartosurface;and c) Illuminant:CIEstandardilluminantD65.

APP1111

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX11 The chromaticity and luminance factors of ordinary colours for markings and externallyilluminatedsignsandpanelsshouldbewithinthefollowingboundaries whendeterminedunderstandardconditions. CIEEquations(seeFigureApp113): a) b) c) d) e) f) Red Purpleboundary Whiteboundary Orangeboundary Orange Redboundary Whiteboundary Yellowboundary Yellow Orangeboundary Whiteboundary Greenboundary White Purpleboundary Blueboundary Greenboundary Yellowboundary Black Purpleboundary Blueboundary Greenboundary Yellowboundary Yellowishgreen Greenboundary Whiteboundary Yellowboundary y=1.317x+0.4 y=0.910x y=0.867x+0.4 y=x0.030 y=0.570x y=0.050+x y=0.740x =0.03(max) y=0.010+x y=0.610x y=0.030+x y=0.710x =0.75(mnm) y=0.108+0.707x y=0.910x y=1.35x0.093 =0.45(mnm) y=0.285+0.100x y=0.940x y=0.250+0.220x =0.20(mnm) y=0.3450.051x y=0.910x y=0.314+0.047x =0.07(mnm)

Luminancefactor

Luminancefactor

Luminancefactor

Luminancefactor

Luminancefactor

APP1112

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX11 Note: The small separation between surface red and surface orange is not sufficienttoensurethedistinctionofthesecolourswhenseenseparately. 11.1.2.14 Thechromaticityandluminancefactorsofcoloursofretroreflectivematerialsfor markings, signs and panels should be within the following boundaries when determinedunderstandardconditions. CIEEquations(seeFigureApp114): a) Red Purpleboundary Whiteboundary Orangeboundary Luminancefactor Redboundary y=0.3450.051x y=0.910x y=0.314+0.047x =0.03(mnm) y=0.265+0.205x y=0.910x y=0.207+0.390x =0.14(mnm) y=0.160+0.540x y=0.910x y=1.35x0.093 =0.16(mnm) y=x y=0.610x y=0.040+x y=0.710x =0.27(mnm) y=0.118+0.675x y=0.370x y=1.65x0.187 =0.01(mnm) y=0.7111.22x APP1113

b) Orange Whiteboundary Yellowboundary Luminancefactor Orangeboundary Whiteboundary Greenboundary Luminancefactor Purpleboundary Blueboundary Greenboundary Yellowboundary Luminancefactor Greenboundary Whiteboundary Purpleboundary Luminancefactor Yellowboundary

b) Yellow

c) White

d) Blue

e) Green

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX11 Whiteboundary Blueboundary Luminancefactor y=0.243+0.670x y=0.4050.243x =0.03(mnm)

11.1.2.15 Thechromaticityandluminancefactorsofcoloursfortransilluminated(internally illuminated) signs and panels shall be within the following boundaries when determinedunderstandardconditions. CIEEquations(seeFigureApp115): a) Red b) Yellow d) Black Purpleboundary Blueboundary y=x0.030 y=0.570x APP1114 c) White Purpleboundary Blueboundary Greenboundary Yellowboundary Luminancefactor (daycondition) Relativeluminance 100% towhite(nightcondition) y=0.010+x y=0.610x y=0.030+x y=0.710x =0.75(mnm) Orangeboundary Whiteboundary Greenboundary Luminancefactor (daycondition) Relativeluminance 30%(mnm) 80%(max) towhite(nightcondition) y=0.108+0.707x y=0.910x y=1.35x0.093 =0.45(mnm) Purpleboundary Whiteboundary Orangeboundary Luminancefactor (daycondition) Relativeluminance towhite(nightcondition) 5%(mnm) 20%(max) y=0.3450.051x y=0.910x y=0.314+0.047x =0.07(mnm)

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX11 Greenboundary Yellowboundary Luminancefactor (daycondition) Relativeluminance towhite(nightcondition) 0%(mnm) 2%(max) y=0.050+x y=0.740x =0.03(max)

APP1115

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX11 FigureApp113 OrdinaryColoursforMarkingsandExternallyIlluminatedSignsandPanels

APP1116

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX11 FigureApp114 ColoursofRetroReflectiveMaterialsforMarkings,SignsandPanels

APP1117

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX11 FigureApp115 ColoursofTransilluminated(internallyilluminated)SignsandPanels

11.1.3 11.1.3.1

Illumination Signsshallbeilluminatedwhenintendedforuse: a) inRunwayVisualRangeconditionslessthanavalueof800m; b) atnightinassociationwithInstrumentRunways; c) at night in association with NonInstrument Runways where the Code Numberis3or4.

APP1118

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX11 11.1.3.2 Signsshallberetroreflectiveand/orilluminatedinaccordancewiththeprovisions of this Appendix when intended for use at night in association with Non InstrumentRunwayswheretheCodeNumberis1or2. Signluminanceshallbeasfollows: a) Where operations are conducted in Runway Visual Range conditions less thanavalueof800m,averagesignluminanceshallbeatleast: Red Yellow White 30cd/m2 150cd/m2 300cd/m2

11.1.3.3

b) WhereoperationsareconductedwithInstrumentRunwaysatnightorwith nonInstrumentRunwaysatnight,averagesignluminanceshallbeatleast: Red Yellow White 10cd/m2 50cd/m2 100cd/m2

Note:InRunwayVisualRangeconditionslessthanavalue of400m,there willbesomedegradationintheperformanceofsigns. 11.1.3.4 11.1.3.5 Theluminanceratiobetweenredandwhiteelementsofamandatorysignshallbe between1:5and1:10. The average luminance of the sign is calculated by establishing grid points as shown in Figure App 116 and using the luminance values measured at all grid pointslocatedwithintherectanglerepresentingthesign. Theaveragevalueisthearithmeticaverageoftheluminancevaluesmeasuredat allconsideredgridpoints. Note:Guidanceonmeasuringtheaverageluminanceofasigniscontainedinthe AerodromeDesignManual,Part4(ICAODoc9157). 11.1.3.7 Theratiobetweenluminancevaluesofadjacentgridpointsshallnotexceed1.5:1. For areas on the sign face where the grid spacing is 7.5 cm, the ratio between luminance values of adjacent grid points shall not exceed 1.25:1. The ratio between the maximum and minimum luminance value over the whole sign face shallnotexceed5:1.

11.1.3.6

APP1119

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX11 FigureApp116 GridPointsforCalculatingAverageLuminanceofaSign

11.2 11.2.1 11.2.2 11.2.3

VARIABLESIGNS Avariablemessagesignshallshowablankfacewhennotinuse. Incaseoffailure,avariablemessagesignshallnotprovideinformationthatcould leadtounsafeactionfromapilotoravehicledriver. Thetimeintervaltochangefromonemessagetoanotheronavariablemessage signshallnotexceed5seconds.

APP1120

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX11 11.3 11.3.1 11.3.1.1 MANDATORYINSTRUCTIONSIGNS Application Amandatoryinstructionsignshallbeprovidedtoidentifyalocationbeyondwhich anaircrafttaxiingorvehicleshallnotproceedunlessauthorizedbytheaerodrome controltower. Mandatoryinstructionsignsshallincluderunwaydesignationsigns,CategoryI,IIor IIIholdingpositionsigns,runwayholdingpositionsigns,roadholdingpositionsigns andNOENTRYsigns. A Pattern A runwayholding position marking shall be supplemented at a taxiway/runway intersection or a runway/ runway intersection with a runway designationsign.IftherunwayholdingpositionisdesignatedasaCategoryI,IIor IIIholdingposition,themarkingshallbesupplementedwithaCategoryI, IIorIII holdingpositionsign. A Pattern B runwayholding position marking shall be supplemented with a CategoryI,IIorIIIholdingpositionsign. A Pattern A runwayholding position marking at a runwayholding position established in accordance with Clause 8.5.1.3 of this Appendix shall be supplementedwitharunwayholdingpositionsign. Arunwaydesignationsignatataxiway/runwayintersectionshallbesupplemented with a location sign in the outboard (farthest from the taxiway) position, as appropriate. ANOENTRYsignshallbeprovidedwhenentryintoanareaisprohibited. Location A runway designationsign at a taxiway/runway intersection or a runway/runway intersectionshallbelocatedoneachsideoftherunwayholdingpositionmarking facingthedirectionofapproachtotherunway. A Category I, II or III holding position sign shall be located on each side of the runwayholding position marking facing the direction of the approach to the criticalarea. ANOENTRYsignshallbelocatedatthebeginningoftheareatowhichentranceis prohibitedoneachsideofthetaxiwayasviewedbythepilot. Arunwayholdingpositionsignshallbelocatedoneachsideoftherunwayholding positionestablishedinaccordancewithClause8.5.1.3ofthisAppendix,facingthe approach to the obstacle limitation surface or ILS/MLS critical/sensitive area, as appropriate.

11.3.1.2

11.3.1.3

11.3.1.4 11.3.1.5

11.3.1.6

11.3.1.7 11.3.2 11.3.2.1

11.3.2.2

11.3.2.3 11.3.2.4

APP1121

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX11 11.3.3 11.3.3.1 11.3.3.2 Characteristics A mandatory instruction sign shall consist of an inscription in white on a red background. The inscription on a runway designation sign shall consist of the runway designations of the intersecting runway properly oriented with respect to the viewingpositionofthesign,exceptthatarunwaydesignationsigninstalledinthe vicinityofarunwayextremitymayshowtherunwaydesignationoftheconcerned runwayextremityonly. TheinscriptiononaCategoryI,II,IIIorjointII/IIIholdingpositionsignshallconsist of the runway designator followed by CAT I, CAT II, CAT III or CAT II/III, as appropriate. TheinscriptiononaNOENTRYsignshallbeinaccordancewithFigureApp118of thisAppendix. The inscription on a runwayholding position sign at a runwayholding position establishedinaccordancewithClause8.5.1.3ofthisAppendixshallconsistofthe taxiwaydesignationandanumber.

11.3.3.3

11.3.3.4 11.3.3.5

APP1122

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX11 11.3.3.6 Whereappropriate,thefollowinginscriptions/symbolshallbeused: Inscription/Symbol Runwaydesignationof positionatarunway extremity OR Runwaydesignationof bothextremitiesofa runway 25CATI (Example) 25CATII (Example) 25CATIII (Example) 25CATII/III (Example) NOENTRY B2 (Example) Use To indicate a runwayholding a runway extremity Toindicatearunwayholdingpositionlocated atothertaxiway/runwayintersectionsor runway/runwayintersections To indicate a Category I runway holding positionatthethresholdofrunway25 ToindicateaCategoryIIrunway holding positionatthethresholdofrunway25 To indicate a Category III runway holding positionatthethresholdofrunway25 To indicate a joint Category II/III runway holdingpositionatthethresholdofrunway25 Toindicatethatentrytoanareasymbol prohibited is

To indicate a runwayholding position establishedinaccordancewithClause8.5.1.3of thisAppendix

11.4 11.4.1 11.4.1.1

INFORMATIONSIGNS Application An information sign shall be provided where there is an operational need to identify by a sign, a specific location or routing (direction or destination) information. Information signs shall include: direction signs, location signs including aircraft stand identification sign, INS sign and VOR checkpoint sign, destination signs, runwayexitsigns,runwayvacatedsignsandintersectiontakeoffsigns. Arunwayexitsignshallbeprovidedwherethereisanoperationalneedtoidentify arunwayexit. A runway vacated sign shall be provided where the exit taxiway is not provided withtaxiwaycentrelinelightsandthereisaneedtoindicatetoapilotleavinga APP1123

11.4.1.2

11.4.1.3 11.4.1.4

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX11 runway the perimeter of the ILS/MLS critical/sensitive area or the lower edge of theInnerTransitionalSurfacewhicheverisfartherfromtherunwaycentreline. 11.4.1.5 11.4.1.6 Anintersectiontakeoffsignshallbeprovidedwhenthereisanoperationalneed toindicatetheremainingTakeoffRunAvailable(TORA)forintersectiontakeoffs. Wheremultipleapronsareprovided,orelsewhereconsideredtobeoperationally necessaryadestinationsignshallbeprovidedtoindicatethedirectiontoaspecific destinationontheaerodrome,suchascargoarea,generalaviation,etc. A combined location and direction sign shall be provided when it is intended to indicateroutinginformationpriortoataxiwayintersection. Adirectionsignshallbeprovidedwhenthereisanoperationalneedtoidentifythe designationanddirectionoftaxiwaysatanintersection. AlocationsignshallbeprovidedatanIntermediateHoldingPosition.

11.4.1.7 11.4.1.8 11.4.1.9

11.4.1.10 A location sign shall be provided in conjunction with a runway designation sign exceptatarunway/runwayintersection. 11.4.1.11 Alocationsignshallbeprovidedinconjunctionwithadirectionsign,exceptthatit maybeomittedwhereanAeronauticalStudyindicatesthatitisnotneededandit isapprovedbytheAuthority. 11.4.1.12 Wherenecessary,alocationsignshallbeprovidedtoidentifytaxiwaysexitingan apronortaxiwaysbeyondanintersection. 11.4.1.13 WhereataxiwayendsatanintersectionsuchasaTanditisnecessarytoidentify this,abarricade,directionsignand/orotherappropriatevisualaidshallbeused. 11.4.2 11.4.2.1 Location ExceptasspecifiedinClauses11.4.2.3and11.4.2.11ofthisAppendixinformation signsshould,whereverpracticable,belocatedonthelefthandsideofthetaxiway inaccordancewithTableApp111. At a taxiway intersection, information signs shall be located prior to the intersectionandinlinewiththetaxiwayintersectionmarking.Wherethereisno taxiway intersection marking, the signs shall be installed at least 60 m from the centre line of the intersecting taxiway where the Code Number is 3 or 4 and at least40mwheretheCodeNumberis1or2. Arunwayexitsignshallbelocatedonthesamesideoftherunwayastheexitis located(i.e.leftorright)andpositionedinaccordancewithTableApp111ofthis Appendix. A runway exit sign shall be located prior to the runway exit point in line with a positionatleast60mpriortothepointoftangencywheretheCodeNumberis3 or4,andatleast30mwheretheCodeNumberis1or2.

11.4.2.2

11.4.2.3

11.4.2.4

APP1124

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX11 11.4.2.5 A runway vacated sign shall be located at least on one side of the taxiway. The distancebetweenthe sign and thecentrelineofarunwayshall benot lessthan thegreaterofthefollowing: a) the distance between the centre line of the runway and the perimeter of theILS/MLScritical/sensitivearea;or b) thedistancebetweenthecentrelineoftherunwayandtheloweredgeof theInnerTransitionalSurface. 11.4.2.6 11.4.2.7 Where provided in conjunction with a runway vacated sign, the taxiway location signshallbepositionedoutboardoftherunwayvacatedsign. An intersection takeoff sign shall be located at the lefthand side of the entry taxiway.Thedistancebetweenthesignandthecentrelineoftherunwayshallbe notlessthan60mwheretheCodeNumberis3or4andnotlessthan45mwhere theCodeNumberis1or2. A taxiway location sign installed in conjunction with a runway designation sign shallbepositionedoutboardoftherunwaydesignationsign. A destination sign should not normally be colocated with a location or direction sign.

11.4.2.8 11.4.2.9

11.4.2.10 An information sign other than a location sign shall not be collocated with a mandatoryinstructionsign. 11.4.2.11 A direction sign, barricade and/or other appropriate visual aid used to identify a Tintersectionshallbelocatedontheoppositesideoftheintersectionfacingthe taxiway. 11.4.3 11.4.3.1 11.4.3.2 11.4.3.3 11.4.3.4 11.4.3.5 Characteristics An information sign other than a location sign shall consist of an inscription in blackonayellowbackground. Alocationsignshallconsistofaninscriptioninyellowonablackbackgroundand whereitisastandalonesignshallhaveayellowborder. The inscription on a runway exit sign shall consist of the designator of the exit taxiwayandanarrowindicatingthedirectiontofollow. TheinscriptiononarunwayvacatedsignshalldepictthePatternArunwayholding positionmarkingasshowninFigureApp119ofthisAppendix. The inscription on an intersection takeoff sign shall consist of a numerical messageindicatingtheremainingTakeoffRunAvailableinmetresplusanarrow, appropriately located and oriented, indicating the direction of the takeoff as showninFigureApp119ofthisAppendix.

APP1125

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX11 11.4.3.6 The inscription on a destination sign shall comprise an alpha, alphanumerical or numerical message identifying the destination plus an arrow indicating the directiontoproceedasshowninFigureApp119ofthisAppendix. The inscription on a direction sign shall comprise an alpha or alphanumerical messageidentifyingthetaxiway(s)plusanarroworarrowsappropriatelyoriented asshowninFigureApp119ofthisAppendix. The inscription on a location sign shall comprise the designation of the location taxiway,runwayorotherpavement theaircraftisonorisenteringandshallnot containarrows. WhereitisnecessarytoidentifyeachofaseriesofIntermediateHoldingPositions onthesametaxiway,thelocationsignshallconsistofthetaxiwaydesignationand anumber.

11.4.3.7

11.4.3.8

11.4.3.9

11.4.3.10 Wherealocationsignanddirectionsignsareusedincombination: a)alldirectionsignsrelatedtoleftturnsshallbeplacedontheleftsideof the location sign and all direction signs related to right turns shall be placed on the right side of the location sign, except that where the junction consists of one intersecting taxiway, the location sign may alternativelybeplacedonthelefthandside; b) thedirectionsignsshallbeplacedsuchthatthedirectionofthearrows departs increasingly from the vertical with increasing deviation of the correspondingtaxiway; an appropriate direction sign shall be placed next to the location sign where the direction of the location taxiway changes significantly beyondtheintersection;and adjacent direction signs shall be delineated by a vertical black line as showninFigureApp119ofthisAppendix.

c)

d)

11.4.3.11 A taxiway shall be identified by a designator comprising a letter, letters or a combinationofaletterorlettersfollowedbyanumber. 11.4.3.12 Whendesignatingtaxiways,theuseofthelettersI,OorXandtheuseofwords suchasinnerandoutershallnotbeusedtoavoidconfusionwiththenumerals1,0 andclosedmarking. 11.4.3.13 The use of numbers alone on the Manoeuvring Area shall be reserved for the designationofrunways. 11.5 11.5.1 VORAERODROMECHECKPOINTSIGN Application WhenaVORaerodromecheckpointisestablished,itshallbeindicatedbyaVOR aerodromecheckpointmarkingandsign.

APP1126

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX11 11.5.2 Location A VOR aerodrome checkpoint sign shall be located as near as possible to the checkpointandsothattheinscriptionsarevisiblefromthecockpitofanaircraft properlypositionedontheVORaerodromecheckpointmarking. 11.5.3 11.5.3.1 11.5.3.2 Characteristics A VOR aerodrome checkpoint sign shall consist of an inscription in black on a yellowbackground. TheinscriptionsonaVORcheckpointsignshallbeinaccordancewithoneofthe alternativesshowninFigureApp117inwhich: VOR 116.3 147 isanabbreviationidentifyingthisasaVORcheckpoint; isanexampleoftheradiofrequencyoftheVORconcerned; is an example of the VOR bearing, to the nearest degree, whichshouldbeindicatedattheVORcheckpoint;and is an example of the distance in nautical miles to a DME collocatedwiththeVORconcerned.

4.3NM FigureApp117

VORAerodromeCheckPointSign

APP1127

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX11 11.6 11.6.1 AERODROMEIDENTIFICATIONSIGN Application Anaerodromeidentificationsignshallbeprovidedatanaerodromewherethereis insufficientalternativemeansofvisualidentification. 11.6.2 Location Theaerodromeidentificationsignshouldbeplacedontheaerodromesoastobe legible,insofarasispracticable,atallanglesabovethehorizontal. 11.6.3 11.6.3.1 11.6.3.2 11.6.3.3 11.7 11.7.1 11.7.1.1 11.7.1.2 11.7.2 Characteristics Theaerodromeidentificationsignshallconsistofthenameoftheaerodrome. The colour selected for the sign should give adequate conspicuity when viewed againstitsbackground. Thecharactersshallhaveaheightofnotlessthan3m. AIRCRAFTSTANDIDENTIFICATIONSIGNS Application An aircraft stand identification marking should be supplemented with an aircraft standidentificationsignwhereanoseinguidancesystemisprovided. An aircraft stand identification marking should be supplemented with an aircraft standidentificationsignwherefeasible. Location An aircraft stand identification sign were installed, shall be located so as to be clearly visible from the cockpit of an aircraft on a taxilane prior to entering the aircraftstand. 11.7.3 11.7.3.1 11.7.3.2 Characteristics An aircraft stand identification sign shall consist of an inscription in black on a yellowbackground. Thesizeoftheinscriptionshall besuchthatthelettersareeasilydistinguishable from the taxilane where the aircraft stand commences, and shall be illuminated, wheretheaircraftstandisutilisedatnight. INSSIGNS Application

11.8 11.8.1

APP1128

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX11 Anaircraftstandcoordinatesign(INSsign)shallbeprovidedwheneveranaircraft standidentificationsignisprovided. 11.8.2 Location An INS sign shall be located in a position that is readably visible to the pilots occupying either the left or the right seat, and preferable at the nose of the aircraft. 11.8.3 11.8.3.1 11.8.3.2 Characteristics AnINSsignshallconsistofaninscriptioninblackonayellowbackground. An INS sign inscription shall consist of the aircraft stand number and the coordinatesoftheaircraftstandinWGS84format.Coordinatesshallbedisplayed totwodecimalplaces. The coordinates shall be displayed on two lines with the Latitude coordinate displayingabovetheLongitudinalcoordinate. Note:Theaircraftstandnumberdoesnothavetobeincludedwherethesignis collocatedwiththeaircraftstandidentificationsign,orwherenoconfusioncan existastothewhichaircraftstandthecoordinatesapply. 11.8.3.4 The coordinates displayed shall be the same as those published in the AIP AerodromeGroundChart.Thelocation,forwhichthecoordinatesapply,shallbe the central point where the taxiway centre line and stop block intersect, for the forwardmoststoppingpositionontheaircraftstand. ROADHOLDINGPOSITIONSIGN Application Aroadholdingpositionsignshallbeprovidedatallroadentrancestoarunway. 11.9.2 Location The roadholding position sign shallbe located1.5 m from one edge of the road (leftorrightasappropriatetothelocaltrafficregulations)attheholdingposition. 11.9.3 11.9.3.1 11.9.3.2 Characteristics A roadholding position sign shall consist of an inscription in white on a red background. TheinscriptiononaroadholdingpositionsignshallbeinEnglishandArabic,and includethefollowing:

11.8.3.3

11.9 11.9.1

APP1129

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX11 a) b) arequirementtostop;and whereappropriate: i) arequirementtoobtainATCclearance;and ii) locationdesignator. 11.9.3.3 A roadholding position sign intended for night use shall be retroreflective or illuminated.

FigureApp118 MandatoryInstructionSigns

APP1130

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX11 FigureApp119 InformationSigns

APP1131

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX11 FigureApp1110 ExamplesofSignPositionsatTaxiway/RunwayIntersections

Note: Distance X is established in accordance with Table App 82. Distance Y is established at the edge of the ILS/MLS critical/sensitive area. For guidance on critical/sensitiveareasseeICAOAnnex10(AeronauticalCommunications)Vol.1
.

APP1132

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX12 APPENDIX12 MARKINGSANDMARKERS 12.1 12.1.1 12.1.1.1 GENERAL InterruptionofRunwayMarkings Atanintersectionoftwo(ormore)runwaysthemarkingsofthemoreimportant runway, except for the runway side stripe marking, shall be displayed and the markings of the other runway(s) shall be interrupted. The runway side stripe marking of the more important runway may be either continued across the intersectionorinterrupted. Theorderofimportanceofrunwaysforthedisplayofrunwaymarkingsshouldbe asfollows: 12.1.1.3 1st 2nd 3rd precisionapproachrunway; nonprecisionapproachrunway;and nonInstrumentRunway.

12.1.1.2

At an intersection of a runway and taxiway the markings of the runway shall be displayed and the markings of the taxiway interrupted, except that runway side stripemarkingsmaybeinterrupted. ColourandConspicuity Runwaymarkingsshallbewhite. Taxiwaymarkings,runwayturnpadmarkingsandaircraftstandmarkingsshallbe yellow. Apronsafetylinesshallbeofaconspicuouscolourwhichshallcontrastwiththat usedforaircraftstandmarkings. Ataerodromeswhereoperationstakeplaceatnight,pavementmarkingsshallbe madewithreflectivematerialsdesignedtoenhancethevisibilityofthemarkings, exceptwherethelineiscolocatedwithairfieldgroundlighting. UnpavedTaxiways Anunpavedtaxiwayshould be provided,sofaras practicable, withthemarkings prescribedforpavedtaxiways.

12.1.2 12.1.2.1 12.1.2.2 12.1.2.3 12.1.2.4

12.1.3 12.1.3.1

APP121

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX12 12.2 12.2.1 12.2.1.1 12.2.1.2 12.2.2 RUNWAYDESIGNATIONMARKING Application A runway designation marking shall be provided at the thresholds of a paved runway. A runway designation marking should be provided, so far as practicable, at the thresholdsofanunpavedrunway. Location Arunwaydesignationmarking shallbelocatedatathresholdasshown in Figure App121ofthisAppendix. FigureApp121 Runwaydesignation,CentreLineandThresholdMarkings

12.2.3 12.2.3.1

Characteristics Arunwaydesignationmarkingshallconsistofatwodigitnumberandonparallel runways shall be supplemented with a letter. On a single runway, dual parallel runways and triple parallel runways the twodigit number shall be the whole number nearest the onetenth of the magnetic North when viewed from the direction of approach. On four or more parallel runways, one set of adjacent runways shall be numbered to the nearest onetenth magnetic azimuth and the other set of adjacent runways numbered to the next nearest onetenth of the magneticazimuth.Whentheaboverulewouldgiveasingledigitnumber,itshall beprecededbyazero. APP122

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX12 12.2.3.2 In the case of parallel runways, each runway designation number shall be supplemented by a letter as follows, in the order shown from left to right when viewedfromthedirectionofapproach: a) fortwoparallelrunways:LR; b) forthreeparallelrunways:LCR; c) forfourparallelrunways:LRLR; d) forfiveparallelrunways:LCRLRorLRLCR;and e) forsixparallelrunways:LCRLCR. 12.2.3.3 ThenumbersandlettersshallbeintheformandproportionshowninFigureApp 122ofthisAppendix.ThedimensionsshallbenotlessthanthoseshowninFigure App 122 of this Appendix, but where the numbers are incorporated in the thresholdmarking,largerdimensionsshallbeusedinordertofilladequatelythe gapbetweenthestripesofthethresholdmarking.

APP123

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX12
FigureApp122 FormandProportionsofNumbersandLettersforRunwayDesignationMarkings

12.3 12.3.1

RUNWAYCENTRELINEMARKING Application Arunwaycentrelinemarkingshallbeprovidedonapavedrunway.

12.3.2

Location Arunwaycentrelinemarkingshallbelocatedalongthecentrelineoftherunway between the runway designation markings as shown in Figure App 121 of this Appendix, except when interrupted in compliance with Clause 12.1.1 of this Appendix.

12.3.3 12.3.3.1

Characteristics Arunwaycentrelinemarkingshallconsistofalineofuniformlyspacedstripesand gaps.Thelengthofastripeplusagapshallbenotlessthan50mormorethan75 APP124

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX12 m.Thelengthofeachstripeshallbeatleastequaltothelengthofthegapor30 m,whicheverisgreater. 12.3.3.2 Thewidthofthestripesshallbenotlessthan: a) 0.90monPrecisionApproachCategoryIIandIIIrunways; b) 0.45monnonprecisionapproachrunwayswheretheCodeNumberis3or 4,andPrecisionApproachCategoryIrunways;and c) 0.30monnonprecisionapproachrunwayswheretheCodeNumberis1or 2,andonNonInstrumentRunways. 12.4 12.4.1 12.4.1.1 THRESHOLDMARKING Application A threshold marking shall be provided at the threshold of a paved Instrument Runway,andofapavednonInstrumentRunwaywheretheCodeNumberis3or4 andtherunwayisintendedforusebyinternationalcommercialairtransport. A threshold marking should be provided at the threshold of a paved non InstrumentRunwaywheretheCodeNumberis3or4andtherunwayisintended forusebyotherthaninternationalcommercialairtransport. Athresholdmarkingshouldbeprovided,sofaraspracticable,atthethresholdsof anunpavedrunway. Location Thestripesofthethresholdmarkingshallcommence6mfromthethreshold. 12.4.3 12.4.3.1 Characteristics A runway threshold marking shall consist of a pattern of longitudinal stripes of uniform dimensionsdisposedsymmetricallyaboutthecentrelineofarunwayas showninFigureApp121(A)and(B)ofthisAppendix.Thenumberofstripesshall beinaccordancewiththerunwaywidthasfollows: RunwayWidth 18m 23m 30m 45m 60m APP125 NumberofStripes 4 6 8 12 16

12.4.1.2

12.4.1.3 12.4.2

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX12 Except that on nonprecision approach and NonInstrument Runways 45 m or greaterinwidth,theymaybeasshowninFigureApp121(C)ofthisAppendix. 12.4.3.2 The stripes shall extend laterally to within 3 m of the edge of a runway or to a distanceof27 moneitherside ofarunway centre line,whicheverresults inthe smaller lateral distance. Where a runway designation marking is placed above a thresholdmarking,thestripesshallbecontinuedacrosstherunway. Thestripes shall be at least 30 m long and approximately 1.80 m wide with spacings of approximately1.80mbetweenthemexceptthat,wherethestripesarecontinued acrossarunway,adoublespacingshallbeusedtoseparatethetwostripesnearest the centre line of the runway, and in the case where the designation marking is includedwithinthethresholdmarkingthisspacingshallbe22.5m. TransverseStripe Where a threshold is displaced from the extremity of a runway or where the extremity of a runway is not square with the runway centre line, a transverse stripe as shown in Figure App 123 (B) of this Appendix should be added to the thresholdmarking. Atransversestripeshallbenotlessthan1.80mwide. Arrows Wherearunwaythresholdispermanentlydisplaced,arrowsconformingtoFigure App 123 (B) of this Appendix shall be provided on the portion of the runway beforethedisplacedthreshold.

12.4.4 12.4.4.1

12.4.4.2 12.4.5 12.4.5.1

FigureApp123 DisplacedThresholdMarkings

APP126

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX12

12.4.5.2

When a runway threshold is temporarily displaced from the normal position, it shallbemarkedasshowninFigureApp123(A)or123(B)ofthisAppendixandall markings prior to the displaced threshold shall be obscured except the runway centrelinemarking,whichshallbeconvertedtoarrows. AIMINGPOINTMARKING Application An aiming point marking shall be provided at each approach end of a paved InstrumentRunwaywheretheCodeNumberis2,3or4. Anaimingpointmarkingshallbeprovidedateachapproachendof: a) apavednonInstrumentRunwaywheretheCodeNumberis3or4, b) apavedInstrumentRunwaywheretheCodeNumberis1, whenadditionalconspicuityoftheaimingpointisdesirable.

12.5 12.5.1 12.5.1.1 12.5.1.2

12.5.2 12.5.2.1

Location The aiming point marking shall commence no closer to the threshold than the distanceindicatedintheappropriatecolumnofTableApp121ofthisAppendix, exceptthat,onarunwayequippedwithavisualapproachslopeindicatorsystem, the beginning of the marking shall be coincident with the visual approach slope origin.

TableApp121 LocationandDimensionsofAimingPointMarking

12.5.2.2

The greater dimensions of the specified ranges are intended to be used where increasedconspicuityisrequired APP127

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX12 12.5.2.3 12.5.2.4 The lateral spacing may be varied within these limits to minimise the contaminationofthemarkingbyrubberdeposits. Thesefigureswerededucedbyreferencetotheoutermaingearwheelspanwhich is the letter component (second element) of the Aerodrome Reference Code in Appendix7oftheseRegulations. Anaimingpointmarkingshallconsistoftwoconspicuousstripes.Thedimensions of the stripes and the lateral spacing between their inner sides shall be in accordance with the provisions of the appropriate column of Table App 121. Where a touchdown zone marking is provided, the lateral spacing between the markingsshallbethesameasthatofthetouchdownzonemarking. TOUCHDOWNZONEMARKING Application A touchdown zone marking shall be provided in the touchdown zone of a paved precisionapproachrunwaywheretheCodeNumberis2,3or4. Atouchdownzonemarkingshouldbeprovidedinthetouchdownzoneofapaved nonprecisionapproachornonInstrumentRunwaywheretheCodeNumberis3or 4andadditionalconspicuityofthetouchdownzoneisdesirable. Locationandcharacteristics A touchdown zone marking shall consist of pairs of rectangular markings symmetrically disposed about the runway centre line with the number of such pairs related to the Landing Distance Available and, where the marking is to be displayedatboththeapproachdirectionsofarunway,thedistancebetweenthe thresholds,asfollows: LandingDistanceAvailableortheDistancebetween Thresholds lessthan900m Pair(s)ofMarkings 1 2 3 4 6

12.5.2.5

12.6 12.6.1 12.6.1.1 12.6.1.2

12.6.2 12.6.2.1

900muptobutnotincluding1200m 1200muptobutnotincluding1500m 1500muptobutnotincluding2400m 2400mormore

APP128

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX12 12.6.2.2 Atouchdownzonemarkingshallconformtoeitherofthetwopatternsshownin FigureApp124.ForthepatternshowninFigureApp124(A),themarkingsshall benotlessthan22.5mlongand3mwide.ForthepatternshowninFigureApp 124(B),eachstripeofeachmarkingshallbenotlessthan22.5mlongand1.8m wide with a spacing of 1.5 m between adjacent stripes. The lateral spacing betweentheinnersidesoftherectanglesshallbeequaltothatoftheaimingpoint marking where provided. Where an aiming point marking is not provided, the lateralspacing between the inner sides of the rectangles shall correspond to the lateral spacing specified for the aiming point marking in Table App 121 of this Appendix (columns 2, 3, 4 or 5, as appropriate). The pairs of markings shall be provided at longitudinal spacings of 150 m beginning from the threshold except thatpairsoftouchdownzonemarkingscoincidentwithorlocatedwithin50mof anaimingpointmarkingshallbedeletedfromthepattern.

APP129

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX12 FigureApp124 AimingPointandTouchdownZoneMarkings (IllustratedforaRunwaywithaLengthof2400mormore)

AimingpointmarkingrefertoTableApp121ofthisAppendix. 12.6.2.3 OnanonprecisionapproachrunwaywheretheCodeNumberis2,anadditional pair of touchdown zone marking stripes should be provided 150 m beyond the beginningoftheaimingpointmarking.

APP1210

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX12 12.7 12.7.1 12.7.1.1 RUNWAYSIDESTRIPEMARKING Application Arunwaysidestripemarkingshallbeprovidedbetweenthethresholdsofapaved runway where there is a lack of contrast between the runway edges and the shoulders or the surrounding terrain. For unpaved runways, frangible or flush markingsmaybeused. A runway side stripe marking shall be provided on a precision approach runway irrespective of the contrast between the runway edges and the shoulders or the surroundingterrain. Location A runway side stripe marking shall consist of two stripes, one placed along each edgeoftherunwaywiththeouteredgeofeachstripeapproximatelyontheedge oftherunway,exceptthat,wheretherunwayisgreaterthan60minwidth,the stripesshouldbelocated30mfromtherunwaycentreline. Where a runway turn pad is provided, the runway side stripe marking shall be continuedbetweentherunwayandtherunwayturnpad. Characteristics Arunwaysidestripeshallhaveanoverallwidthofatleast0.9monrunways30m ormoreinwidthandatleast0.45monnarrowerrunways. 12.8 12.8.1 12.8.1.1 TAXIWAYCENTRELINEMARKING Application Taxiway centre line marking shall be provided on a paved taxiway, and apron in suchawayastoprovidecontinuousguidancebetweentherunwaycentrelineand aircraftstands. Taxiway centre line marking shall be provided on a paved runway when the runwayispartofastandardtaxirouteand: a) thereisnorunwaycentrelinemarking;or b) wherethetaxiwaycentrelineisnotcoincidentwiththerunwaycentreline. 12.8.2 12.8.2.1 Location Onastraightsectionofataxiwaythetaxiwaycentrelinemarkingshallbelocated alongthetaxiwaycentreline.Onataxiwaycurvethemarkingshallcontinuefrom thestraightportionofthetaxiwayataconstantdistancefromtheoutsideedgeof thecurve.

12.7.1.2

12.7.2 12.7.2.1

12.7.2.2 12.7.3

12.8.1.2

APP1211

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX12 12.8.2.2 Atanintersectionofataxiwaywitharunwaywherethetaxiwayservesasanexit fromtherunway,thetaxiwaycentrelinemarkingshallbecurvedintotherunway centrelinemarkingasshowninFiguresApp125ofthisAppendixandApp913of Appendix 9 of these Regulations. The taxiway centre line marking shall be extendedparalleltotherunwaycentrelinemarkingforadistanceofatleast60m beyondthepointoftangencywheretheCodeNumberis3or4,andforadistance ofatleast30mwheretheCodeNumberis1or2. Where taxiway centre line marking is provided on a runway in accordance with Clause12.8.3ofthisAppendix,themarkingshallbelocatedonthecentrelineof thedesignatedtaxiway. Characteristics A taxiway centre linemarking shall be at least 15 cm in width and continuous in length except where it intersects with a runwayholding position marking or an Intermediate Holding Position marking as shown in Figure App 125 of this Appendix. FigureApp125 TaxiwayMarkings (shownwithbasicrunwaymarkings)

12.8.2.3

12.8.3

Note:Referencesinto5.2.10.1and3.12.2areincorrect.CorrectreferencesshouldbemadetoClauses 12.10.1inAppendix12and8.5.1.2inAppendix8oftheseRegulations.

APP1212

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX12 12.9 12.9.1 12.9.1.1 RUNWAYTURNPADMARKING Application Wherearunwayturnpadisprovided,arunwayturnpadmarkingshallbeprovided forcontinuousguidancetoenableanaircrafttocompletea180degreeturnand alignwiththerunwaycentreline. Therunwayturnpadmarkingshallbecurvedfromtherunwaycentrelineintothe turn pad. The radius of the curve shall be compatible with the manoeuvring capabilityandnormaltaxiingspeedsoftheaircraftforwhichtherunwayturnpad is intended. The intersection angle of the runway turn pad marking with the runwaycentrelineshallnotbegreaterthan30degrees. Therunwayturnpadmarkingshallbeextendedparalleltotherunwaycentreline marking for a distance of at least 60 m beyond the point of tangency where the CodeNumberis3or4,andforadistanceofatleast30mwheretheCodeNumber is1or2. A runway turn pad marking shall guide the aircraft in such a way as to allow a straightportionoftaxiingbeforethepointwherea180degreeturnistobemade. Thestraightportionoftherunwayturnpadmarkingshallbeparalleltotheouter edgeoftherunwayturnpad. Thedesignofthecurveallowingtheaircrafttonegotiatea180degreeturnshall bebasedonanosewheelsteeringanglenotexceeding45degrees. The design of the turn pad marking shall be such that, when the cockpit of the aircraft remains over the runway turn pad marking, the clearance distance between any wheel oftheaircraftlandinggearandtheedge oftherunwayturn padshallbenotlessthanthosespecifiedinClause8.3.9.9a)vi)inthisAppendix. Note: For ease of manoeuvring, consideration should be given to providing a largerwheeltoedgeclearanceforaircraftcodeEandgreater 12.9.2 Characteristics A runway turn pad marking shall be at least 15 cm in width and continuous in length.

12.9.1.2

12.9.1.3

12.9.1.4

12.9.1.5 12.9.1.6

APP1213

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX12 FigureApp125A RunwayTurnPadMarkings Code3or4

12.10 12.10.1

RUNWAYHOLDINGPOSITIONMARKING ApplicationandLocation A runwayholding position marking shall be displayed along a runwayholding position.

12.10.2

Characteristics

12.10.2.1 At an intersection of a taxiway and a noninstrument, nonprecision approach or takeoffrunway,therunwayholdingpositionmarkingshallbeasshowninFigure App125,patternA. 12.10.2.2 Whereasinglerunwayholdingpositionisprovidedatanintersectionofataxiway andaPrecisionApproachCategoryI,IIorIIIrunway,therunwayholdingposition markingshallbeasshowninFigureApp125inthisAppendix,PatternA.Where two or three runwayholding positions are provided at such an intersection, the runwayholdingpositionmarkingcloser(closest)totherunwayshallbeasshown inFigureApp125inthisAppendix,PatternAandthemarkingsfartherfromthe runwayshallbeasshowninFigureApp125inthisAppendix,PatternB.

APP1214

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX12 12.10.2.3 The runwayholding position marking displayed at a runwayholding position establishedinaccordancewithClause8.5.1.3ofthisAppendixshallbeasshownin FigureApp125,PatternAofthisAppendix. 12.10.2.4 Where increased conspicuity of the runwayholding position is required, the runwayholding position marking shall be as shown in Figure App 126 in this Appendix,PatternAorPatternB,asappropriate. 12.10.2.5 WhereapatternBrunwayholdingpositionmarkingislocatedonanareawhereit wouldexceed60minlength,thetermCATIIorCATIIIasappropriateshould bemarkedonthesurfaceattheendsoftherunwayholdingpositionmarkingand atequalintervalsof45mmaximumbetweensuccessivemarks.Thelettersshould benotlessthan1.8mhighandshallbeplacednotmorethan0.9mbeyondthe holdingpositionmarking. 12.10.2.6 The runwayholding position marking displayed at a runway/runway intersection shall be perpendicular to the centre line of the runway forming part of the standardtaxiroute.ThepatternofthemarkingshallbeasshowninFigureApp12 6inthisAppendix,PatternA. FigureApp126 RunwayHoldingPositionMarkings

APP1215

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX12 12.11 12.11.1 INTERMEDIATEHOLDINGPOSITIONMARKING ApplicationandLocation

12.11.1.1 AnIntermediateHoldingPositionmarkingshallbedisplayedalonganIntermediate HoldingPosition. 12.11.1.2 AnIntermediateHoldingPositionmarkingshallbedisplayedattheexitboundary ofaremoteholdingfacilityadjoiningataxiway. 12.11.1.3 WhereanIntermediateHoldingPositionmarkingisdisplayedatanintersectionof two paved taxiways, it shall be located across the taxiway at sufficient distance fromthenearedgeoftheintersectingtaxiwaytoensuresafeclearancebetween taxiing aircraft. It shall be coincident with a stop bar or Intermediate Holding Positionlights,whereprovided. 12.11.1.4 The distance between an Intermediate Holding Position marking at the exit boundaryofaremoteholdingfacilityandthecentrelineoftheadjoiningtaxiway shallnotbelessthanthedimensionspecifiedinTableApp81,Column11. 12.11.2 Characteristics An Intermediate Holding Position marking shall consist of a single broken line as showninFigureApp125. 12.12 12.12.1 VORAERODROMECHECKPOINTMARKING Application WhenaVORaerodromecheckpointisestablished,itshallbeindicatedbyaVOR aerodromecheckpointmarkingandsign. 12.12.2 Location A VOR aerodrome checkpoint marking shall be centred on the spot at which an aircraftistobeparkedtoreceivethecorrectVORsignal. 12.12.3 Characteristics

12.12.3.1 AVORaerodromecheckpointmarkingshallconsistofacircle6mindiameterand havealinewidthof15cm(seeFigureApp127(A)). 12.12.3.2 When it is preferable for an aircraft to be aligned in a specific direction, a line should be provided that passes through the centre of the circle on the desired azimuth.Thelineshouldextend6moutsidethecircleinthedesireddirectionof heading and terminate in an arrowhead. The width of the line should be 15 cm (seeFigureApp127(B)).

APP1216

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX12 FigureApp127 VORAerodromeCheckPointMarking

12.12.3.3 AVORaerodromecheckpointmarkingshallbewhiteincolour. 12.13 12.13.1 AIRCRAFTSTANDMARKINGS Application Aircraft stand markings shall be provided for designated parking positions on a pavedapronforCode2,3and4aircraft. 12.13.2 Location Aircraft stand markings on a paved apron shall be located so as to provide the clearancesspecifiedinClause8.6.5ofthisAppendix,whenthenosewheelfollows thestandmarking. 12.13.3 Characteristics

12.13.3.1 Aircraft stand markings shall include as a minimum such elements as stand identification, leadin line, stop block and leadout line, as are required by the parkingconfigurationandtocomplementotherparkingaids. 12.13.3.2 Aircraftstandmarkingsmayalsoincludesuchelementsasaturnbar,turningline, alignment bar and stop line, as required by the parking configuration and to complementotherparkingaids. 12.13.3.3 Anaircraftstandidentification(letterand/ornumber)shallbeincludedinthelead in line ashort distance after the beginning of the leadin line. The height of the identification shall be adequate to be readable from the cockpit of aircraft using thestand. 12.13.3.4 Where two sets of aircraft stand markings are superimposed on each other in ordertopermitmoreflexibleuseoftheapronanditisdifficulttoidentifywhich stand marking should be followed, or safety would be impaired if the wrong APP1217

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX12 marking was followed, then identification of the aircraft for which each set of markingsisintendedshallbeaddedtothestandidentification. 12.13.3.5 Leadin,turningandleadoutlinesshallbecontinuousinlengthandhaveawidth of not less than 15 cm. Where one or more sets of stand markings are superimposed on a stand marking, the lines shall be continuous for the most demandingaircraftandbrokenforotheraircraft. 12.13.3.6 The curved portions of leadin, turning and leadout lines shall have radii appropriate to the most demanding aircraft type for which the markings are intended. 12.13.3.7 Whereitisintendedthatanaircraftproceedinonedirectiononly,arrowspointing inthedirectiontobefollowedshallbeaddedaspartoftheleadinandleadout lines. 12.13.3.8 A turn bar where provided, shall be located at right angles to the leadin line, abeamtheleftpilotpositionatthepointofinitiationofanyintendedturn.Itshall havealengthandwidthofnotlessthan6mand15cm,respectively,andinclude anarrowheadtoindicatethedirectionofturn. 12.13.3.9 If more than one turn bar and/or stop line is required, they shall be coded with aircrafttype. 12.13.3.10 Analignmentbar,whereprovidedshallbeplacedsoastobecoincidentwiththe extendedcentrelineoftheaircraftinthespecifiedparkingpositionandvisibleto thepilotduringthefinalpartoftheparkingmanoeuvre.Itshallhaveawidthofnot lessthan15cm. 12.13.3.11 A stop line shall be located at right angles to the alignment bar, abeam the left pilotpositionattheintendedpointofstop.It shouldhavealengthandwidthof notlessthan6mand15cm,respectively. 12.14 12.14.1 APRONSAFETYLINES Application Apronsafetylinesshouldbeprovidedonapavedapronasrequiredbytheparking configurationsandgroundfacilities. 12.14.2 Location Apron safety lines shall be located so as to define the areas intended for use by ground vehicles and other aircraft servicing equipment, etc., to provide safe separationfromaircraft. APP1218

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX12 12.14.3 Characteristics

12.14.3.1 Apron safety lines should include such elements as wing tip clearance lines and serviceroadboundarylinesasrequiredbytheparkingconfigurationsandground facilities. 12.14.3.2 Anapronsafetylineshouldbecontinuousinlengthandatleast10cminwidth. 12.14.3.3 ApronsafetyLinemarkingsshouldconformtothecolourguidelinespublishedby AirportCouncilInternational.Standsafetylinesshallbeprovidedandshallbered outlinedinwhite.Serviceroadsshallbemarkedinwhite.Doublewhitelinesshall delineate the vehicle limit line on the apron beyond which clearance from the AerodromeControlTowerisrequired. 12.15 12.15.1 ROADHOLDINGPOSITIONMARKING Application A roadholding position marking shall be provided at all road entrances to a runwayortaxiway. 12.15.2 Location Theroadholdingpositionmarkingshallbelocatedacrosstheroadattheholding positiontoprovideclearancefromaircraftorprotectiontonavigationaids. 12.15.3 Characteristics Theroadholdingpositionmarkingshouldbedisplayedastwodoublewhitelines orbeinaccordancewiththelocalroadtrafficregulations. 12.16 12.16.1 MANDATORYINSTRUCTIONMARKING Application

12.16.1.1 Whereitisimpracticabletoinstallamandatoryinstructionsigninaccordancewith Clause 11.3.1.1 of Appendix 11 of these Regulations, a mandatory instruction markingshallbeprovidedonthesurfaceofthepavement. 12.16.1.2 Where operationally required, such as on taxiways exceeding 60 m in width, a mandatory instruction sign hall be supplemented by a mandatory instruction marking. 12.16.2 Location

12.16.2.1 The mandatory instruction marking shall be located on the lefthand side of the taxiwaycentrelinemarkingandontheholdingsideoftherunwayholdingposition markingasshowninFigureApp128.Thedistancebetweenthenearestedgeof the marking and the runwayholding position marking or the taxiway centre line markingshallbenotlessthan1m. APP1219

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX12 12.16.2.2 ExceptwhereoperationallyrequiredandapprovedbytheAuthority,amandatory instructionmarkingshallnotbelocatedonarunway. 12.16.3 Characteristics

12.16.3.1 A mandatory instruction marking shall consist of an inscription in white on a red background. Except for a NO ENTRY marking, the inscription shall provide informationidenticaltothatoftheassociatedmandatoryinstructionsign. 12.16.3.2 ANOENTRYmarkingshallconsistofaninscriptioninwhitereadingNOENTRYona redbackground. 12.16.3.3 Where there is insufficient contrast between the marking and the pavement surface, the mandatory instruction marking shall include an appropriate border, preferablywhiteorblack. 12.16.3.4 The character height shall be 4 m. The inscriptions should be in the form and proportionsshowninthisClause12.26ofthisAppendix. 12.16.3.6 Thebackgroundshallberectangularandextendaminimumof0.5mlaterallyand verticallybeyondtheextremitiesoftheinscription. FigureApp128 MandatoryInstructionMarking

APP1220

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX12 12.17 12.17.1 INFORMATIONMARKING Application

12.17.1.1 Where an information sign would normally be installed and it is impractical to install,asconfirmedbytheAuthority,aninformationmarkingshallbedisplayedon thesurfaceofthepavement. 12.17.1.2 Whereoperationallyrequiredaninformationsignshouldbesupplementedbyan informationmarking. 12.17.1.3 An information (location/direction) marking should preferably be displayed prior toandfollowingcomplextaxiwayintersectionsandwhereoperationalexperience has indicated the addition of a taxiway location marking could assist flight crew groundnavigation. 12.17.1.4 An information (location) marking shall be displayed on the pavement surface at regularintervalsalongtaxiwaysofgreatlengthwhenrequiredbytheAuthority. 12.17.2 Location The information marking shall be displayed across the surface of the taxiway or apronwherenecessaryandpositionedsoastobelegiblefrom the cockpitof an approachingaircraft. 12.17.3 Characteristics

12.17.3.1 Aninformationmarkingshallconsistof: a) an inscription in yellow upon a black background, when it replaces or supplementsalocationsign;and b) an inscription in black upon a yellow background, when it replaces or supplementsadirectionordestinationsign. 12.17.3.2 Where there is insufficient contrast between the marking background and the pavementsurface,themarkingshallinclude: a) ablackborderwheretheinscriptionsareinblack;and b) ayellowborderwheretheinscriptionsareinyellow. 12.17.3.3 Thecharacterheightshallbeatleast4m.Theinscriptionsshallbeintheformand proportionsshowninClause12.26ofthisAppendix.

APP1221

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX12 12.18 12.18.1 MARKERS General Markers shall be frangible. Those located near a runway or taxiway shall be sufficientlylowtopreserveclearanceforpropellersandfortheenginepodsofjet aircraft. 12.19 12.19.1 UNPAVEDRUNWAYEDGEMARKERS Application Markers shall be provided when the extent of an unpaved runway is not clearly indicatedbytheappearanceofitssurfacecomparedwiththatofthesurrounding ground. 12.19.2 Location Whererunwaylightsareprovided,themarkersshallbeincorporatedinthelight fixtures. Where there are no lights, markers of flat rectangular or conical shape shouldbeplacedsoastodelimittherunwayclearly. 12.19.3 Characteristics Theflatrectangularmarkersshallhaveaminimumsizeof1mby3mandshallbe placed with their long dimension parallel to the runway centre line. The conical markersshallhaveaheightnotexceeding50cm. 12.20 12.20.1 STOPWAYEDGEMARKERS Application Stopway edge markers shall be provided when the extent of a stopway is not clearlyindicatedbyitsappearancecomparedwiththatofthesurroundingground. 12.20.2 Characteristics The stopway edge markers shall be sufficiently different from any runway edge markersusedtoensurethatthetwotypesofmarkerscannotbeconfused. 12.21 12.21.1 TAXIWAYEDGEMARKERS Application TaxiwayedgemarkersshallbeprovidedonataxiwaywheretheCodeNumberis1 or2andtaxiwaycentrelineoredgelightsortaxiwaycentrelinemarkersarenot provided.

APP1222

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX12 12.21.2 Location Taxiwayedgemarkersshouldbeinstalledatleastatthesamelocationsaswould thetaxiwayedgelightshadtheybeenused. 12.21.3 Characteristics

12.21.3.1 Ataxiwayedgemarkershallberetroreflectiveblue. 12.21.3.2 Themarkedsurfaceasviewedbythepilotshouldbearectangleandshallhavea minimumviewingareaof150cm2. 12.21.3.3 Taxiwayedgemarkersshallbefrangible.Theirheightshallbesufficientlylowto preserveclearanceforpropellersandfortheenginepodsofjetaircraft. 12.22 12.22.1 TAXIWAYCENTRELINEMARKERS Application

12.22.1.1 Taxiway centre line markers should be provided on a taxiway where the Code Number is1 or2 and taxiwaycentreline oredgelightsortaxiwayedgemarkers arenotprovided. 12.22.1.2 Taxiway centre line markers shall be provided on a taxiway where the Code Numberis3or4andtaxiwaycentrelinelightsarenotprovidedifthereisaneed toimprovetheguidanceprovidedbythetaxiwaycentrelinemarking. 12.22.2 Location

12.22.2.1 Taxiway centre line markers shall be installed at least at the same location as wouldtaxiwaycentrelinelightshadtheybeenused. 12.22.2.2 Taxiwaycentrelinemarkersshouldnormallybelocatedonthetaxiwaycentreline marking except that they may be offset by not more than 30 cm where it is not practicabletolocatethemonthemarking. 12.22.3 Characteristics

12.22.3.1 Ataxiwaycentrelinemarkershallberetroreflectivegreen. 12.22.3.2 Themarkedsurfaceasviewedbythepilotshouldbearectangleandshouldhavea minimumviewingareaof20cm2. 12.22.3.3 Taxiwaycentrelinemarkersshallbesodesignedandfittedastowithstandbeing run overbythewheelsof anaircraftwithout damageeither to theaircraftorto themarkersthemselves. 12.23 UNPAVEDTAXIWAYEDGEMARKERS

APP1223

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX12 12.23.1 Application Wheretheextentofanunpavedtaxiwayisnotclearlyindicatedbyitsappearance comparedwiththatofthesurroundingground,markersshallbeprovided. 12.23.2 Location Wheretaxiwaylightsareprovided,themarkersshallbeincorporatedinthelight fixtures. Where there are no lights, markers shall be placed so as to delimit the taxiwayclearly. 12.24 12.24.1 BOUNDARYMARKERS Application BoundarymarkersshallbeprovidedatanaerodromewheretheLandingAreahas norunway. 12.24.2 Location Boundary markers shall be spaced along the boundary of the Landing Area at intervalsofnotmorethan200m,ifthetypeshowninFigureApp129isused,or approximately100m,iftheconicaltypeisusedwithamarkeratanycorner. 12.24.3 Characteristics BoundarymarkersshouldbeofaformsimilartothatshowninFigureApp129,or intheformofaconenotlessthan50cmhighandnotlessthan75cmindiameter at the base. The markers should be coloured to contrast with the background againstwhichtheywillbeseen.Asinglecolour,orangeorred,ortwocontrasting colours,orangeandwhiteoralternativelyredandwhite,shouldbeused,except wheresuchcoloursmergewiththebackground.

APP1224

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX12 FigureApp129 BoundaryMarkers

12.25 12.25.1

MARKINGRESTRICTEDUSEAREAS ClosedRunwaysandTaxiwaysorPartsThereof

12.25.1.1 Application a) A closed marking shall be displayed on a runway or taxiway, or portion thereof,whichispermanentlyclosedtotheuseofallaircraft. b) A closed marking should be displayed on a temporarily closed runway or taxiwayorportionthereof,exceptthatsuchmarkingmaybeomittedwhen theclosingisofshortduration(>6hrs)andadequatewarningbyairtraffic services is provided. (see also Clause 9.28 of Appendix 9 of these Regulations) 12.25.1.2 Location On a runway a closed marking shall be placed at each end of the runway, or portion thereof, declared closed, and additional markings shall be so placed that themaximumintervalbetweenmarkingsdoesnotexceed300m.Onataxiwaya closed marking shall be placed at least at each end of the taxiway or portion thereofclosed. APP1225

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX12 12.25.1.3 Characteristics a) The closed marking shall follow the form and proportions as detailed in FigureApp1210,Illustrationa),whendisplayedonarunway,andshallbe oftheformandproportionsasdetailedinFigureApp1210,Illustrationb), whendisplayedonataxiway.Themarkingshallbewhitewhendisplayed onarunwayandshallbeyellowwhendisplayedonataxiway. b) When a runway or taxiway or portion thereof is permanently closed, all normalrunwayandtaxiwaymarkingsshallbeobliterated. c) Airfieldlightingonaclosedrunwayortaxiwayorportionthereofshallnot beoperated,exceptasrequiredformaintenancepurposes. d) In addition to closed markings, when the runway or taxiway or portion thereofclosedisinterceptedbyausablerunwayortaxiwaywhichisused at night, unserviceability lights shall be placed across the entrance to the closedareaatintervalsnotexceeding3m(seeClause9.27.3ofAppendix9 oftheseRegulations). 12.25.2 NonLoadBearingSurfaces

12.25.2.1 Application Shouldersfortaxiways,runwayturnpads,holdingbaysandapronsandothernon load bearing surfaces which cannot readily be distinguished from loadbearing surfacesandwhich,ifusedbyaircraft,mightresultindamagetotheaircraftshall havetheboundarybetweensuchareasandtheloadbearingsurfacemarkedbya taxisidestripemarking. 12.25.2.2 Location A taxi side stripe marking shall be placed along the edge of the loadbearing pavement,withtheouteredgeofthemarkingapproximatelyontheedgeofthe loadbearingpavement. 12.25.2.3 Characteristics Ataxisidestripemarkingshallconsistofapairofsolidlines,each15cmwideand spaced15cmapartandthesamecolourasthetaxiwaycentrelinemarking. 12.25.3 PreThresholdArea

12.25.3.1 Application Whenthesurfacebeforeathresholdispavedandexceeds60minlengthandis notsuitablefornormalusebyaircraft,theentirelengthbeforethethresholdshall bemarkedwithachevronmarking. APP1226

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX12 12.25.3.2 Location A chevron marking shall point in the direction of the runway and be placed as showninFigureApp1211. 12.25.3.3 Characteristics Achevronmarkingshallbeyellowtocontrastwiththecolourusedfortherunway markings.Itshallhaveanoverallwidthofatleast0.9m. FigureApp1210 ClosedRunwayandTaxiwayMarkings

APP1227

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX12 FigureApp1211 PreThresholdMarking

12.25.4

UnserviceableAreas

12.25.4.1 Location Unserviceabilitymarkersandlightsshallbeplacedatintervalssufficientlycloseso as to delineate the unserviceable area. (refer also Clause 9.27 of Appendix 9 of theseRegulations) 12.25.4.2 CharacteristicsofUnserviceabilityMarkers Unserviceability markers shall consist of conspicuous upstanding devices such as flags,conesormarkerboards. 12.25.4.3 CharacteristicsofUnserviceabilityCones An unserviceability cone should be at least 0.5 m in height and red, orange or yelloworanyoneofthesecoloursincombinationwithwhite. 12.25.4.4 CharacteristicsofUnserviceabilityFlags Anunserviceabilityflagshouldbeatleast0.5msquareandred,orangeoryellow oranyoneofthesecoloursincombinationwithwhite. 12.25.4.5 CharacteristicsofUnserviceabilityMarkerBoards Anunserviceabilitymarkerboardshouldbeatleast0.5minheightand0.9min length,withalternateredandwhiteororangeandwhiteverticalstripes. 12.26 DESIGNOFMANDATORYINSTRUCTIONANDINFORMATIONMARKINGS Note 1: See 12.16 and 12.17 for specifications on the application, location and characteristicsofmandatoryinstructionmarkingsandinformationmarkings. Note 2: The following details the form and proportions of the letters, numbers andsymbolsofmandatoryinstructionmarkingsand informationmarkingsona 20cmgrid. APP1228

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX12 FigureApp122

APP1229

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX12 FigureApp122(cont.)

APP1230

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX12 FigureApp122(cont.)

APP1231

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX12 FigureApp122(cont.)

APP1232

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX12 FigureApp122(cont.)

APP1233

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX13 APPENDIX13 OBSTACLECONTROL&MARKING 13.1 13.1.1 13.1.1.1 OBSTACLELIMITATIONSURFACES ConicalSurface Description Conical Surface. A surface sloping upwards and outwards from the periphery of theInnerHorizontalSurface. 13.1.1.2 Characteristics ThelimitsoftheConicalSurfaceshallcomprise: a) aloweredgecoincidentwiththeperipheryoftheInnerHorizontalSurface; and b) an upper edge located at a specified height above the Inner Horizontal Surface. 13.1.1.3 13.1.2 13.1.2.1 The slope of the Conical Surface shall be measured in a vertical plane perpendiculartotheperipheryoftheInnerHorizontalSurface. InnerHorizontalSurface Description Inner Horizontal Surface. A surface located in a horizontal plane above an aerodromeanditsenvirons. 13.1.2.2 Characteristics TheradiusorouterlimitsoftheInnerHorizontalSurfaceshallbemeasuredfroma referencepointorpointsestablishedforsuchpurpose. 13.1.2.3 The heightof the Inner Horizontal Surfaceshall be measured above an elevation datum established for such purpose. The datum shall be based upon the use of the runway. For circuit traffic or circling approaching, the datum shall be the lowestrunwayelevation. Wherethesoleuse willbeforcommercial,instrumentprecision approachtraffic the datum may be the highest runway elevation. Where two or more parallel runways are in use and two datums are utilised, the lowest runway elevation should be used as the datum between the two inner runways, but in any event shallbeagreedwiththeAuthority.

13.1.2.4

APP131

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX13 13.1.3 13.1.3.1 ApproachSurface Description Approach surface. An inclined plane or combination of planes preceding the threshold. 13.1.3.2 Characteristics ThelimitsoftheApproachSurfaceshallcomprise: a) an inner edge of specified length, horizontal and perpendicular to the extended centre line of the runway and located at a specified distance beforethethreshold; b) twosidesoriginatingattheendsoftheinneredgeanddiverginguniformly ataspecifiedratefromtheextendedcentrelineoftherunway;and c) anouteredgeparalleltotheinneredge. d) The above surfaces shall be varied when lateral offset, offset or curved approachesareutilized,specifically,twosidesoriginatingattheendsofthe inner edge and diverging uniformly at a specified rate from the extended centrelineofthelateraloffset,offsetorcurvedgroundtrack. 13.1.3.3 13.1.3.4 Theelevationoftheinneredgeshallbeequaltotheelevationofthemidpointof thethreshold. The slope(s) of the Approach Surface shall be measured in the vertical plane containingthecentrelineoftherunwayandshallcontinuecontainingthecentre lineofanylateraloffsetorcurvedgroundtrack.

APP132

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX13 FigureApp131. ObstacleLimitationSurfaces

SeeFigureApp132forinnertransitionalandbalkedlandingobstaclelimitationsurfaces

APP133

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX13 FigureApp132 InnerApproach,InnerTransitionalandBalkedLandingObstacleLimitationSurfaces

13.1.4 13.1.4.1

InnerApproachSurface Description Inner Approach Surface. A rectangular portion of the Approach Surface immediatelyprecedingthethreshold.

13.1.4.2

Characteristics ThelimitsoftheInnerApproachSurfaceshallcomprise: a) an inner edge coincident with the location of the inner edge of the ApproachSurfacebutofitsownspecifiedlength; b) twosidesoriginatingattheendsoftheinneredgeandextendingparallelto theverticalplanecontainingthecentrelineoftherunway;and c) anouteredgeparalleltotheinneredge.

APP134

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX13 13.1.5 13.1.5.1 TransitionalSurface Description TransitionalSurface.Acomplexsurfacealongthesideofthestripandpartofthe side of the Approach Surface, that slopes upwards and outwards to the Inner HorizontalSurface. 13.1.5.2 Characteristics ThelimitsofaTransitionalSurfaceshallcomprise: a) a lower edge beginning at the intersection of the side of the Approach SurfacewiththeInnerHorizontalSurfaceandextendingdownthesideof theApproachSurfacetotheinneredgeoftheApproachSurfaceandfrom therealongthelengthofthestripparalleltotherunwaycentreline;and b) anupperedgelocatedintheplaneoftheInnerHorizontalSurface. 13.1.5.3 Theelevationofapointontheloweredgeshallbe: a) along the side of the Approach Surface equal to the elevation of the ApproachSurfaceatthatpoint;and b) alongthestripequaltotheelevationofthenearestpointonthecentre lineoftherunwayoritsextension. 13.1.5.4 13.1.6 13.1.6.1 TheslopeoftheTransitionalSurfaceshallbemeasuredinaverticalplaneatright anglestothecentrelineoftherunway. InnerTransitionalSurface Description InnerTransitionalSurface.AsurfacesimilartotheTransitionalSurfacebutcloser totherunway. 13.1.6.2 Characteristics ThelimitsofanInnerTransitionalSurfaceshallcomprise: a) a lower edge beginning at the end of the Inner Approach Surface and extendingdownthesideoftheInnerApproachSurfacetotheinneredgeof thatsurface,fromtherealongthestripparalleltotherunwaycentrelineto theinneredgeoftheBalkedLandingSurfaceandfromthereupthesideof theBalkedLandingSurfacetothepointwherethesideintersectstheInner HorizontalSurface;and b) anupperedgelocatedintheplaneoftheInnerHorizontalSurface.

APP135

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX13 13.1.6.3 Theelevationofapointontheloweredgeshallbe: a) alongthesideoftheInnerApproachSurfaceandBalkedLandingSurface equaltotheelevationoftheparticularsurfaceatthatpoint;and b) alongthestripequaltotheelevationofthenearestpointonthecentre lineoftherunwayoritsextension. 13.1.6.4 13.1.7 13.1.7.1 TheslopeoftheInnerTransitionalSurfaceshallbemeasuredinaverticalplaneat rightanglestothecentrelineoftherunway. BalkedLandingSurface Description BalkedLandingSurface.Aninclinedplanelocatedataspecifieddistanceafterthe threshold,extendingbetweentheInnerTransitionalSurface. 13.1.7.2 Characteristics ThelimitsoftheBalkedLandingSurfaceshallcomprise: a) aninneredgehorizontalandperpendiculartothecentrelineoftherunway andlocatedataspecifieddistanceafterthethreshold; b) twosidesoriginatingattheendsoftheinneredgeanddiverginguniformly ataspecifiedratefromtheverticalplanecontainingthecentrelineofthe runway;and c) an outer edge parallel to the inner edge and located in the plane of the InnerHorizontalSurface. 13.1.7.3 13.1.7.4 13.1.8 13.1.8.1 The elevation of the inner edge shall be equal to the elevation of the runway centrelineatthelocationoftheinneredge. The slope of the Balked Landing Surface shall be measured in the vertical plane containingthecentrelineoftherunway. TakeoffClimbSurface Description Takeoff Climb Surface. An inclined plane or other specified surface beyond the endofarunwayorclearway. 13.1.8.2 Characteristics ThelimitsoftheTakeoffClimbSurfaceshallcomprise: a) aninneredgehorizontalandperpendiculartothecentrelineoftherunway andlocatedeitherataspecifieddistancebeyondtheendoftherunwayor

APP136

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX13 attheendoftheclearwaywhensuchisprovidedanditslengthexceedsthe specifieddistance; b) twosidesoriginatingattheendsoftheinneredge,diverginguniformlyata specified rate from the takeoff track to a specified final width and continuingthereafteratthatwidthfortheremainderofthelengthofthe TakeoffClimbSurface;and c) anouteredgehorizontalandperpendiculartothespecifiedtakeofftrack. 13.1.8.3 Theelevationoftheinneredgeshallbeequaltothehighestpointontheextended runwaycentrelinebetweentheendoftherunwayandtheinneredge,exceptthat whenaclearwayisprovidedtheelevationshallbeequaltothehighestpointon thegroundonthecentrelineoftheclearway. Inthecaseofastraighttakeoffflightpath,theslopeoftheTakeoffClimbSurface shallbemeasuredintheverticalplanecontainingthecentrelineoftherunway. In the case of a takeoff flight path involving a turn, the Takeoff Climb Surface shallbeacomplexsurfacecontainingthehorizontalnormalstoitscentreline,and theslopeofthecentrelineshallbethesameasthatforastraighttakeoffflight path. OBSTACLELIMITATIONREQUIREMENTS NonInstrumentRunways ThefollowingobstaclelimitationsurfacesshallbeestablishedforanonInstrument Runway: a) ConicalSurface; b) InnerHorizontalSurface; c) ApproachSurface;and d) TransitionalSurfaces. 13.2.1.2 13.2.1.3 The heights and slopesof the surfaces shall not be greater than, and their other dimensionsnotlessthan,thosespecifiedinTableApp131. New objects or extensions of existing objects shall not be permitted above an approachorTransitionalSurfaceexceptwhen,intheopinionoftheAuthority,the new object or extension will be shielded by existing terrain that is impractical to remove. New objects or extensions of existing objects shall not be permitted above the Conical Surface or Inner Horizontal Surface except when, in the opinion of the Authority,theobjectwouldbeshieldedbythatisimpracticaltoremove,orafter anAeronauticalStudyitisdeterminedthattheobjectwouldnotadverselyaffect thesafetyorsignificantlyaffecttheregularityofoperationsofaircraft. APP137

13.1.8.4 13.1.8.5

13.2 13.2.1 13.2.1.1

13.2.1.4

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX13 13.2.1.5 Existing objects above any of the surfaces required by 13.2.1 shall as far as practicableberemovedexceptwhen,intheopinionoftheAuthority,theobjectis shieldedbyexistingterrain,orafteranAeronauticalStudyitisdeterminedthatthe objectwouldnotadverselyaffectthesafetyorsignificantlyaffecttheregularityof operationsofaircraft. Inconsideringproposedconstruction,accountshallbetakenofthepossiblefuture development of an Instrument Runway and consequent requirement for more stringentobstaclelimitationsurfaces. NonPrecisionApproachRunways Thefollowingobstaclelimitationsurfacesshallbeestablishedforanonprecision approachrunway: a) ConicalSurface; b) InnerHorizontalSurface; c) ApproachSurface;and d) TransitionalSurfaces. 13.2.2.2 The heights and slopesof the surfaces shall not be greater than, and their other dimensionsnotlessthan,thosespecifiedinTableApp131,exceptinthecaseof the horizontal section of the Approach Surface (see Clause 13.2.2.3 in this Appendix). The Approach Surface shall be horizontal beyond the point at which the 2.5 percentslopeintersects: a) ahorizontalplane150mabovethethresholdelevation;or b) thehorizontalplanepassingthroughthetopofanyobjectthatgovernsthe obstacleclearancealtitude/height(OCA/H); whicheveristhehigher.

13.2.1.6

13.2.2 13.2.2.1

13.2.2.3

APP138

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX13 TableApp131 DimensionsandSlopesofObstacleLimitationSurfaces ApproachRunways

a) Alldimensionsaremeasuredhorizontallyunlessspecifiedotherwise. b) Variablelength(seeClause13.2.2.3or13.2.3.5inthisAppendix) c) Distancetotheendofstrip

d) Orendofrunwaywhicheverisless e) WheretheCodeLetterisF,thewidthisincreasedto155m

APP139

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX13

13.2.2.4

New objects or extensions of existing objects shall not be permitted above an ApproachSurfacewithin3000moftheinneredgeoraboveaTransitionalSurface exceptwhen,intheopinionoftheAuthority,thenewobjectorextensionwould beshieldedbyexistingterrainthatisimpracticaltoremove. New objects or extensions of existing objects shall not be permitted above the Approach Surface beyond 3000 m from the inner edge, the Conical Surface or InnerHorizontalSurfaceexceptwhen,intheopinionoftheAuthority,theobject wouldbeshieldedbyanexistingimmovableobject,orafteranAeronauticalStudy it is determined that the object would not adversely affect the safety or significantlyaffecttheregularityofoperationsofaircraft. Existing objects above any of the surfaces required by Clause 13.2.2 of this Appendixshouldasfaraspracticableberemovedexceptwhen,intheopinionof the Authority, the object is shielded by existing terrain that is impractical to remove,orafteranAeronauticalStudyitisdeterminedthattheobjectwouldnot adversely affect the safety or significantly affect the regularity of operations of aircraft. PrecisionApproachRunways The following obstacle limitation surfaces shall be established for all precision approachrunwaysi.e.CategoryI,IIandIII: a) ConicalSurface; b) InnerHorizontalSurface; c) ApproachSurface; d) InnerApproachSurface e) TransitionalSurfaces; f) InnerTransitionalSurfaces,and g) BalkedLandingSurface.

13.2.2.5

13.2.2.6

13.2.3 13.2.3.1

13.2.3.2

The heights and slopesof the surfaces shall not be greater than, and their other dimensionsnotlessthan,thosespecifiedinTableApp131,exceptinthecaseof the horizontal section of the Approach Surface (see Clause 13.2.3.5 in this Appendix).

APP1310

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX13 13.2.3.3 The Approach Surface shall be horizontal beyond the point at which the 2.5 percentslopeintersects: a) ahorizontalplane150mabovethethresholdelevation;or b) thehorizontalplanepassingthroughthetopofanyobjectthatgovernsthe obstacleclearancelimit; whicheveristhehigher. 13.2.3.4 FixedobjectsshallnotbepermittedabovetheInnerApproachSurface,theInner Transitional Surface or the Balked Landing Surface, except for frangible objects whichbecauseoftheirfunctionmustbelocatedonthestrip.Mobileobjectsshall notbepermittedabovethesesurfacesduringtheuseoftherunwayforlanding. ForCategoryIIIoperations,penetrationsoftheapproach,transitionalandBalked LandingSurfacesbyanyobjectshallnotbepermitted. New objects or extensions of existing objects shall not be permitted above an Approach Surface or a Transitional Surface except when, in the opinion of the Authority,thenewobjectorextensionwouldbeshieldedbyexistingterrainthatis impracticaltoremove. Newobjectsorextensionsofexistingobjectsshouldnotbepermittedabovethe Conical Surface and the Inner Horizontal Surface except when, in the opinion of the Authority, an object would be shielded by an existing terrain, or after an AeronauticalStudyitisdeterminedthattheobjectwouldnotadverselyaffectthe safetyorsignificantlyaffecttheregularityofoperationsofaircraft. Existing objects above an Approach Surface, a Transitional Surface, the Conical SurfaceandInnerHorizontalSurfaceshallasfaraspracticableberemovedexcept when,intheopinionoftheAuthority,anobjectisshieldedbyexistingterrain,or after an Aeronautical Study it is determined that the object would not adversely affectthesafetyorsignificantlyaffecttheregularityofoperationsofaircraft. RunwaysMeantforTakeoff TheobstaclelimitationsurfaceofTakeofClimbSurfaceshallbeestablishedfora runwaymeantfortakeoff. The dimensions of the surface shall be not less than the dimensions specified in TableApp132,exceptthatalesserlengthmaybeadoptedfortheTakeoffClimb Surface where such lesser length would be consistent with procedural measures adoptedtogoverntheoutwardflightofaircraft.

13.2.3.5 13.2.3.6

13.2.3.7

13.2.3.8

13.2.4 13.2.4.1 13.2.4.2

APP1311

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX13 TableApp132 DimensionsandSlopesofObstacleLimitationSurfaces

Slope

5%

4%

1.6%d

a) Alldimensionsaremeasuredhorizontallyunlessspecifiedotherwise b) TheTakeoffClimbSurfacestartsattheendoftheclearwayiftheclearway lengthexceedsthespecifieddistance. c) 1800mwhentheintendedtrackincludeschangesofheadinggreaterthan 15foroperationsconductedinIMC,VMCbynight. d) SeeClause13.2.4.3and13.2.4.5inthisAppendix. 13.2.4.3 Theoperationalcharacteristicsofaircraftforwhichtherunwayisintendedshallbe examinedtoseeifitisdesirabletoreducetheslopespecifiedinTableApp132.If thespecifiedslopeisreduced,acorrespondingadjustmentinthelengthofTake offClimbSurfaceshouldbemadesoastoprovideprotectiontoaheightof300m. NewobjectsorextensionsofexistingobjectsshallnotbepermittedaboveaTake offClimbSurfaceexceptwhen,intheopinionoftheAuthority,thenewobjector extensionwouldbeshieldedbyanexistingterrainthatisimpracticaltoremove. If no object reaches the 1.6 percent (1:62.5) Takeoff Climb Surface, new objects should be limited to preserve the existing obstacle free surface or preferably a surfacedowntoaslopeof1.2percent(1:83). Existing objects that extend above a Takeoff Climb Surface shall as far as practicableberemovedexceptwhen,intheopinionoftheAuthority,anobjectis shielded by an existing terrain that is impractical to remove, or after an AeronauticalStudyitisdeterminedthattheobjectwouldnotadverselyaffectthe safetyorsignificantlyaffecttheregularityofoperationsofaircraft. APP1312

13.2.4.4

13.2.4.5

13.2.4.6

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX13 13.2.5 13.2.5.1 SitingofEquipmentandInstallationsonOperationalAreas Unless its function requires it to be there for air navigation purposes, no equipmentorinstallationshallbe: a) onarunwaystrip,aRunwayEndSafetyArea,ataxiwaystriporwithinthe distancesspecifiedinTableApp81,Column11ofthisAppendix,ifitwould endangeranaircraft;or b) onaclearwayifitwouldendangeranaircraftintheair. 13.2.5.2 Anyequipmentorinstallationrequiredforairnavigationpurposeswhichmustbe located: a) onthatportionofarunwaystripwithin: i) 75moftherunwaycentrelinewheretheCodeNumberis3or4;or ii) 45moftherunwaycentrelinewheretheCodeNumberis1or2;or b) on a Runway End Safety Area, a taxiway strip or within the distances specifiedinTableApp81;or c) onaclearwayandwhichwouldendangeranaircraftintheair; shallbefrangibleandmountedaslowaspossible. 13.2.5.3 Anyequipmentorinstallationrequiredforairnavigationpurposeswhichmustbe located on the nongraded portion of a runway strip shall be regarded as an obstacleandshallbefrangibleandmountedaslowaspossible. Unless its function requires it to be there for air navigation purposes, no equipmentorinstallationshallbelocatedwithin240mfromtheendofthestrip andwithin: a) 60moftheextendedcentrelinewheretheCodeNumberis3or4;or b) 45moftheextendedcentrelinewheretheCodeNumberis1or2; ofaPrecisionApproachRunwayCategoryI,IIorIII. 13.2.5.5 Anyequipmentorinstallationrequiredforairnavigationpurposeswhichmustbe locatedonornearastripofaPrecisionApproachRunwayCategoryI,IIorIIIand which: a) issituatedonthatportionofthestripwithin77.5moftherunwaycentre linewheretheCodeNumberis4andtheCodeLetterisF;or b) issituatedwithin240mfromtheendofthestripandwithin: A) 60moftheextendedrunwaycentrelinewheretheCodeNumberis3 or4;or APP1313

13.2.5.4

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX13 B) 45moftheextendedrunwaycentrelinewheretheCodeNumberis1 or2;or c) penetrates the Inner Approach Surface, the Inner Transitional Surface or theBalkedLandingSurface; shallbefrangibleandmountedaslowaspossible. 13.2.5.6 Any equipment or installation required for air navigation purposes which is an obstaclepenetratingtheconical,innerhorizontal,approachslopemorethan3000 mfromtheinneredge,ortakeoffsurface,shallbefrangibleandmountedaslow aspossible. OuterHorizontalSurface Significant operational problems may arise from the erection of tall structures in the vicinity of airports beyond the areas recognised by ICAO Annex 14; areas in whichrestrictionofnewconstructionmaybenecessary.Asabroadspecification fortheOuterHorizontalSurface,tallstructurescanbeconsideredtobeofpossible significanceif: a) TherunwayisanInstrumentRunway. b) TherunwayisCode3orCode4. 13.2.6.2 The Outer Horizontal Surface is a specified portion of a horizontal plane beyond theperipheryoftheConicalSurfacewitharadiusof15000mfromtheAerodrome ReferencePoint.Inviewofthepotentiallyimportantoperationalconsiderations, theAerodromeOperatorshouldadoptmeasurestoensurethattheyhaveadvance noticeofanyproposalstoerecttallstructures.Thiswillenablethemtoundertake anAeronauticalStudyandtakesuchactiontoprotectaviationinterests. OtherObjects Objects which do not project through the Approach Surface but which would neverthelessadverselyaffecttheoptimumsitingorperformanceofvisualornon visualaidsshall,asfaraspracticable,beremoved. Anythingwhichmay,intheopinionoftheAuthorityafteranAeronauticalStudy, endangeraircraftontheMovementAreaorintheairwithinthelimitsoftheinner horizontal and Conical Surfaces shall be regarded as an obstacle and shall be removedinsofaraspracticable. ObjectstobeMarkedand/orLighted AfixedobstaclethatextendsaboveaTakeoffClimbSurfacewithin3000mofthe inneredgeoftheTakeoffClimbSurfaceshallbemarkedand,iftherunwayisused atnight,lighted,exceptthat: a) suchmarkingandlightingmaybeomittedwhentheobstacleisshieldedby anotherfixedobstacle; APP1314

13.2.6 13.2.6.1

13.2.7 13.2.7.1

13.2.7.2

13.2.8 13.2.8.1

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX13 b) the marking may be omitted when the obstacle is lighted by Medium intensity Obstacle Lights, Type A, by day and its height above the level of thesurroundinggrounddoesnotexceed150m; c) themarkingmaybeomittedwhentheobstacleislightedbyHighintensity ObstacleLightsbyday;and d) the lighting may be omitted where the obstacle is a light beacon and an AeronauticalStudyindicatesthelightbeacontobesufficient. 13.2.8.2 Afixedobject,otherthananobstacle,adjacenttoaTakeoffClimbSurfaceshallbe markedand,iftherunwayisusedatnight,lightedifsuchmarkingandlightingis considered necessary to ensure its avoidance, except that the marking may be omittedwhen: a) the object is lighted by Mediumintensity Obstacle Lights, Type A, by day anditsheightabovethelevelofthesurroundinggrounddoesnotexceed 150m;or b) theobjectislightedbyHighintensityObstacleLightsbyday. 13.2.8.3 A fixed obstacle that extends above an approach or Transitional Surface within 3000 m of the inner edge of the Approach Surface shall be marked and, if the runwayisusedatnight,lighted,exceptthat: a) suchmarkingandlightingmaybeomittedwhentheobstacleisshieldedby anotherfixedobstacle; b) the marking may be omitted when the obstacle is lighted by Medium intensity Obstacle Lights, Type A, by day and its height above the level of thesurroundinggrounddoesnotexceed150m; c) themarkingmaybeomittedwhentheobstacleislightedbyHighintensity ObstacleLightsbyday;and d) the lighting may be omitted where the obstacle is a lighthouse and an AeronauticalStudyindicatesthelighthouselighttobesufficient. 13.2.8.4 Afixedobstacleaboveahorizontalsurfaceshallbemarkedand,iftheaerodrome isusedatnight,lightedexceptthat: a) suchmarkingandlightingmaybeomittedwhen: i) theobstacleisshieldedbyanotherfixedobstacle;or ii) for a circuit extensively obstructed by immovable objects or terrain, procedures have been established to ensure safe vertical clearance belowprescribedflightpaths;or iii) an Aeronautical Study shows the obstacle not to be of operational significance; APP1315

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX13 b) the marking may be omitted when the obstacle is lighted by Medium intensity Obstacle Lights, Type A, by day and its height above the level of thesurroundinggrounddoesnotexceed150m; c) themarkingmaybeomittedwhentheobstacleislightedbyHighintensity ObstacleLightsbyday;and d) the lighting may be omitted where the obstacle is a lighthouse and an AeronauticalStudyindicatesthelighthouselighttobesufficient. 13.2.8.5 13.2.8.6 Afixedobjectthatextendsaboveanobstacleprotectionsurfaceshallbemarked and,iftherunwayisusedatnight,lighted. Vehiclesandothermobileobjects,excludingaircraft,ontheManoeuvringAreaof an aerodrome are obstacles and shall be marked and fitted with an obstruction light. Note: International experience has shown the following specifications to be particularlysuitable.Orangelight,withaflashrateofbetween60and90flashes perminute,withapeakintensityofbetween40cdand400cd,averticalbeam spread of 12 degrees, and with the peak intensity located at approximately 2.5 degreesvertical. 13.2.8.7 Vehiclesandothermobileobjects,excludingaircraft,ontheMovementAreaofan aerodromeareobstaclesandshallbemarkedand,ifthevehiclesandaerodrome are used at night or in conditions of low visibility, lighted, except that aircraft servicingequipmentandvehiclesusedonlyonapronsmaybeexempt. ElevatedaeronauticalgroundlightswithintheMovementAreashallbemarkedso as to be conspicuous by day. Obstacle lights shall not be installed on elevated groundlightsorsignsintheMovementArea. AllobstacleswithinthedistancespecifiedinTableApp81,Column11or12ofthis Appendix, from the centre line of a taxiway, an apron taxiway or aircraft stand taxilane shall be marked and, if the taxiway, apron taxiway or aircraft stand taxilaneisusedatnight,lighted.

13.2.8.8

13.2.8.9

13.2.8.10 ObstaclesinaccordancewithClause13.2.6.1ofthisAppendixshallbemarkedand lighted, except that the marking may be omitted when the obstacle is lighted by HighintensityObstacleLightsbyday. 13.2.8.11 Overhead wires, cables, etc., crossing a wadi, valley or highway shall be marked andtheirsupportingtowersmarkedandlightedifanAeronauticalStudyindicates that the wires or cables could constitute a hazard to aircraft, except that the markingofthesupportingtowersmaybeomittedwhentheyarelightedbyHigh intensityObstacleLightsbyday. 13.2.8.12 When it has been determined that an overhead wire, cable, etc., needs to be marked but it is not practicable to install markers on the wire, cable, etc., then Highintensity Obstacle Lights, Type B, shall be provided on their supporting towers. APP1316

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX13 13.3 13.3.1 13.3.1.1 MARKINGOFOBJECTS General Allfixedobjectstobemarkedshall,wheneverpracticable,becoloured,butifthis is not practicable, markers or flags shall be displayed on or above them, except that objects that are sufficiently conspicuous by their shape, size or colour need notbeotherwisemarked. All mobile objects to be marked shall be coloured or display flashing yellow beacons.Useofhazardlightsontheapronareasisconsideredacceptable. UseofColours An object shall be coloured to show a chequered pattern if it has essentially unbrokensurfacesanditsprojectiononanyverticalplaneequalsorexceeds4.5m inbothdimensions.Thepatternshouldconsistofrectanglesofnotlessthan1.5m and not more than 3 m on a side, the corners being of the darker colour. The colours of the pattern should contrast each with the other and with the backgroundagainstwhichtheywillbeseen.Orangeandwhiteoralternativelyred andwhiteshouldbeused,exceptwheresuchcoloursmergewiththebackground. (SeeFigureApp133.) Anobjectshallbecolouredtoshowalternatingcontrastingbandsif: a) it has essentially unbroken surfaces and has one dimension, horizontal or vertical,greaterthan1.5m,andtheotherdimension,horizontalorvertical, lessthan4.5m;or b) itisofskeletaltypewitheitheraverticalorahorizontaldimensiongreater than1.5m. 13.3.2.3 The bands shall be perpendicular to the longest dimension and have a width approximately 1/7 of the longest dimension or 30 m, whichever is less. The coloursofthebandsshallcontrastwiththebackgroundagainstwhichtheywillbe seen. Orange and white should be used, except where such colours are not conspicuouswhenviewedagainstthebackground.Thebandsontheextremities oftheobjectshallbeofthedarkercolour.(SeeFiguresApp133andApp134of thisAppendix)

13.3.1.2 13.3.2 13.3.2.1

13.3.2.2

APP1317

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX13 FigureApp133 BasicMarkingPatterns

13.3.2.4

Anobjectshallbecolouredinasingleconspicuouscolourifitsprojectiononany verticalplanehasbothdimensionslessthan1.5m.Orangeorredshouldbeused, exceptwheresuchcoloursmergewiththebackground. Whenmobileobjectsaremarkedbycolour,asingleconspicuouscolour,preferably red or yellowish green shall be used for emergency vehicles. Service vehicles shouldbecolouredyellow.

13.3.2.5

APP1318

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX13 FigureApp134 ExamplesofMarkingandLightingofTallStructures

Note:ReferencewithinthediagramtoClause6.3.12isincorrect.DiagramshouldreadClause 13.4.2.2ofthisAppendix.

APP1319

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX13 TableApp133 MarkingBandWidths

13.3.3 13.3.3.1

UseofMarkers Markers displayed on or adjacent to objects shall be located in conspicuous positions so as to retain the general definition of the object and shall be recognizableinclearweatherfromadistanceofatleast1000mforanobjecttobe viewedfromtheairand300mforanobjecttobeviewedfromthegroundinall directions in which an aircraft is likely to approach the object. The shape of markers shall be distinctive to the extent necessary to ensure that they are not mistaken for markers employed to convey other information, and they shall be suchthatthehazardpresentedbytheobjecttheymarkisnotincreased. Amarkerdisplayedonanoverheadwire,cable,etc.,shallbesphericalandhavea diameterofnotlessthan60cm. The spacing between two consecutive markers or between a marker and a supportingtowershouldbeappropriatetothediameterofthemarker,butinno caseshouldthespacingexceed: a) 30mwherethemarkerdiameteris60cmprogressivelyincreasingwiththe diameterofthemarkerto b) 35 m where the marker diameter is 80 cm and further progressively increasingtoamaximumof c) 40mwherethemarkerdiameterisofatleast130cm.

13.3.3.2 13.3.3.3

13.3.3.4 13.3.3.5

Wheremultiplewires,cables,etc.areinvolved,amarkershallbelocatednotlower thanthelevelofthehighestwireatthepointmarked. A marker shall be of one colour. When installed, white and red, or white and orangemarkersshallbe displayedalternately.Thecolourselectedshallcontrast withthebackgroundagainstwhichitwillbeseen.

APP1320

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX13 13.3.4 13.3.4.1 UseofFlags Flags used to mark objects shall be displayed around, on top of, or around the highest edge of, the object. When flags are used to mark extensive objects or groupsofcloselyspacedobjects,theyshallbedisplayedatleastevery15m.Flags shallnotincreasethehazardpresentedbytheobjecttheymark. Flagsusedtomarkfixedobjectsshallnotbelessthan0.6msquareandflagsused tomarkmobileobjects,notlessthan0.9msquare. Flagsusedtomarkfixedobjectsshallbeorangeincolouroracombinationoftwo triangular sections, one orange and the other white, or one red and the other white, except that where such colours merge with the background, other conspicuouscoloursshouldbeused. Flags used to mark mobile objects shall consist of a chequered pattern, each square having sides of not less than 0.3 m. The colours of the pattern shall contrasteachwiththeotherandwiththebackgroundagainstwhichtheywillbe seen.Orangeandwhiteoralternativelyredandwhiteshallbeused,exceptwhere suchcoloursmergewiththebackground. LIGHTINGOFOBJECTS UseofObstacleLights The presence of objects which must be lighted, as specified in 13.6, shall be indicatedbylow,mediumorHighintensityObstacleLights,oracombinationof suchlights. LowintensityObstacleLights,TypeAorB,shallbeusedwheretheobjectisaless extensiveoneanditsheightabovethesurroundinggroundislessthan45m. WheretheuseofLowintensityObstacleLights,TypeAorB,wouldbeinadequate or an early special warning is required, then medium or Highintensity Obstacle Lightsshallbeused. Lowintensity Obstacle Lights, Type C, shall be displayed on vehicles and other mobileobjectsexcludingaircraft. LowintensityObstacleLights,TypeD,shallbedisplayedonfollowmevehicles. LowintensityObstacleLights,TypeB,shallbeusedeitheraloneorincombination withMediumintensityObstacleLights,TypeB,inaccordancewithClause13.4.1.7 ofthisAppendix. MediumintensityObstacleLights,TypeA,BorC,shallbeusedwheretheobjectis anextensiveoneoritsheightabovethelevelofthesurroundinggroundisgreater than45m.MediumintensityObstacleLights,TypesAandC,shallbeusedalone, whereasMediumintensityObstacleLights,TypeB,shallbeusedeitheraloneorin combinationwithLowintensityObstacleLights,TypeB.

13.3.4.2 13.3.4.3

13.3.4.4

13.4 13.4.1 13.4.1.1

13.4.1.2 13.4.1.3

13.4.1.4 13.4.1.5 13.4.1.6

13.4.1.7

APP1321

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX13 13.4.1.8 HighintensityObstacleLights,TypeA,shallbeusedtoindicatethepresenceofan objectifitsheightabovethelevelofthesurroundinggroundexceeds150mand an Aeronautical Study indicates such lights to be essential for the recognition of theobjectbyday. HighintensityObstacleLights,TypeB,shallbeusedtoindicatethepresenceofa towersupportingoverheadwires,cables,etc.,where: a) an Aeronautical Study indicates such lights to be essential for the recognitionofthepresenceofwires,cables,etc.;or b) it has not been found practicable to install markers on the wires, cables, etc. 13.4.1.10 Where, intheopinionoftheAuthority, the useofHighintensityObstacle Lights, Type A or B, or Mediumintensity Obstacle Lights, Type A, at night may dazzle pilots in the vicinity of an aerodrome (within approximately 10000 m radius) or cause significant environmental concerns, a dual obstacle lighting system should be provided. This system should be composed of Highintensity Obstacle Lights, Type A or B, or Mediumintensity Obstacle Lights, Type A, as appropriate, for daytime and twilight use and Mediumintensity Obstacle Lights, Type B or C, for nighttimeuse. 13.4.2 13.4.2.1 LocationofObstacleLights OneormoreLow,MediumorHighintensityObstacleLightsshallbe locatedas closeaspracticabletothetopoftheobject.Thetoplightsshallbesoarrangedas to at least indicate the points or edges of the object highest in relation to the obstaclelimitationsurface. In the case of chimney or other structure of like function, the top lights shall be placed sufficiently below the top so as to minimise contamination by smoke etc. (seeFiguresApp134andApp135ofthisAppendix). In the case of a tower or antenna structure indicated by Highintensity Obstacle Lightsbydaywithanappurtenance,suchasarodoranantenna,greaterthan12 mwhereitisnotpracticabletolocateaHighintensityObstacleLightonthetopof theappurtenance,suchalightshallbelocatedatthehighestpracticablepointand, ifpracticable,aMediumintensityObstacleLight,TypeA,mountedonthetop. Inthecaseofanextensiveobjectorofagroupofcloselyspacedobjects,toplights shallbedisplayedatleastonthepointsoredgesoftheobjectshighestinrelation totheobstaclelimitationsurface,soastoindicatethegeneraldefinitionandthe extent of the objects. If two or more edges are of the same height, the edge nearest the Landing Area shall be marked. Where Lowintensity Obstacle Lights areused,theyshallbespacedatlongitudinalintervalsnotexceeding45m.Where Mediumintensity Obstacle Lights are used, they shall be spaced at longitudinal intervalsnotexceeding900m.

13.4.1.9

13.4.2.2

13.4.2.3

13.4.2.4

APP1322

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX13 13.4.2.5 When the obstacle limitation surface concerned is sloping and the highest point above the obstacle limitation surface is not the highest point of the object, additionalobstaclelightsshallbeplacedonthehighestpointoftheobject. WhereanobjectisindicatedbyMediumintensityObstacleLights,TypeA,andthe topoftheobjectismorethan105mabovethelevelofthesurroundinggroundor the elevation of tops of nearby buildings (when the object to be marked is surroundedbybuildings),additionallightsshallbeprovidedatintermediatelevels. These additional intermediate lights shall be spaced as equally as practicable, betweenthetoplightsandgroundlevelortheleveloftopsofnearbybuildings,as appropriate, with the spacing not exceeding 105 m (see Clause 13.4.1.7 of this Appendix). WhereanobjectisindicatedbyMediumintensityObstacleLights,TypeB,andthe topoftheobjectismorethan45mabovethelevelofthesurroundinggroundor the elevation of tops of nearby buildings (when the object to be marked is surroundedbybuildings),additionallightsshallbeprovidedatintermediatelevels. These additional intermediate lights shall be alternately Lowintensity Obstacle Lights,TypeB,andMediumintensityObstacleLights,TypeB,andshallbespaced as equally as practicable between the top lights and ground level or the level of topsofnearbybuildings,asappropriate,withthespacingnotexceeding52m. WhereanobjectisindicatedbyMediumintensityObstacleLights,TypeC,andthe topoftheobjectismorethan45mabovethelevelofthesurroundinggroundor the elevation of tops of nearby buildings (when the object to be marked is surroundedbybuildings),additionallightsshallbeprovidedatintermediatelevels. These additional intermediate lights shall be spaced as equally as practicable, betweenthetoplightsandgroundlevelortheleveloftopsofnearbybuildings,as appropriate,withthespacingnotexceeding52m. Where Highintensity Obstacle Lights, Type A, are used, they shall be spaced at uniform intervals not exceeding 105 m between the ground level and the top light(s)specifiedinClause13.4.2inthisAppendixexceptthatwhereanobjectto be marked is surrounded by buildings, the elevation of the tops of the buildings maybeusedastheequivalentofthegroundlevelwhendeterminingthenumber oflightlevels.

13.4.2.6

13.4.2.7

13.4.2.8

13.4.2.9

13.4.2.10 Where Highintensity Obstacle Lights, Type B, are used, they shall be located at threelevels: a) atthetopofthetower; b) atthelowestlevelofthecatenaryofthewiresorcables;and c) atapproximatelymidwaybetweenthesetwolevels. 13.4.2.11 The installation setting angles for Highintensity Obstacle Lights, Types A and B, shouldbeinaccordancewithTableApp134ofthisAppendix.

APP1323

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX13 TableApp134 InstallationSettingAnglesforHighintensityObstacleLights

13.4.2.12 Thenumberandarrangementoflow,mediumor Highintensity ObstacleLights at each level to be marked shall be such that the object is indicated from every angleinazimuth.Wherealightisshieldedinanydirectionbyanotherpartofthe object,orbyanadjacentobject,additionallightsshallbeprovidedonthatobject insuchawayastoretainthegeneraldefinitionoftheobjecttobelighted.Ifthe shielded light does not contributeto the definition of the object to be lighted, it maybeomitted. FigureApp135 LightingofBuildings

13.4.3 13.4.3.1 13.4.3.2

LowIntensityObstacleLightCharacteristics Lowintensity Obstacle Lights on fixed objects, Types A and B, shall be fixedred lightse.g.RVRtransmissometers,windsock,glidepath,antennaeetc. Lowintensity Obstacle Lights, Types A and B, shall be in accordance with the specificationsinTableApp135ofthisAppendix.

APP1324

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX13 13.4.3.3 Lowintensity Obstacle Lights, Type C, displayed on vehicles associated with emergencyorsecurityshallbeflashingblueandthosedisplayedonothervehicles shallbeflashingyellow. Lowintensity Obstacle Lights, Type D, displayed on followme vehicles shall be flashingyellow. Lowintensity Obstacle Lights, Types C and D, shall be in accordance with the specificationsinTableApp135ofthisAppendix. LowintensityObstacleLightsonobjectswithlimitedmobilitysuchasaerobridges shall be fixedred. The intensity of the lights shall be sufficient to ensure conspicuityconsideringtheintensityoftheadjacentlightsandthegenerallevelsof illuminationagainstwhichtheywouldnormallybeviewed. LowintensityObstacleLightsonobjectswithlimitedmobilityshallasaminimum beinaccordancewiththespecificationsforLowintensityObstacleLights,TypeA, inTableApp135ofthisAppendix. MediumIntensityObstacleLightCharacteristics Mediumintensity Obstacle Lights, Type A, shall be flashingwhite lights, Type B shallbeflashingredlightsandTypeCshallbefixedredlights. Mediumintensity Obstacle Lights, Types A, B and C, shall be in accordance with thespecificationsinTableApp135ofthisAppendix. MediumintensityObstacleLights,TypesAandB,locatedonanobjectshallflash simultaneously. HighintensityobstaclelightCharacteristics HighintensityObstacleLights,TypesAandB,shallbeflashingwhitelights. Highintensity Obstacle Lights, Types A and B, shall be in accordance with the specificationsinTableApp135ofthisAppendix. Highintensity Obstacle Lights, Type A, located on an object shall flash simultaneously. Highintensity Obstacle Lights, Type B, indicating the presence of a tower supportingoverheadwires,cables,etc.,shouldflashsequentially;firstthemiddle light,secondthetoplightandlast,thebottomlight.Theintervalsbetweenflashes ofthelightsshouldapproximatethefollowingratios:
Flashintervalbetween middleandtoplight topandbottomlight bottomandmiddlelight Ratioofcycletime 1/13 2/13 10/13.

13.4.3.4 13.4.3.5 13.4.3.6

13.4.3.7

13.4.4 13.4.4.1 13.4.4.2 13.4.4.3 13.4.5 13.4.5.1 13.4.5.2 13.4.5.3 13.4.5.4

APP1325

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX13 TableApp135 CharacteristicsofObstacleLights

Note: This table does not include recommended horizontal beam spreads. Clause 13.4.2.12 of this Appendix requires 360 coverage around an obstacle. Therefore,thenumberoflightsneededtomeetthisrequirementwilldependon thehorizontalbeamspreadsofeachlightaswellastheshapeoftheobstacle. Thus,withnarrowerbeamspreads,morelightswillberequired. APP1326

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX13
a) b)

SeeClause13.4.3.3inthisAppendix. Effectiveintensity,asdeterminedinaccordancewiththeAerodromeDesign Manual,Part4(ICAODoc9157). Beamspreadisdefinedastheanglebetweentwodirectionsinaplanefor whichtheintensityisequalto50%ofthelowertolerancevalueofthe intensityshownincolumns4,5and6.Thebeampatternisnotnecessarily symmetricalabouttheelevationangleatwhichthepeakintensityoccurs. Elevation(vertical)anglesarereferencedtothehorizontal. Intensityatanyspecifiedhorizontalradialasapercentageoftheactual peakintensityatthesameradialwhenoperatedateachoftheintensities shownincolumns4,5and6. Intensityatanyspecifiedhorizontalradialasapercentageofthelower tolerancevalueoftheintensityshownincolumns4,5and6. Inadditiontospecifiedvalues,lightsshallhavesufficientintensitytoensure conspicuityatelevationanglesbetween0and50. Peakintensityshouldbelocatedatapproximately2.5vertical. Peakintensityshouldbelocatedatapproximately17vertical.fpm flashesperminute;N/Anotapplicable

c)

d) e)

f)

g)

h) i)

APP1327

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX13 FigureApp136 MediumIntensityFlashingWhiteObstacleLightingSystem TypeA

APP1328

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX13 FigureApp137 MediumIntensityFlashingRedObstacleLightingSystem TypeB

APP1329

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX13 FigureApp138 MediumIntensityFixedRedObstacleLightingSystem TypeC

APP1330

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX13 FigureApp139 MediumIntensityDualObstacleLightingSystem TypeA/TypeB

APP1331

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX13 FigureApp1310 MediumIntensityDualObstacleLightingSystem TypeA/TypeC

APP1332

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX13 FigureApp1311 HighIntensityFlashingWhiteObstacleLightingSystem TypeA

APP1333

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX13 FigureApp1312 High/MediumIntensityDualObstacleLightingSystem TypeA/TypeB

APP1334

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX13 FigureApp1313 High/MediumIntensityDualObstacleLightingSystem TypeA/TypeC

APP1335

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX14

APPENDIX14 ICAOSTATISTICALREPORTINGFORM

FormI AirportTrafficReportingInstructions APP141

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX14
14.1

STATISTICSTOBEREPORTED Columns Description(Columna).Anexplanationofthestatisticaldatacategoriescontained inColumnaisprovidedbelowunder"Rows". AircraftMovementsTotal(Columnb).Arrivalsanddeparturesshallbecounted separately,i.e.onearrivalandonedepartureshallbecountedastwomovements. Local aircraft movements, i.e. movements of aircraft, which take off and land at thesameairportwithinashortperiodoftime,maybeexcluded,inwhichcasethis shouldbenotedontheform. Passengers(Columnsctof) Embarked(Columnc).Enterthenumberofrevenueandnonrevenue passengerswhoseairjourneybeginsatthereportingairport,including the number of disembarked passengers, other than those reported underColumnI,whoarecontinuingtheirairjourney. Disembarked (Column d). Enter the number of passengers whose air journey terminates at the reporting airport, including the number of passengers,otherthanthosepassengersreportedunderColumnf,who willcontinuetheirairjourney. Total (Column e). Enter the sum of passengers embarked plus disembarked(ColumncplusColumnd). Direct transit (Column f). Enter the number of passengers who continuetheirjourneyonaflighthavingthesameflightnumberasthe flightonwhichtheyarrived.Passengersindirecttransitshouldthusbe countedonlyonce.Othertransitpassengersandstopoverpassengers will be counted twice: once as embarked passengers and once as disembarkedpassengers. Freightandmail(tonnes)(Columnsgtoi).Thenumberoffreighttonnesincludes express and diplomatic bags but not passenger baggage. The number of mail tonnes includes all correspondence and other objects tendered by and intended fordeliverytopostaladministrations. Loadedandunloaded.Thesetermsasappliedtofreightandmailhavemeanings similarto'embarked"and"disembarked"above.

14.1.1

14.1.2

Rows Note:Theterm"loads"asusedbelowreferstothepassengers,freightandmail carriedbytheaircraft.

14.1.2.1

CommercialAirTransport Internationalscheduled(Item1).Reportunderthisitemtheaircraftmovements (andloads)ofinternationalservicesproceededbyflightsscheduledandperformed forremunerationaccordingtoapublishedtimetable,orsoregularorfrequentas toconstitutearecognizablysystematicseries,whichareopentodirectbookingby APP142

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX14 members of the public: and extra section flights occasioned by overflow traffic fromscheduledflights. International nonscheduled (Item 2). Report under this item the aircraft movements(andloads)ofinternationalcharterandspecialflightsotherthanthose reported under scheduled flights, performed for remuneration on an irregular basis including empty flights related thereto, inclusive tours other than those reportedunderscheduledservices,andblockedoffcharters. TotalInternational(Item3).Reportunderthisitemthosecaseswhereanairport has both international scheduled traffic and international nonscheduled traffic thatcannotbereportedseparatelyunderItems1and2above. Domesticscheduledandnonscheduled(Item4).Reportunderthisitemboththe scheduledandnonscheduledservicesofcommercialairtransportoperatorsonly. Totalcommercialairtransport(Item5).Reportunderthisiteminternationaland domestic air transport services, both scheduled and nonscheduled, which are availabletothepublicforthetransportationofpassengers,mailand/orfreightfor remuneration. Allfreight/mailservices(Item6).Reportunderthisitemdataconcerningflights performed by aircraft carrying loads other than passengers, i.e. freight, mail and unaccompanied baggage. Exclude all flights carrying one or more revenue passengers as well as those listed in schedules as passenger service. Allfreight/mail services traffic should also be included in the data on aircraft movements,freightandmailtonnagereportedunderItems1to5. 14.1.2.2 AllOtherMovements Reporthereallaircraftmovements,otherthanthoseofcommercialairtransport. Include commercial activities such as crop dusting, aerial photography, pilot training (at training schools) and business and executive flying, as well as the movementsofmilitaryaircraft. 14.2 DEFINITIONOFTERMSUSED AircraftMovements International.Allflightsofnationalorforeignaircraftwhoseoriginor destinationislocatedintheterritoryofaStateotherthanthatinwhichthe airportbeingreportedonislocated. Domestic.Allflightsofnationalorforeignaircraftinwhichalltheairports arelocatedintheterritoryofthesameState. Inbothcasestheflightshallbeconsideredasconsistingofthetotalofits flightstages(i.e.fromtakeofftoitsnextlanding);technicalstopsarenot takenintoaccount. Passenger,FreightandMail International.Appliestopassengers,freightandmaildisembarkedatan airportlocatedinaStateotherthanthatoftheairportofembarkation,or viceversa. APP143

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX14 Domestic.Appliestopassengers,freightandmaildisembarkedatan airportlocatedintheStateoftheairportofembarkationorviceversa. 14.3 UNITSOFMEASUREMENT Reportmetrictonnestothenearesttenthofatonne.Usethefollowing conversionfactors(foot/poundsystemtometricsystem): 1shortton(2000lb)=0.9072tonnes 1longton(2240lb)=1.0160tonnes 14.4 SYMBOLS Pleaseusethefollowingsymbolsasnecessaryincompletingthisform: *estimateddata(asteriskimmediatelyfollowingtheestimatedfigure) (blank)categorynotapplicable N.A.datanotavailable.

APP144

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX15

APPENDIX15 BIRDSTRIKEREPORTINGFORM

APP151

CARPARTIX,APPENDIX16

APPENDIX16 HELIPORTS 16.1 16.2 16.3 16.4 ThisAppendixappliestoheliportsthatarerequiredtoorwishtobecertified. Chapter2oftheseRegulationsindicateswhathelicopteroperationsarerequired tobeconductedfromortoacertifiedfacility. Thecertificationprocessforaheliportisthesameasthatrequiredforfixedwing aerodromes,andislaidoutinChapter2oftheseRegulations. Thestandardsandbestpracticeagainstwhichtheapplicationforacertificatewill beassessedarethoselaidoutinICAOAnnex14,Volumes1and2.TheHeliport Manual (ICAO Doc 9261AN/903) provides expanded guidance on the requirementsofAnnex14,Volume2. TheAerodromeOperatorshallmeetthestandardsandbestpracticesreferenced inClause1.4inthisAppendixandtheseRegulations. When compiling the Aerodrome Manual, certificate applicants should also be awareofanyrequirementsthatmightapplytotheiroperationsfromICAOAnnex6 (OperationofAircraft),Part3,InternationalOperations,Helicopters. Certain aspects of the requirements of other ICAO Annexes may also apply and should be considered or discussed with the Authority when applying for an AerodromeCertificate. Note:Additionalspecificreferenceswhichmaybeusefulinclude: a) ICAODoc9157,AerodromeDesignManualVisualAids,PartIV,Chapter 14onMarkingandLightingofObstacles; b) ICAO Annex 14 Volume I, Chapter 6 on Visual Aids for Denoting Obstacles; c) NFPA418StandardsforHeliports;and d) ICAOAirportServiceManualPart1Rescue&FireFighting.

16.5 16.6

16.7

APP161